Panasonic AJ HPX2700G User Manual

This product is eligible for the P2HD  
5 Year Warranty Repair Program. For  
details, see page 6.  
Operating Instructions  
Memory Card Camera-Recorder  
Model No.  
AJ-HPX2700G  
Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual for future use.  
ENGLISH  
F0808T0 -F [D]  
Printed in Japan  
VQT1V27  
A rechargeable battery that is recyclable powers the product you have purchased.  
<For USA-California Only>  
This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.  
See www.dtsc.ca/gov/hazardouswaste.perchlorate.  
Caution regarding laser beams  
The CCD may be damaged if it is subjected to light from a laser beam.  
When using the camera-recorder in locations where laser irradiation equipment is used, be careful not to allow the laser  
beam to shine directly on the lens.  
EU  
To remove the battery  
Main Power Battery (Ni-Cd / Ni-MH / Li-ion Battery)  
To detach the battery, please proceed in the reverse order of the installation method described in this manual.  
(Refer to page 107 for the detail.)  
If a battery made by any other manufacturer is to be used, check the Operating Instructions accompanying the battery.  
Back-up Battery (Lithium Battery)  
For the removal of the battery for disposal at the end of its service life, please consult your dealer.  
PLEASE NOTE:  
When preparing to record important images, always shoot some advance test footage, to verify that both pictures and  
sound are being recorded normally.  
Should video or audio recording fail due to a malfunction of this camera-recorder or the P2 cards used, we will not  
assume liability for such failure.  
If the unit is operated continuously with the fan stopped due to a failure, camera images may not be output, recorded, or  
played back properly.  
What to remember when throwing memory cards away or transferring them to others  
Formatting memory cards or deleting data using the functions of the unit or a computer will merely change the file  
management information: it will not completely erase the data on the cards. When throwing these cards away or  
transferring them to others, either physically destroy them or use a data deletion program for computers (commercially  
available) to completely erase the data. Users are responsible for managing the data on their memory cards.  
3
Read this first!.......................................................................................... 2  
General  
Features of the Input/Output unit ............................................................ 11  
Other features......................................................................................... 11  
Dimensions drawing............................................................................... 12  
Color TV Standard Settings  
Parts and their Functions  
Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section ................................... 15  
Audio (input) Function Section............................................................... 16  
Audio (output) Function Section............................................................. 17  
Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section ........................... 18  
Menu Operation Section ........................................................................ 23  
Time Code Section................................................................................. 24  
Recording and Playback  
P2 Cards................................................................................................ 30  
How to handle data recorded on P2 cards............................................. 32  
Basic Procedures................................................................................... 33  
Normal Recording.................................................................................. 35  
PRE RECORDING function................................................................... 36  
Variable Frame Rate (VFR) Recording Function ................................... 37  
Loop Recording...................................................................................... 40  
Interval Recording.................................................................................. 41  
Recording Review Function................................................................... 43  
Normal and Variable Speed Playback.................................................... 44  
Text Memo Function............................................................................... 44  
Shot Mark Function................................................................................ 45  
Recording Setting and Operation Mode................................................. 45  
4
Recording  
Multi Format........................................................................................... 46  
Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance.................................... 49  
Setting the Electronic Shutter ................................................................ 53  
Assigning Functions to User Buttons..................................................... 56  
Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels............. 58  
Setting Time Data .................................................................................. 60  
Viewfinder Screen Status Displays ........................................................ 74  
Chromatic Aberration Compensation (CAC)........................................ 103  
Preparation  
Mounting the lens and Performing the Flange Back and White Shading  
Attaching the Shoulder Strap ................................................................ 116  
Attaching the Rain Cover...................................................................... 116  
(AJ-RC10G) .......................................................................................... 117  
Attaching the Front Audio Level Control Knob...................................... 118  
Connection of the external switch......................................................... 119  
Thumbnails  
Thumbnail Manipulations Overview..................................................... 120  
Thumbnail Screen................................................................................ 121  
Selecting Thumbnails .......................................................................... 123  
Playing back Clips................................................................................ 123  
Switching the Thumbnail Display......................................................... 124  
Shot Mark ............................................................................................ 126  
Text Memo ........................................................................................... 126  
Deleting Clips....................................................................................... 128  
Restoring Clips..................................................................................... 129  
Reconnection of Incomplete Clips ....................................................... 129  
Copying Clips....................................................................................... 130  
Setting of Clip Meta Data..................................................................... 131  
5
Setting of Proxy (optional).................................................................... 134  
Formatting SD memory cards.............................................................. 135  
Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode ................................................... 136  
Properties............................................................................................. 137  
Connection with external  
device  
Warning System................................................................................... 155  
Menu  
Menu Configuration.............................................................................. 161  
Menu Description Tables...................................................................... 165  
Updating the firmware incorporated into the unit................................................................. 201  
Specifications....................................................................................................................... 202  
P2HD 5 Year Warranty Repair Program*1  
Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic P2HD device.  
Register as a user for this device to receive a special service warranty up to five years of free warranty repairs.  
Customers who register as users on the website will receive an extended warranty repair valid for up to  
five years.  
5
1st year  
2nd year  
3rd year  
Extended warranty repair  
*
4th year  
5th year  
*
2
3
4
P2HD device  
Basic warranty  
*
*
*1: Please note that this extended warranty is not available in some countries/regions. *2: Not all models eligible for extended warranty coverage.  
*3: The basic warranty period may vary depending on the country/region. *4: Not all repair work is covered by this extended warranty.  
*5: The maximum warranty period may be adjusted depending on the number of hours the device has been used.  
Free 5 years of Warranty Repairs  
Make sure to save the “Registration Notice” e-mail  
during the warranty period.  
Purchase  
P2 product  
Register online  
within 1 month  
“Registration Notice”  
e-mail sent  
Details about user registration and the extended warranty: http://panasonic.biz/sav/pass_e  
Please note, this is a site that is not maintained by Panasonic Canada Inc. The Panasonic Canada Inc. privacy policy does not apply and is not applicable in relation to any  
information submitted. This link is provided to you for convenience.  
6
 
General  
Attention  
Adjust the following 2 settings when using the unit for the first time.  
Adjust the black-balance setting when using the unit for the first time. (Refer to page 52)  
The unit is delivered from the factory with the color TV standard not yet specified. To revise the settings for frame  
frequency according to the TV standard, refer to the procedures described on page 13.  
The unit is a CCD camera-recorder in which a camera unit equipped with three 2/3-type CCDs which support progressive  
drive (reading of all pixels) is integrated with a recording/playback unit which supports the compression formats AVC-Intra100,  
AVC-Intra50 and DVCPRO HD.  
The unit supports the HD methods shown in the following table. The unit is also equipped with CAC (chromatic aberration  
correction function for the magnification ratio chromatic aberration of lenses), Variable Frame Rate (hereafter called “VFR”)  
from 1P to 60P in 720-59.94P and 720-60P, (from 1P to 50P in 720-50P), Scan Reverse (corrects images when Anamo  
lenses or lenses for film applications are used), and the film-like gamma function.  
For recording, the compression and recording methods are selectable among AVC-Intra100, AVC-Intra50, and DVCPRO HD.  
Since minimal image deterioration occurs when recording with AVC-Intra100 compression in particular, high image quality can  
be retained.  
Supported formats  
SYSTEM MODE  
Shooting/Recording method  
VFR  
Variable range of VFR  
59.94i  
29.97PN  
23.98PN  
AVC-Intra100  
AVC-Intra50  
1080-59.94i  
59.94i  
29.97P  
23.98P  
23.98PA  
DVCPRO HD  
AVC-Intra100  
AVC-Intra50  
Not possible  
1080-23.98PsF  
1080-24PsF  
23.98PN  
24PN  
AVC-Intra100  
AVC-Intra50  
AVC-Intra100  
AVC-Intra50  
50i  
25PN  
1080-50i  
50i  
25P  
DVCPRO HD  
59.94P  
29.97PN  
23.98PN  
AVC-Intra100  
AVC-Intra50  
720-59.94P  
59.94P  
DVCPRO HD  
29.97PN  
Possible  
Possible  
1 - 60FRAME  
AVC-Intra50  
24PN  
24PN  
720-60P  
720-50P  
DVCPRO HD  
AVC-Intra100  
AVC-Intra50  
50P  
25PN  
1 - 50FRAME  
50P  
25PN  
DVCPRO HD  
For more details, refer to [Selecting a recording signal and method] (page 46) and [Recording formats and output connector  
signal formats] (page 47).  
General:  
7
 
Features of Camera unit  
Multi-format  
Lens file function  
The unit realizes a variety of recording methods using three  
2/3-type CCDs which support progressive drive (reading all  
pixels). (Refer to page 46)  
The unit has 64 lens files.  
By using an SD memory card, 64 lens files can be stored.  
(Refer to page 98)  
Chromatic Aberration Compensation function  
The unit is equipped with a function to correct the  
magnification ratio chromatic aberration of lenses caused by  
the fact that the refractive index in lenses varies with the  
wavelength of light (hereinafter referred to as chromatic  
aberration). By using this function, chromatic aberration  
around the lens can be corrected and high definition images  
can be obtained. However, a lens supporting chromatic  
aberration compensation is must be used. (Refer to  
page 103)  
Focus assist function  
The unit will display a marker to help with focusing when  
shooting videos. This function provides a visual cue for  
focusing. (Refer to page 56)  
Data management function  
Within the unit, one user data file and 16 sets of scene file  
data can be saved.  
By using an SD memory card as the setup card, up to 8 sets  
of setup data can be stored. (Refer to page 89)  
Scan Reverse function  
Color bar  
The Scan Reverse function, as standard configuration,  
cancels the image inversion that occurs when a lens adapter  
from Canon or Angenieux is used, and it can be switched  
through the menu settings. (Refer to page 166)  
The unit employs the SMPTE color bar, ARIB color bar, Split  
color bar for SNG (Satellite News Gathering) as well as the  
conventional color bar, which is useful for adjusting the color  
monitor. (Refer to page 187)  
Film-like Gamma function  
VFR  
To facilitate acquisition of pictures with a film-like tone, the  
unit is equipped with a film-like gamma function of the type  
developed for the Varicam (AJ-HDC27 series). (Refer to  
page 178)  
This unit has a VFR function which allows overcrank and  
undercrank shooting. (Refer to page 37)  
Monitor Gamma  
When the conventional gamma setting is set to “FILM-REC”,  
images with FILM-REC gamma characteristics (Nega look  
images) are output to the HD SDI A · B outputs, the monitor,  
the viewfinder, the remote control unit and the LCD, and  
recorded to the P2 card.  
Monitor output images, viewfinder images, remote control  
output images, and LCD output images can be converted to  
the high contrast images (Posi Look images) using monitor  
gamma.  
2-disk 4-type configuration optical filters  
The unit is equipped with CC filters for 3200 K, 4300 K,  
5600 K, and 1/2 ND. The 5600 K CC filter setting, often  
selected for shooting outdoors, and the 1/2 ND setting to  
allow finer adjustments to the lens aperture are provided as  
standard. (Refer to page 18)  
14-bit A/D conversion digital signal processing  
Analog video signals are processed into digital data by a 14-  
bit A/D converter with sampling frequencies of 74 MHz. It is  
possible to reproduce images that are more finely detailed.  
DRS (Dynamic Range Stretcher) function  
With this function, the dynamic range of high brightness  
areas that may be skipped with white blanks in an ordinary  
recording method can be expanded by compressing images  
and maintaining the contrast. (Refer to page 56)  
General: Features of Camera unit  
8
 
Features of Recorder/Player unit  
Multiple Slots  
HD format; AVC-Intra100/AVC-Intra50/  
The unit is equipped with 5 slots for P2 cards. Up to 5 cards  
may be inserted in these slots for continuous recording.  
They also provide new recording capabilities specific to  
memory cards.  
DVCPRO HD switchable  
Recorded video is compressed through a component digital  
recording method that uses a state-of-the-art compression  
technology, and sound is recorded using the non-  
compression PCM recording method, which excels in such  
areas as S/N ratio, frequency bands, waveform properties  
and reproducibility of fine areas. These methods further  
enhance the quality of images and sound.  
Hot-Swap recording  
The Hot-Swap capability allows cards not in use to be  
replaced without interrupting recording. This facilitates  
continuous recording.  
LOOP REC function  
It is also possible to select DVCPRO HD in addition to  
H.264/AVC-Intra Profile compression. The unit performs the  
in-frame compression.  
The unit can retain a certain amount of previously  
recorded material by continuously loop-recording data into  
a specified recording area.  
INTERVAL REC/ONE SHOT REC function  
The unit features interval recording at minimum one-frame  
intervals. This function is particularly suited to shooting  
science and nature programs. Frame-by-frame shooting is  
simple with the one-shot recording function.  
PRE RECORDING function  
In standby status, the unit always stores video and sound  
input to the camera for up to 8 seconds. This means that  
the PRE RECORDING function, when turned on, records  
the video and sound for a preceding duration preset by the  
user. This feature recovers critical moments that you might  
have missed.  
By installing the optional video encoder card (AJ-  
YAX800G), MPEG4 format video and real-time metadata  
such as time code data can be recorded simultaneously  
on the P2 card and the SD memory card, together with the  
video and sound recorded by the camera. This function is  
useful for confirmation or editing of clips. For more  
information about the approximate duration for proxy  
recording on SD memory cards, see [Approximate Proxy  
Recording Time (optional) on SD memory cards]  
(page 11). Please also see <Cautions in using SD memory  
cards> (page 22)  
Note  
When the clip is played back in the format not selected on  
the menu, the picture may be disturbed until the format is  
detected. This is not a failure.  
4-channel Digital Audio Recording (all formats)  
All formats except VFR native recording support 4-channel  
digital audio recording.  
Clip Thumbnailing  
Automatic generation of thumbnails  
The unit automatically generates a thumbnail for each  
recording cut (clip). It is possible to make use of this on the  
unit as well as for non-linear editing purposes, and after  
uploading to a server.  
Thumbnail display on the LCD monitor  
The 3.5-inch color LCD side of the unit can provide a  
multi-screen view of 12 clip thumbnails. Alternatively, the  
LCD can provide a view of 6 enlarged thumbnails. You can  
choose a desired clip to playback instantly.  
Seamless playback of selected clips  
You can select more than one clip from the thumbnail view  
for continuous playback and output of seamless video.  
Data protection  
Note  
Data on P2 cards will not be lost due to overwriting unless  
the files are deleted or the cards are initialized.  
Recordings are written only to free space.  
During continuous playback of clips in different  
recording formats, seamless playback is not available.  
Display of clip information  
By selecting clips, information added to clips, such as the  
recording time, text memo, shot marks and metadata can  
be checked.  
General: Features of Recorder/Player unit  
9
 
Text memos & Shot marks  
Recording Time  
Each clip can incorporate comments, in the form of text  
memo added to the thumbnail associated with the time  
code, together with shot marks which, for example, can help  
you distinguish OK cuts from reject cuts.  
Operation of the following P2 cards with the unit has been  
verified:  
AJ-P2C004HG (4 GB)  
AJ-P2C008HG (8 GB)  
Both text memos and shot marks can be added to selected  
clips during and after a recording. This is helpful for editing  
recorded video.  
In addition, you can use the copy function for each text  
memo block to take only the necessary portions out of a clip.  
AJ-P2C016RG (16 GB)  
AJ-P2C032RG (32 GB)  
(The model numbers and capacities are accurate as of  
August 2008 but may change to expand capacity.)  
The AJ-P2C002SG (2 GB) is disabled.  
Recording Time on P2 Cards: When one 32 GB card is used;  
Front-mounted Sound Level Control Mechanism  
The unit features a front-mounted control for fine adjustment  
of the sound recording level. This control is particularly  
effective for adjusting the sound level when you are shooting  
without a sound recordist. The control can be disabled.  
(Refer to page 16)  
Recording method and Recording time  
Image system  
DVCPRO HD AVC-Intra100 AVC-Intra50  
Approx.  
32 min  
Approx.  
32 min  
Approx.  
64 min  
1080-59.94i/50i  
1080-30PN/25PN  
(Native)  
Approx.  
32 min  
Approx.  
64 min  
Support for Built-in Unislot Wireless Receive  
The unit is designed to support an optional slot-in wireless  
receiver. (Refer to pages 114 and 193) The unit also  
supports 2-channel wireless receivers.  
1080-24PN  
(Native)  
Approx.  
40 min  
Approx.  
80 min  
Approx.  
32 min  
Approx.  
32 min  
Approx.  
64 min  
720-59.94P/50P  
720-30PN/25PN  
(Native)  
Approx.  
64 min  
Approx.  
64 min  
Approx.  
128 min  
Recording Review Capability  
This capability automatically plays back the last 2 to 10  
seconds of recorded video, allowing you to quickly check the  
recorded contents.  
720-24PN  
(Native)  
Approx.  
80 min  
Approx.  
80 min  
Approx.  
160 min  
Built-in Time Code Generator/reader  
A special-purpose subcode track can be used to record and  
reproduce time code information.  
Notes  
The values for 8 GB and 16 GB P2 cards are 1/4 and 1/2  
those of 32 GB cards shown above.  
If the one-time continuous recording exceeds the duration  
which is given in the table below when a P2 card with a  
memory capacity of 8 GB or more is used in the unit, the  
recording is automatically continued on a separate clip.  
When performing thumbnail operations (such as display,  
delete, repair or copy) for these kinds of clips using a P2  
device, it is possible to perform the operations for the  
entire recording as a single clip. However, with nonlinear  
editing software or a PC, the recording may be displayed  
as separate clips.  
Support for Metadata  
The unit is capable of recording positional information  
(latitudes, longitudes and altitudes), as UMID information  
(metadata), from the GPS unit AJ-GPS910G (optional).  
Names/titles can also be recorded, e.g. the camera person,  
the reporter, or the program which was registered on the SD  
memory card in advance. This information is also useful in  
managing information on clips. Regarding SD memory  
cards, please also see <Cautions in using SD memory  
cards> (page 22).  
Recording method (except for  
Continuous recording time  
native)  
DVCPRO HD  
Approx. 5 min  
AVC-Intra100  
AVC-Intra50  
Approx. 10 min  
General: Features of Recorder/Player unit  
10  
 
(Reference values when Panasonic bland SD memory cards  
or SDHC memory cards are used for continuous recording.  
Actual recording time depends on the kind of scenes and the  
number of clips.)  
Approximate Proxy Recording Time (optional) on SD memory  
cards  
(Except for 24P native mode)  
MPEG4 recording rate  
Card No.  
(Card Capacity)  
192 kbps  
768 kbps  
1500 kbps  
The values for 8 GB and 16 GB SDHC memory cards are  
double and four times the values for the 4 GB card.  
RP-SDH256  
(256 MB)  
Approx.  
2 h 17 min  
Approx.  
35 min  
Approx.  
19 min  
RP-SDH512  
RP-SDK512  
(512 MB)  
For the latest information on P2 cards and SD memory cards  
not available in the operating instructions, visit the P2  
Support Desk at the following Web site.  
Approx.  
4 h 27 min  
Approx.  
69 min  
Approx.  
38 min  
RP-SDQ01G  
RP-SDK01G  
(1 GB)  
Approx.  
8 h 56 min  
Approx.  
2 h 19 min  
Approx.  
77 min  
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/  
RP-SDQ02G  
RP-SDK02G  
(2 GB)  
Approx.  
18 h 11 min  
Approx.  
4 h 44 min  
Approx.  
2 h 37 min  
RP-SDV024G  
(SDHC 4 GB)  
Approx.  
35 h 42 min  
Approx.  
9 h 18 min  
Approx.  
5 h 12 min  
Features of the Input/Output unit  
Independent HD SDI output provided as a  
standard configuration  
The HD SDI signals output from the HD SDI A · B  
connectors and the MON OUT connector are independent.  
Characters and markers can therefore be set independently  
(note that the same signal is output from the HD SDI A  
connector and the HD SDI B connector).  
Down converter output provided as a standard  
configuration  
The MON OUT connector outputs down converter (analog  
composite) signals.  
Also, output signal from the MON OUT connector can be  
switched between an HD SDI signal and a VBS signal.  
SDI output includes embedded audio etc.  
Remote control connector  
By connecting the remote control unit (AJ-RC10G), which is  
available as an optional accessory, the unit can be controlled  
remotely. (Refer to page 117)  
Features USB 2.0 port (HOST/DEVICE)  
By connecting with a PC via USB 2.0, a P2 card inserted in  
the unit can be used as a bulk storage device.  
Also, since this unit has a USB HOST capability, it is  
possible to store P2 card data on an external hard disk  
connected using USB 2.0, to view clips stored on the hard  
disk and to write clips stored on the hard disk to the P2 card.  
Confirmation of return video signals  
It is possible to confirm the return video signals (analog  
HD Y signals) supplied to the GENLOCK IN connector of the  
unit in the viewfinder to confirm programs.  
Only video signals from the same record format can be  
confirmed. Note also that the 23.98PsF and 24PsF signals  
cannot be confirmed. (Refer to page 187)  
DVCPRO output provided as a standard  
configuration  
Data can be output to an external device through the  
IEEE1394 digital interface. Use a 6-pin type connector. The  
unit does not support the bus power.  
DC OUT connector  
The DC OUT connector of the unit produces 1.5 A of  
electrical current.  
By connecting an external switch to this connector, it is  
possible to control recording start/stop.  
While operating AVC-Intra, it is impossible to output data  
with IEEE1394.  
Since a tally lamp can be used by connecting the LED to this  
connector, it is useful for shooting video when fixing the  
camera on a crane. (Refer to page 119)  
Other features  
User button  
Viewfinder connection  
On the side panel of the unit, 5 user buttons (USER MAIN/  
USER 1/USER 2/MARKER SELECT/TEXT MEMO) are  
available.  
Each user button can be assigned the on/off function for any  
frequently used feature among the many features of the unit,  
such as SLOT SEL and Y GET. (Refer to page 56)  
From the viewfinder connector of the unit, 1080-59.94i,  
1080-50i signals are output.  
Confirm images in multi formats by connecting the  
viewfinder (AJ-HVF21G), which is available as an optional  
accessory. (Refer to page 28)  
General: Features of the Input/Output unit  
11  
     
Dimensions drawing  
Unit: mm (inch)  
137 (5-3  
)
/
8
318 (12- 1  
)
/
2
General: Dimensions drawing  
12  
 
Color TV Standard Settings  
(Settings for frame frequency)  
The unit is delivered with the color TV standard not yet specified. To revise the settings for frame frequency according to the  
preferred standard, refer to the procedures described below.  
1
2
After connecting the unit to the power supply and then  
turning on the power, press the MENU button while  
pressing the LIGHT button to open OPTION MENU.  
Notes  
The settings are not saved unless AREA SET is executed  
even if NTSC, NTSC (J), or PAL is selected in the AREA  
SELECT.  
When AREA SELECT is revised, the “AREA SET”  
blinks.  
When these items are set when the unit is used for the first  
time, only the following 8 items are revised. When the  
other settings of the unit are set in MAIN MENU, the menu  
setting values for items other than the following 8 are ones  
that were set at the factory.  
Turn the jog dial button to move the cursor (arrow) to the  
AREA SELECT item on the <AREA SETTING> screen  
in OPTION MENU page, and then press the jog dial  
button.  
  
  
  
Factory  
settings  
NTSC  
NTSC(J)  
PAL  
SYSTEM  
MODE  
720-59.94P 720-59.94P 720-59.94P 720-50P  
REC  
FORMAT  
AVC-I 100 AVC-I 100 AVC-I 100  
/24PN /24PN /24PN  
AVC-I 100  
/25PN  
FRAME  
RATE  
24FRAME 24FRAME 24FRAME 25FRAME  
24FRAME 24FRAME 24FRAME 25FRAME  
3
4
Select the area among NTSC, NTSC (J), and PAL. After  
selecting the area by turning the jog dial button, press  
the jog dial button.  
USR SW  
F.RATE  
REAR LINE  
IN LVL  
+4dB  
+4dB  
+4dB  
+4dB  
0dB  
  
AUDIO OUT  
LVL  
  
+4dB  
20dB  
+4dB  
20dB  
0dB  
  
HEADROOM 20dB  
18dB  
GUI metadata  
language  
indication  
English  
English  
For Japan  
English  
Not  
Not  
ENGLISH  
Not  
LANGUAGE  
DATE  
displayed displayed JAPANESE displayed  
M-D-Y M-D-Y Y-M-D D-M-Y  
1
FORMAT*  
Move the cursor (arrow) to AREA SET by turning the  
jog dial button, and then press the jog dial button. The  
following window appears.  
*1 Select THUMBNAIL SETUP DATE FORMAT from the  
thumbnail menu. For details refer to [Setting the Thumbnail  
Display Mode] (page 136).  
  
  
  
5
6
Move the arrow () to YES and press the jog dial  
button. The settings selected in step 3 above are  
reflected in FACTORY and CURRENT data.  
Turn off the power supply once and then turn on it again.  
General: Color TV Standard Settings (Settings for frame frequency)  
13  
   
System Configuration  
Video encoder card:  
AJ-YAX800G  
Remote control cable:  
AJ-C10050G  
Remote control  
unit:  
Unislot wireless microphone  
receiver:  
AJ-RC10G  
Sennheiser EK3041  
Stereo microphone:  
AJ-MC900G  
DIONIC90/160  
HYTRON50/140  
PROPAC14, TRIMPAC14  
Microphone holder:  
AJ-MH800G  
V mount type Battery  
plate  
ENDURA7/10  
BP-GL65/95  
2-type HD Viewfinder:  
AJ-HVF21G  
NP-1 type Battery case  
NP-L7  
Lens (Bayonet type):  
Fujinon, Canon  
External DC power  
supply  
GPS unit:  
AJ-GPS910G  
Memory Card  
Camera-Recorder  
AJ-HPX2700G  
P2 Cards*:  
AJ-P2C016RG  
AJ-P2C032RG  
Tripod adapter:  
SHAN-TM700  
SD Memory cards*  
Rain cover:  
SHAN-RC700  
Soft carrying case:  
AJ-SC900  
Hard carrying case:  
AJ-HT901G  
* For the latest information on P2 cards and SD memory cards not available in the operating instructions, visit the P2 Support Desk at the  
following Web site.  
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/  
Note  
All of the devices and accessories other than the unit, which are shown in this system configuration, are optionally available.  
To use these devices and accessories, refer to the respective operation manuals.  
General: System Configuration  
14  
 
Parts and their Functions  
Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section  
5
6
7
11  
16  
6
2
9
8
10  
4
3
1
15  
12 13  
14  
1. POWER switch  
10. Lens mount cap  
Used to turn on/off the power.  
To remove the cap, raise the 9. Lens lever.  
When the lens is not mounted, replace the cap.  
2. Battery mount  
11. Light cable clamp  
A battery pack from Anton/Bauer is mounted here.  
Secures the light cable.  
3. DC IN (external power input) socket (XLR, 4P)  
12. Lens cable/microphone cable clamp  
The unit is connected to an external DC power supply.  
This clamp secures the lens and microphone cables.  
4. BREAKER switch  
13. Tripod mount  
When an excessive amount of current is fed through the  
unit, due to any abnormal event, the breaker  
automatically turns off the power in order to protect the  
device.  
When you want to mount unit on a tripod, the optional  
tripod adapter (SHAN-TM700) is attached here.  
After the interior of the unit has been checked and/or  
repaired, this button must be depressed. If there is no  
unusual reaction, the unit can be powered-up.  
14. LENS jack (12-pin)  
The lens connection cord is connected here. For a  
detailed description of your lens, see the relevant  
manufacturer’s instruction manual.  
5. GPS connector  
This connects the optional GPS unit AJ-GPS910G.  
15. DC OUT (DC power supply output) socket  
This output socket is designed for 12 V DC. It provides a  
maximum current of 1.5 A.  
6. Shoulder strap fittings  
The shoulder strap is attached here.  
Connect an external switch to this socket to control  
recording starts and stops or an LED for use as a tally  
lamp. For more information, see [Connection of the  
external switch] (page 119).  
7. Light shoe  
A video light or similar accessory can be attached here.  
16. Accessory mounting holes (handle)  
Use these holes to mount accessories. These holes  
should not be used for any other purpose.  
8. Lens mount (bayonet 2/3-type)  
The lens is attached here.  
9. Lens lever  
Lower this lever to lock the lens to the lens mount.  
Parts and their Functions: Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section  
15  
   
Audio (input) Function Section  
12  
11  
3
13  
14  
10  
7
2
6
1
8
15  
5
4
9
1. MIC IN (microphone input) jack (XLR, 5-pin)  
A microphone (optional) is connected here. Power can  
be supplied via this jack to allow use of a phantom  
microphone. Note that the FRONT MIC POWER menu  
option must be set to “ON” when using a phantom  
microphone.  
5. AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (audio input channel 1 & 2)  
connectors (XLR, 3-pin)  
Audio devices or a microphone may be connected here.  
6. LINE/MIC/+48V (line input/mic input/mic input  
+48 V) selector switch  
These options are found in the <MIC/AUDIO2> screen  
on the MAIN OPERATION page.  
Used to select the audio signal input from the 5. AUDIO  
IN CH1/CH2 connectors.  
LINE:  
MIC:  
Audio signal line-input from the audio device  
is input.  
Audio signal from a self-powered (active)  
microphone is input. (Power for a phantom  
microphone is not supplied to the microphone  
from the unit.)  
Audio signal from a passive microphone is  
input. (Power for a phantom microphone is  
supplied to the microphone from the unit.)  
2. AUDIO LEVEL CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1 & 2  
recording level adjustment) controls  
With the 3. AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch positioned  
to [MAN], these controls can be used to adjust the  
recording levels for audio channels 1 and 2.  
Note that the controls are designed to be locked. For  
adjustment, each control must be depressed while  
turning.  
+48V:  
3. AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1 & 2  
automatic/manual level adjustment selector)  
switch  
7. Wireless slot  
A Unislot wireless receiver (optional) may be attached  
here.  
Use this switch to select recording level control mode for  
audio channels 1 and 2.  
8. FRONT AUDIO LEVEL (audio recording level  
adjustment) control  
AUTO: Recording level automatically controlled.  
MAN:  
Recording level manually controlled.  
This control adjusts the recording levels for audio  
channels 1 and 2.  
4. AUDIO IN (audio input selector) switch  
Use this switch to select the signals recorded through  
audio channels 1 - 4.  
However, when the 3. AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch  
is set to [AUTO], the level will adjust automatically and  
the 2. AUDIO LEVEL CH1/CH2 knob and this knob will  
not be active.  
The control can be enabled or disabled through the  
menu options FRONT VR CH1 or FRONT VR CH2.  
These options can be found in the <MIC/AUDIO1>  
screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.  
FRONT: Signal from the microphone connected to the  
1. MIC IN jack is recorded.  
W.L. (WIRELESS):  
Signal from the slot-in wireless receiver is  
recorded.  
REAR: Signal from the audio device connected to the  
5. AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connector is recorded.  
Note  
When you use stereo microphone (AJ-MC900G,  
optional), set both CH1 and CH2 to [FRONT]. The  
signal from L CH is recorded to CH1 and that from R CH  
to CH2.  
Parts and their Functions: Audio (input) Function Section  
16  
   
Audio (output) Function Section  
9. AUDIO OUT connector (XLR, 5-pin)  
14. Speakers  
The speakers output EE sound during recording, and  
This connector outputs audio signals recorded on  
Channels 1/2 or 3/4.  
reproduced sound during playback.  
Output signals are selected with the 10. MONITOR  
SELECT CH1/2 / CH3/4 selector switch.  
The speakers emit an alarm sound when the warning  
lamp blinks and/or the indicator activates.  
When the 15. PHONES jack is connected with  
earphones, sound from the speaker is automatically  
muted.  
10. MONITOR SELECT (audio channel selection)  
CH1/2 / CH3/4 selector switch  
Use this switch to select the audio channel whose  
signals are output to the speakers, earphones or AUDIO  
OUT connector.  
15. PHONES (earphones) jack (mini jack)  
This connector is designed for audio monitoring (stereo)  
earphones. When earphones are connected, sound  
from the speakers is automatically muted.  
Both the front and rear connectors output the same  
sound.  
CH1/2: Signals on audio channels 1 and 2 are output.  
CH3/4: Signals on audio channels 3 and 4 are output.  
The channel indications on the display window and on  
the audio level meter in the viewfinder are synchronized  
with this selector switch.  
11. MONITOR (audio selection) CH1/3 / ST / CH2/4  
selector switch  
Use this switch in combination with the MONITOR  
SELECT switch to select the audio channels whose  
signals are output to the speakers, earphones, or  
AUDIO OUT connector.  
CH1/3: Signal on audio channel 1 or 3 is output.  
ST:  
Stereo audio signals on audio channels 1 and  
2 or audio channels 3 or 4 are output. The  
stereo signals can be changed to mixed  
signals using a menu option.  
CH2/4: Signal on audio channel 2 or 4 is output.  
MONITOR SELECT switch  
MONITOR  
switch  
CH1/2  
CH3/4  
CH1/3  
Audio channel 1  
Audio channel 3  
Stereo signals from  
audio channels  
1 and 2*  
Stereo signals from  
audio channels  
3 and 4*  
ST  
CH2/4  
Audio channel 2  
Audio channel 4  
* You can select between stereo and mixed signal types using  
the menu option MONITOR SELECT. This menu option can  
be found in the <MIC/AUDIO2> screen on the MAIN  
OPERATION page.  
12. MONITOR (volume) control  
Used to control the volume of sound output from the  
monitor speakers and earphones.  
13. ALARM (warning alarm volume adjustment)  
control  
Used to control the volume of the warning sound  
emitted from 14. Speakers or earphones connected to  
the 15. PHONES jack.  
If the control is minimized, no alarm is audible.  
Parts and their Functions: Audio (output) Function Section  
17  
 
Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions  
Section  
10 9  
32  
8
21 22 23  
20  
34  
33  
24  
25  
1
2
15  
26  
27  
3
11  
17  
31  
16 19  
4
14  
5
6
13  
30  
18  
29 28  
12  
7
1. CC/ND FILTER (filter switching) controls  
3. SHUTTER switch  
Used to enable or disable the electronic shutter.  
These are used to select the filter in accordance with the  
subject’s brightness and color temperature.  
OFF:  
ON:  
SEL:  
Electronic shutter disabled.  
Electronic shutter enabled.  
Used to change the speed of the electronic  
shutter.  
CC FILTER knob (outside, large diameter)  
A: 3200 K  
C: 5600 K  
B: 4300 K  
D: 1/2 ND  
ND FILTER knob (inside, small diameter)  
This dial switch returns to its original position. Each turn  
of the switch alters the shutter speed.  
For more information, see [Setting the Electronic  
Shutter] (page 53).  
1: CLEAR (transparent)  
3: 1/16 ND  
2: 1/4 ND  
4: 1/64 ND  
When D (1/2 ND) is selected on CC FILTER, it is  
possible to select any of 1/2 ND to 1/128 ND in  
combination with ND FILTER.  
4. AUTO W/B (white/black) BAL switch  
AWB:  
White balance is automatically adjusted.  
When the WHITE BAL switch on the side is  
positioned at [A] or [B], the adjusted value is  
stored in the memory.  
Shooting conditions  
CC FILTER  
A (3200 K)  
ND FILTER  
1 (CLEAR)  
Sunrise, sunset, inside a  
studio  
Note that when the WHITE BAL switch is  
positioned at [PRST] this function does not  
work.  
Outdoors under a clear  
sky  
B (4300 K) or  
C (5600 K)  
2 (1/4 ND) or  
3 (1/16 ND)  
Outdoors under cloudy or  
rainy skies  
1 (CLEAR) or  
2 (1/4 ND)  
C (5600 K)  
ABB:  
Black balance is automatically adjusted.  
Snowscapes, high  
mountains, seashores or B (4300 K) or  
other perfectly clear  
scenery  
3 (1/16 ND) or  
4 (1/64 ND)  
To stop automatic adjustment of the white or black  
balance in progress, set the switch to either ([AWB] or  
[ABB]).  
If automatic adjustment is canceled, the value in effect  
before automatic adjustment will be used.  
2. USER MAIN, USER 1 and USER 2 buttons  
These buttons can be assigned user-selected functions,  
using a menu option. Each button, when pressed,  
performs the assigned function.  
For more information, see [Assigning Functions to User  
Buttons] (page 56).  
Parts and their Functions: Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section  
18  
   
5. Gain selector switch  
8. MODE CHECK button  
Use this switch to select video amplifier gain, according  
to lighting conditions under which you are shooting.  
The values for [L], [M], and [H] can be preset using  
menu options.  
Each press of this button changes the screen type in the  
viewfinder in the following order: STATUS, !LED,  
FUNCTION, AUDIO, CAC, USER SW.  
This does not affect the signal output from the camera.  
These are factory-set to “0 dB” for [L], “3 dB” for [M], and  
“6 dB” for [H].  
9. MARKER SELECT button  
the viewfinder screen. It switches between two marker  
information indications, which can be selected using a  
menu option. Pressing this button once switches the  
indicated marker information from A (Marker A) to B  
marker). When the power is turned on, the last selected  
indication before power-down appears.  
For more information, see [Marker Check Screen  
Displays (MARKER SELECT button function)]  
(page 85).  
Also, with appropriate menu settings, the MARKER  
SELECT button can be used as a USER 3 button. For  
more information on user buttons, refer to [Assigning  
Functions to User Buttons] (page 56).  
6. OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector switch  
Used to select the video signals sent from the camera  
unit to the memory, viewfinder and video monitor.  
CAM/AUTO KNEE ON:  
Video being recorded through the camera is  
sent with the auto knee circuit activated.  
It is also possible to assign the DRS (Dynamic  
AUTO KNEE function.  
CAM/AUTO KNEE OFF:  
Video being recorded through the camera is  
sent in manual knee mode.  
BARS: Color bar signal is output. The auto knee  
circuit does not work.  
You can select between 4 types of color bar  
signal. For more information, see [SW MODE]  
(page 187).  
10. SYNCHRO SCAN adjustment buttons  
These buttons are enabled when the 3. SHUTTER  
switch is positioned at [ON] and synchro scan is  
selected.  
AUTO KNEE function  
They are used to adjust the speed of the synchro scan.  
The – button decreases shutter speed; the + button  
increases shutter speed.  
If you shoot a PC monitor, for example, you should  
adjust shutter speed so that the horizontal bars in the  
viewfinder will produce less noise.  
Usually, when you adjust levels to shoot people or scenery  
against a strongly lit background, the background will be  
totally whited-out, with buildings and other objects blurred.  
In this case, the auto knee function reproduces the  
background clearly. This function is effective when:  
The subject is a person positioned in the shade under a  
clear sky.  
The subject is a person inside a car or building, and you  
also want to capture the background visible through a  
window.  
11. REC START/STOP button  
Pressing this button starts recording, pressing again  
stops recording.  
This button has the same function as the VTR button at  
the lens.  
The subject is a high-contrast scene.  
7. WHITE BAL (white balance memory selector)  
switch  
12. SHOT MARKER/MENU CANCEL button  
Pressing this button while recording adds a shot mark to  
the thumbnail of that clip. This button also adds a shot  
mark to any thumbnail selected on the LCD monitor.  
For more information on shot marks, see [Shot Mark  
Function] (page 45).  
Used to select the white balance adjustment method.  
PRST: Use this when you have no time to adjust the  
white balance.  
The value for the white balance is factory-set  
It can be changed to any color temperature  
using a menu option. For more information,  
see [Setting Color Temperature Manually]  
(page 51).  
This button cancels the revised set value when the  
menu is displayed.  
13. TEXT MEMO button  
Records a text memo if pressed during recording or  
playback or when playback is paused.  
Also, with appropriate menu settings, the TEXT MEMO  
button can be used as a USER 4 button. For more  
information on user buttons, refer to [Assigning  
Functions to User Buttons] (page 56)  
A or B: Pressing the 4. AUTO W/B BAL switch toward  
[AWB] automatically adjusts the white  
balance, saving the adjusted value in memory  
A or B. For more information, see [Adjusting  
the White Balance] (page 49).  
Parts and their Functions: Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section  
19  
10 9  
32  
8
21 22 23  
20  
34  
33  
24  
25  
1
2
15  
26  
27  
3
11  
17  
31  
16 19  
4
14  
5
6
13  
30  
18  
29 28  
12  
7
14. SAVE ON/OFF switch  
18. MON OUT (monitor output) connector  
for the monitor. The output signal can be switched  
between a down-converted (analog composite) signal  
and an HD SDI signal. This connector outputs video  
based on the setting of the 19. MON OUT SEL (output  
signal selection) switch. Through an internal menu  
option, the characters can be superimposed  
Used to select the power supply method for each output  
section.  
ON:  
The output selected through the menu option  
SAVE SW is power-saved. This option can be  
found on the <OPTION MODE> screen on the  
SYSTEM SETTING page.  
OFF:  
Power saving is canceled.  
independently of the HD SDI A · B connector. For more  
information, refer to [Settings of signals output from  
MON OUT connector] (page 88).  
Note  
The ON/OFF switch does not function during recording.  
The ON/OFF status changes after recording is  
completed.  
19. MON OUT SEL (output signal selection) switch  
Used to switch the signals output from the MON OUT  
connector.  
15. HD SDI A · B (output signal selector) switch  
Changes the mode of the signals output through the HD  
SDI A · B connector.  
MEM:  
Video from the camera is output during  
recording or when recording is paused or  
MEM:  
Video from the camera is output during  
recording and when recording is paused.  
CAM:  
Video from the camera is output constantly.  
Video is not output, and the unit operates in  
power-saving mode.  
CAM:  
OFF:  
Video from the camera is output constantly.  
Video is not output, and the unit operates in  
power-saving mode.  
Note that the audio output is synchronized with the  
video.  
For types of video outputs, see [Settings of signals  
output from HD SDI A · B connector] (page 87) or  
[Settings of signals output from MON OUT connector]  
(page 88).  
Note that the audio output is synchronized with the  
video.  
For types of video outputs, refer to [Settings of signals  
output from HD SDI A · B connector] (page 87) and  
[Settings of signals output from MON OUT connector]  
(page 88).  
During recording, this switch does not switch output  
signals before stopping the recording operation.  
Only a brightness signal is output in 1080-24PsF and  
720-60P when MONITOR OUT is set to “VBS”.  
MONITOR OUT can be selected from the screen  
<OUTPUT SEL> in the SYSTEM SETTING page.  
16. MON OUT CHARACTER switch  
This switch controls the superimposition of characters  
onto the video output from the MON OUT connector.  
ON:  
Characters are superimposed.  
OFF:  
Characters are not superimposed.  
For types of characters, see [Settings of signals output  
from MON OUT connector] (page 88).  
17. HD SDI A connector  
This connector is for outputting video. A video signal  
based on the setting of the 15. HD SDI A · B switch is  
output. The video signal is the same as that output from  
the 29. HD SDI B connector.  
Parts and their Functions: Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section  
20  
20. REW (rewind) button and lamp  
During pause, this button performs a fast-reverse  
playback with the lamp lights on.  
28. GENLOCK IN connector  
Used to input an HD Y signal when GENLOCKing the  
camera or externally locking the time code. Alternatively,  
a composite signal can be input as the reference signal.  
Note that the subcarriers for the down-converter  
(composite signal) output from the unit cannot be  
externally locked.  
During playback, it performs an approximately 4fast-  
reverse playback with the PLAY and REW lamps lights  
on.  
If this button is pressed when playback is paused, the  
start of the clip being played back is located in pause  
mode.  
Note  
When HD Y signal is input and the menu option RET  
SW is set to “CAM RET”, you can check return video on  
the viewfinder screen. The menu option RET SW can be  
found in the <SW MODE> screen on the CAM  
OPERATION page.  
21. STOP button  
This button stops playback.  
22. FF (fast forward) button and lamp  
During pause, this button is used to perform fast  
playback with the lamp lights on.  
29. HD SDI B connector  
During playback, it performs an approximately 4fast  
playback with the PLAY and FF lamps lights on.  
If this button is pressed when playback is paused, the  
start of the next clip is located in pause mode.  
This connector is for outputting video. A video signal  
based on the setting of the 15. HD SDI A · B switch is  
output. The video signal is the same as that output from  
the 17. HD SDI A connector.  
23. PLAY/PAUSE button  
This button is used to view playback using the  
viewfinder screen or a color video monitor. The lamp  
comes on when playback starts.  
In playback mode, this button pauses (PLAY/PAUSE)  
playback with the lamp blinking.  
24. P2 card access LED  
This LED indicates the recording and playback status of  
each card.  
25. Slide lock button  
Used to open the slide-out door for inserting P2 cards.  
While depressing this button, slide the door to the left.  
26. USB 2.0 connector (DEVICE)  
27. USB 2.0 connector (HOST)  
A USB 2.0 cable is connected here.  
When the menu option PC MODE is set to “ON”, data  
can be transferred via USB 2.0. During such data  
transfer, recording, playback or operations of clips is  
limited.  
The menu option PC MODE is found in the <SYSTEM  
MODE> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page. For  
more information, see [Connection with external devices  
using the USB 2.0 port] (page 142).  
Parts and their Functions: Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section  
21  
30. DVCPRO connector  
33. SD memory card insertion slot  
This is an output connector for video, audio, and data  
that comply with the IEEE1394 standard.  
An SD memory card (optional) is inserted here. SD  
memory cards are used for recording and accessing the  
menu settings of cameras and the lens files, uploading  
metadata, and proxy recording (optional).  
Notes  
Power is not supplied from the unit.  
<Cautions in using SD memory cards>  
Use the unit by inserting an SD memory card that is  
compliant with the SD standard or the SDHC standard.  
MultiMediaCards cannot be used. (Bear in mind that  
recording may no longer be possible if you do use  
them.)  
If you intend to use miniSD cards in unit, always install  
the adapter specially designed for miniSD cards. (The  
unit will not work properly if only the miniSD card  
adapter is installed. Make sure that the card has been  
installed in the adapter before using it.)  
Use of Panasonic’s SD memory cards and miniSD  
cards is recommended. Be sure to format cards using  
unit.  
Any SD memory card and SDHC memory card with the  
following capacities can be used with the unit.  
Be absolutely sure to bear the following points in mind  
when connecting the IEEE1394 cable (DV cable).  
– Ensure that the connections with other devices are  
made on a 1:1 basis.  
– When a 1394 cable (DV cable) has been connected  
to the DVCPRO connector, do not apply any strong  
external force as this may damage the connector.  
– When error code 1394 E-92 (1394 INITIAL  
ERROR) appears, disconnect the connecting  
cables and re-connect them or turn off the unit’s  
power and turn it back on.  
– Ensure that the unit and all of the connected  
devices are each grounded (or connected to a  
common ground) before use.  
If it is not possible to ground the unit and devices,  
turn off the power of the unit and of all the  
connected devices before connecting or  
disconnecting the IEEE1394 cable.  
8 MB, 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB,  
SD memory card  
128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB,  
2 GB  
– When the unit is to be connected to a device  
equipped with a 4-pin type of connector, connect  
the unit’s connector (6-pin type) first.  
SDHC memory card  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB  
To record proxy (optional), use an SD memory card with  
a capacity of 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, or 2 GB labeled  
“High Speed” or use an SDHC memory card.  
For the latest information not available in the operating  
instructions, visit the P2 Support Desk at the following  
Web site.  
– When connecting the unit with a PC equipped with  
a 6-pin type of connector, connect the 1394 cable  
as dictated by the shapes of the 1394 connectors.  
Bear in mind that inserting a plug the wrong way  
round may damage the unit.  
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/  
The SDHC card conforms to a new standard for memory  
cards with a large capacity of more than 2 GB which  
was established by the SD Association in 2006.  
The SD card logo is a registered trademark.  
MMC (MultiMediaCard) is a registered trademark of  
Infineon Technologies AG.  
6-pin type  
4-pin type  
– When the unit is used in AVC-Intra format, image/  
audio signals cannot be output through the  
DVCPRO connector.  
31. REMOTE (remote control) connector  
The remote control unit AJ-RC10G (optional) is  
connected here.  
34. Busy (operation mode display) lamp  
This lamp indicates the active status of the SD memory  
card.  
It stays illuminated when the card is active.  
32. Option slot  
Attach the video encoder card (AJ-YAX800G, optional).  
For information about the installation and proxy  
recording, see the AJ-YAX800G instruction manual.  
Note  
While the lamp is on, do not insert or remove the card.  
Parts and their Functions: Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section  
22  
     
Menu Operation Section  
1. MENU button  
Used to turn on/off the menu.  
2. Jog dial button  
With the menu open, this button is used to navigate  
through menu pages, select options and specify values.  
For directions on manipulating the menu, see [Menu  
Configuration] (page 161).  
3. SD memory card insertion slot  
An SD memory card (optional) is inserted here. It is  
used when writing or saving menu data or lens files on  
an SD memory card.  
4
3
5
4. Busy (operation mode display) lamp  
This lamp indicates the active status of the SD memory  
card.  
2
It stays illuminated when the card is active.  
1
Note  
While the lamp is on, do not insert or remove the card.  
5. SHOT MARKER/MENU CANCEL button  
Undoes any changes to the menu option settings if  
pressed during the changes.  
Parts and their Functions: Menu Operation Section  
23  
 
Time Code Section  
6
5
4
7
2
1
3
8
1. GENLOCK IN connector (BNC)  
This connector is used to input a reference signal before  
the camera unit is gen-locked, or before the time code is  
externally locked.  
6. DISPLAY (counter display selector) switch  
Indications of the time code, CTL and user bits on the  
counter of the display window depend on the positions  
of this switch and the 7. TCG switch.  
Pressing the 4. HOLD button also displays Date/Time/  
Time Zone.  
2. TC IN connector (BNC)  
This connector is used to input a reference time code  
when you externally lock the time code.  
UB:  
User bits, DATE, TIME or Time zone  
indicated.  
TC:  
CTL:  
Time code indicated.  
CTL indicated.  
3. TC OUT connector (BNC)  
When you inter-lock the time code of unit with that of an  
external device this must be connected with the time  
code input (TC IN) connector of the external device.  
7. TCG (time code selector) switch  
This switch is used to specify the stepping mode for the  
built-in time code generator.  
Note  
F-RUN: Select this position to continuously advance  
the time code independently of the P2 card  
recording status.  
The time code must be input in the same format as the  
system mode of the unit.  
Use this mode to synchronize the time code  
with the time of day, or to externally lock the  
time code.  
Select this position to set the time code and/or  
user bits.  
4. HOLD button  
Pressing this button freezes the time data indication on  
the counter. Note that time code generation continues.  
Pressing the button again reactivates the counter.  
This function is used to ascertain the time code or CTL  
count of a particular recorded scene.  
SET:  
R-RUN: Select this position to advance the time code  
only during recording.  
For spliced scenes recorded on P2 cards, the  
sequence of time codes is unbroken.  
5. RESET button  
This button resets the time data (CTL) on the counter to  
“00:00:00:00”.  
Note  
If this button is pressed when with the 7. TCG switch  
positioned at [SET], time code and user bits data are  
reset to 0, and real-time data is reset to the initial value.  
When VFR is used during native recording, VFR is  
carried out with fixed R-RUN even when F-RUN has  
been set.  
8. Cursor and SET buttons  
Use these buttons to set the time code and user bits.  
The 4 triangular buttons are the cursor buttons, and the  
center rectangular one is the SET button.  
For guidance in setting the time code and user bits, see  
[Setting Time Data] (page 60).  
Parts and their Functions: Time Code Section  
24  
 
Warning and Status Display Functions  
7. Display window  
This window displays warnings, battery-remaining level,  
sound volume, time data, and other information.  
1
2
6
Note  
When the battery is installed, the unit indicates the data  
even if the power is turned off. To turn off the data  
indications to keep the battery from being discharged,  
specify “OFF” for the menu option P. OFF LCD  
DISPLAY found in the <TC/UB> screen on the MAIN  
OPERATION page.  
7
3
4
5
8. Rear tally lamp  
When the 2. BACK TALLY switch is set on [ON], the rear  
tally lamp behaves in the same way as the back tally  
lamp.  
8
1. Back tally lamp  
When the 2. BACK TALLY switch is set to [ON], the  
lamp behaves in the same way as the front tally lamp at  
the viewfinder.  
2. BACK TALLY switch  
This switch controls the action of the 1. Back and  
8. Rear tally lamps.  
ON:  
OFF:  
Back and rear tally lamps enabled.  
Back and rear tally lamps disabled.  
3. WARNING lamp  
This lamp starts blinking or lights up if something  
unusual occurs in the memory.  
4. USB lamp  
Stays on when the unit is in USB mode.  
5. ACCESS lamp  
Blinks when the unit is in recording or playback mode or  
when a P2 card is being accessed, or stays on when a  
recordable P2 card is inserted.  
6. LIGHT button  
Use this button to control illumination of the display  
window.  
Alternately pressing this button toggles illumination of  
the 7. Display window on or off.  
Parts and their Functions: Warning and Status Display Functions  
25  
 
Display Window Functions  
P2 card/battery-remaining level and audio level  
indications  
OVER  
OVER  
SLAVE HOLD HD GPS  
CTL VTCG TIMEDATE P-iREC  
NDF  
g
0
f
10  
20  
30  
OVER  
OVER  
SLAVE HOLD HD GPS  
CTL VTCG TIMEDATE P-iREC  
NDF  
0
h
Y
minM  
s
D
frm  
E
E
F
F
MEDIA  
10  
20  
30  
BATT  
40  
OO  
c
h
Y
minM  
s
D
frm  
-dB  
LOOP  
OP-SLOT  
13  
24  
a
b
E
E
F
F
MEDIA  
f. Mode indication  
BATT  
40  
HD:  
Stays illuminated when the unit is in HD mode (1080i,  
720P).  
Stays illuminated when radio waves are not received  
during GPS operation.  
Stays illuminated when radio waves are received  
during GPS operation.  
Stays illuminated when the PRE REC MODE is set to  
“ON”, and blinks when recording is continued after  
the recording tally lamp has gone out.  
Remains illuminated during INTERVAL REC mode  
recording, and blinks during a pause.  
Blinks when INTERVAL REC mode is selected.  
OO  
-dB  
LOOP  
OP-SLOT  
13  
24  
GPS:  
GPS  
a. Media-remaining space indication bar  
:
The bar indicates the remaining free space on each P2 card,  
using a 7-segment display.  
P-REC:  
Each segment can represent either 3 or 5 minutes of remaining  
free space, depending on the value set through the menu option  
CARD REMAIN/. According to the set value, the segments  
disappear one-by-one. The menu option CARD REMAIN/can  
be found in the <BATTERY/P2CARD> screen on the MAIN  
OPERATION page.  
iREC:  
i:  
b. Battery-remaining level indication bar  
g. Time code indication  
For a battery with a digital indicator (percentage indication), if the  
remaining level of the battery is higher than 70%, all 7 segments  
up to the “F” position are lit.  
NDF:  
Stays illuminated when the time code is in non-drop  
frame mode.  
When the remaining level falls below 70%, the segments go out  
one-by-one for each drop of 10%. All 7 segments can be set to  
light up when the battery-remaining balance is 100%. To do so  
select “100%” for the menu option BATT REMAIN FULL in the  
<BATTERY/P2CARD> screen of the MAIN OPERATION page.  
c. Audio channel level meter  
When the MONITOR SELECT CH1/2 / CH3/4 switch is set to  
[CH1/2], the meter indicates 1 and 2 as the audio channel  
numbers, together with their audio levels. When the switch is set  
to [CH3/4], the meter indicates 3 and 4 as the audio channel  
numbers, together with their audio levels.  
DF:  
Stays illuminated when the time code is in drop frame  
mode.  
Stays illuminated when the time code is externally  
locked.  
Stays illuminated when the time code generator/  
reader value is frozen.  
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is  
positioned at [CTL] to display the CTL count.  
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is  
positioned at [TC] (or [UB]) to display the TC (or UB)  
generator value.  
SLAVE:  
HOLD:  
CTL:  
TCG:  
TC:  
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is  
positioned at [TC] (or [UB]) to display the TC (or UB)  
reader value.  
Memory action status indication  
VTCG:  
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is  
positioned at [UB] to display the VIUB generator  
value.  
OVER  
OVER  
SLAVE HOLD HD GPS  
NDF  
0
VTC:  
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is  
positioned at [UB] to display the VIUB reader value.  
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is  
positioned at [UB] to display the real-time hour,  
minute and second.  
CTL VTCG TIMEDATE P-iREC  
10  
20  
TIME:  
d
e
h
Y
minM  
s
D
frm  
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is  
positioned at [UB] to display the real-time date.  
E
E
F
F
MEDIA  
BATT  
40  
No Indication:  
The VTCG, TIME, and DATE stay off when the  
OO  
-dB  
LOOP  
OP-SLOT  
13  
24  
DISPLAY switch is positioned at [UB] to display real  
time, time zone, hour and minute.  
d. Error Code Indication (for more information, see [Warning  
System] (page 155))  
e. Information indication  
Time count indication:  
The time code, user bits, CTL and real time are  
shown.  
LOOP:  
Stays illuminated in LOOP REC mode. For  
information about the LOOP REC mode, see [Loop  
Recording] (page 40).  
Note  
When the DISPLAY switch is positioned at [UB], each press of the  
HOLD button changes the indication through VTCG (VTC) DATE  
TIME No Indication (Time Zone) TCG (TC), in that order.  
OP-SLOT: Remains illuminated when a video encoder card is  
operated in the optional slot.  
Parts and their Functions: Display Window Functions  
26  
 
Positions of time code-related switches and  
information provided  
Position of  
DISPLAY switch  
Position of TCG  
switch  
Information Item  
SET  
Time code  
CTL  
CTL  
F-RUN or R-RUN  
TC  
UB  
Time code  
F-RUN/SET/  
R-RUN  
User bits or real-  
time, time zone  
LCD Monitor  
5. Cursor and SET buttons  
The 4 triangular buttons are the cursor buttons, and the  
center rectangular one is the SET button.  
They are used to select a thumbnail and manipulate the  
thumbnail menu. For more information, see  
1
[Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails] (page 120).  
6. EXIT button  
Used to return the display to the previous state when the  
thumbnail menu or the property screen is displayed.  
2
3
5
6
4
1. LCD monitor  
The LCD monitor displays the video in the viewfinder.  
Alternatively, it can show clips on the P2 card in a  
thumbnail format.  
In thumbnail display mode, clips can be edited or  
deleted, or P2 cards can be formatted using the  
4. THUMBNAIL MENU button and 5. Cursor and SET  
buttons.  
2. OPEN button  
Used to open the LCD monitor.  
3. THUMBNAIL button  
This button switches the content on the 1. LCD monitor  
from the video in the viewfinder to clip thumbnails.  
Another press switches them back to the video from the  
viewfinder.  
Note that this switchover is not performed during a  
recording or playback.  
4. THUMBNAIL MENU button  
In thumbnail display mode, this button allows you to  
manipulate the thumbnail menu (e.g., to delete clips).  
Parts and their Functions: LCD Monitor  
27  
 
Viewfinder  
You can use the following viewfinder (optional) on the unit:  
HD Viewfinder: AJ-HVF21G (selectable between 59.94 and 50 Hz)  
7. Front tally lamp  
13 14 11  
7
This lamp is activated when the 3. TALLY switch is  
positioned at [HIGH] or [LOW], and stays on during  
recording. It also blinks in synchronization with the REC  
lamp in the viewfinder, and provides alerts.  
Use the TALLY switch to change the intensity of the  
lamp to ([HIGH] or [LOW]).  
9
10  
12  
1
8. Back tally lamp  
This lamp stays illuminated during shooting. It also  
blinks in synchronization with the REC lamp in the  
viewfinder, and provides alerts.  
When the lever is positioned at [OFF], the back tally  
lamp is hidden.  
8
4
5
2
3
6
1. Viewfinder (optional)  
During recording or playback, the viewfinder displays  
the video image in monochrome. It also displays  
warnings, messages, zebra patterns, markers (safety  
zone and center markers), etc.  
9. Eyepiece  
Note  
Do not leave the eyepiece aimed at the sun. Doing so  
may damage the internal components.  
2. ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch  
This switch is used to display the zebra pattern in the  
viewfinder.  
10. Diopter adjustment ring  
Use this to make adjustments in line with your diopter, in  
order to obtain optimum clarity in the viewfinder image.  
The adjustable range of the viewfinder view angle is  
shown in the following table.  
ON:  
Zebra pattern displayed.  
OFF:  
No zebra pattern displayed.  
3. TALLY switch  
Product Number  
AJ-HVF21G  
Adjustable range  
–0.9 D to –4.4 D  
Used to control the 7. Front tally lamp.  
HIGH:  
OFF:  
Front tally lamp brightly illuminated.  
Front tally lamp stays off.  
For an eyepiece for presbyopia, consult the dealer.  
LOW:  
Front tally lamp dimly illuminated.  
11. Connecting plug  
4. PEAKING control  
12. Locking ring  
Used to adjust the outlines of the video image in the  
viewfinder for easier focusing. This does not affect the  
signal output from the camera.  
13. Microphone holder  
14. Viewfinder stopper  
5. CONTRAST control  
Used to attach or remove the viewfinder.  
Used to adjust the contrast of the video image in the  
viewfinder. This does not affect the signal output from  
the camera.  
6. BRIGHT control  
Used to adjust the brightness of the video image in the  
viewfinder. This does not affect the signal output from  
the camera.  
Parts and their Functions: Viewfinder  
28  
 
16  
15  
15. Viewfinder left-right position anchoring ring  
Used to adjust the side-to-side position of the  
viewfinder.  
16. Viewfinder front-back position anchoring lever  
Used to adjust the fore-and-aft position of the  
viewfinder.  
Note  
For more information, see the instruction manual for the  
viewfinder.  
If, when fitting a large lens, there is insufficient space  
between the top of the lens and the bottom of the viewfinder,  
the positions of the slide rails can be shifted upwards slightly  
by repositioning the screws.  
a
b
a. Conventional screw positions  
b. Reposition and fix 3 screws here to raise the slide rail by  
approximately 8 mm.  
Parts and their Functions: Viewfinder  
29  
Recording and Playback  
3
Insert a P2 card into the P2 card slot until the eject  
button pops up.  
Inserting P2 Cards  
Note  
When using the unit for the first time, be sure to set the time  
data beforehand. On how the time data is set, see [Setting  
Time Data] (page 60).  
d
e
1
Turn on the POWER switch.  
d. Eject button  
e. The card must be inserted with the logo right way up.  
4
Tilt up the popped-up eject button.  
a
a. POWER: [ON]  
f
2
While pressing down the slide lock button, slide the  
slide-out door to the left.  
The door opens.  
b
f. P2 card access LED  
5
6
The P2 card access LED indicates the status of P2 card  
in the slot.  
For how the P2 card status is indicated, see [P2 card  
access LED and status of P2 cards] (page 31).  
c
Close the slide-out door.  
b. Slide lock button  
c. Slide-out door  
Note  
Do not leave the slide-out door open when moving unit.  
Recording and Playback: P2 Cards  
30  
   
<For Your Information>  
Removing P2 Cards  
The P2 card access LEDs may be set to stay off using the  
menu option ACCESS LED. This option can be found on the  
<OPTION MODE> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.  
1
While pressing down the slide lock button, move the  
slide-out door to the left.  
The door opens.  
To Prevent Accidental Erasure of P2 Card  
Content  
2
3
Tilt down the eject button.  
To prevent the content of a P2 card being accidentally  
erased, position the write-protect switch on the P2 card at  
[Protect].  
Then, depress the eject button to release the P2 card so  
that you can remove it.  
Note  
Write-protect switchover can be performed while the card is  
being accessed (during recording or playback), but does not  
take effect until access to the card ceases.  
a
Protect  
a. Write-protect switch  
1
2
Tilt down the eject button.  
Depress the tilted-down eject button to release the P2  
card.  
P2 card access LED and status of P2 cards  
P2 card access  
LED  
MODE CHECK  
indication*  
Status of P2 Card  
Notes  
Stays on in  
green  
ACTIVE  
Writing and reading  
enabled.  
Do not remove the P2 card while it is being accessed or  
recognized (the P2 card access LED flashes orange), or  
the P2 card may fail. When the unit is set to keep the P2  
card access LEDs turned off, stop the recording/playback  
and ensure that the PRE RECORDING is complete before  
removing the P2 card.  
Stays on in  
orange  
ACTIVE  
Writing and reading  
enabled. The card is the  
current target card for  
recording (including LOOP  
REC).  
If a P2 card being accessed is removed, the viewfinder  
displays “TURN POWER OFF” and unit gives a warning  
using an alarm and the WARNING lamp. In addition, all P2  
card access LEDs blink rapidly in orange. If this is the  
case, turn the power off. For more information on warning  
indications, see [Warning System] (page 155).  
If a P2 card is removed while being accessed, clips on it  
may become irregular. Check the clips and restore them if  
required. For more information about how to restore clips,  
see [Restoring Clips] (page 129).  
If a P2 card being formatted is removed, it may be not be  
formatted properly. In this case, the viewfinder displays  
“TURN POWER OFF”. If this message appears, turn off  
the power, then restart unit to reformat the card.  
If a P2 card is inserted while another P2 card is being  
played back, the inserted P2 card is not recognized and  
the P2 card access LED for that card does not come on.  
Card recognition starts when the playback ends.  
Even if a P2 card is inserted in a vacant slot while  
recording, the media may not be recognized during the  
following times:  
Blinks in orange ACCESSING  
Writing or reading being  
performed.  
Blinks rapidly in INFO READING  
orange  
Recognizing the P2 card.  
Blinks slowly in  
green  
FULL  
The P2 card has no free  
space. Only reading is  
enabled.  
PROTECTED  
The write-protect switch on  
the P2 card is positioned at  
[Protect]. Only reading is  
enabled.  
Stays off  
NOT  
The card is not supported  
by your unit. Replace the  
card.  
SUPPORTED  
FORMAT  
ERROR  
The P2 card is not properly  
formatted. Reformat the  
card.  
NO CARD  
No P2 card is inserted.  
* The mode check indication is shown in the viewfinder. For more  
information, see [Viewfinder Status Indication Layout] (page 75).  
– Immediately after pre-recording  
The access LED located on the display window blinks when  
reading or writing data from or to any of the P2 cards  
inserted in slots 1 - 5 or stays illuminated when any of the  
cards are recordable. It stays off when none of the P2 cards  
are recordable.  
– Immediately before or after switching from the first P2  
card for recording to the second one, when data are  
recorded on multiple cards spanning from one to the  
other (hot-swap recording)  
Recording and Playback: P2 Cards  
31  
 
How to handle data recorded on P2 cards  
The P2 card is a semiconductor memory card that is used as the recording medium in the professional video production and  
broadcasting devices that make up the DVCPRO P2 Series.  
Since data recorded in the DVCPRO P2 format or AVC-  
Intra are in a file format, they have excellent compatibility  
Device:\  
All these folders are required.  
CONTENTS  
with PCs. The file structure is a unique format, which in  
addition to video and audio data in MXF files contains  
various other important information items. The folder  
structure links the data as shown on the right.  
AUDIO  
* This is the file in which the  
information on the final clip  
that was recorded with the P2  
device is written.  
CLIP  
ICON  
PROXY  
VIDEO  
VOICE  
Changing or deleting just one information component  
could make it impossible to recognize the data as P2 data  
or use the card in a P2 device.  
LASTCLIP.TXT*  
When transferring data from a P2 card to a PC, or when rewriting data saved on a PC to a P2 card, to prevent data loss be  
sure to use the special P2 Viewer software. Download it from the following website.  
(Compatible with the Windows Vista, Windows XP and Windows 2000 operating systems.)  
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/  
When using regular IT tools such as Microsoft Windows Explorer or Apple Finder to transfer data to a PC, follow the  
instructions below. However, be sure to use the P2 Viewer when returning data to a P2 card.  
– Transfer the corresponding CONTENTS folder and LASTCLIP.TXT file together as a set.  
Do not transfer individual files from the CONTENTS folder.  
When copying, copy the LASTCLIP.TXT file at the same time as the CONTENTS folder.  
– When transferring multiple P2 cards to a PC, create a folder for each P2 card to prevent clips with the same name from  
being overwritten.  
– Do not delete data from the P2 card.  
– When formatting a P2 card, be sure to use a P2 device or the P2 Viewer.  
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries.  
Apple and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple, Inc., in the USA and other countries.  
Recording and Playback: How to handle data recorded on P2 cards  
32  
 
Basic Procedures  
This section describes the basic procedure for shooting and  
recording. Before you embark on a shoot, pre-inspect your  
system to ensure that it works properly.  
Note  
When “SLOT1” is selected for the menu option P.ON REC  
SLOT SEL, recording starts from the P2 card inserted in the  
smallest slot number, after the power is turned on.  
This option is found in the <REC FUNCTION> screen on the  
SYSTEM SETTING page.  
* For directions on inspecting your unit, see [Inspections Before  
Shooting] (page 148).  
Battery Set-up to P2 card Insertion  
Switch Setting  
1
2
Insert a charged battery pack.  
When a battery and P2 cards are installed, set the switches  
as detailed below, before starting to use your unit.  
Turn on the POWER switch and ensure that more than  
5 segments of the battery-remaining amount indication  
bar are illuminated.  
Setting the switches before shooting and recording  
If the number of illuminated segments is fewer than 5,  
first check the battery setting. If setting is not the  
problem, replace the battery with a fully charged one.  
a
b
3
Insert a P2 card and ensure that the P2 card access  
LED stays on in orange or green. Then, close the slide-  
out door.  
When more than one P2 card slot contains a P2 card,  
the card in the slot with the lowest number is used first.  
However, regardless of slot number, a P2 card inserted  
later will not be accessed until the other cards have  
been used.  
e
d
Example:  
If all 5 slots contain P2 cards, the cards are used in  
order of slot numbers 12345. However, if the P2  
card in slot 1 is removed and then re-inserted, the cards  
will be used in the following order: 23451.  
c
a. USER MAIN: This switch is factory-set to switch the VFR  
function on/off.  
b. AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2:  
[AUTO]  
c. GAIN:  
Normally, this should be set to “0 dB”. If  
conditions are too dark, an appropriate gain level  
should be set.  
2
d. OUTPUT:  
e. TCG:  
[CAM/AUTO KNEE ON] or [OFF]  
[F-RUN] or [R-RUN]  
Notes  
2
If the SLOT SEL function is assigned to the USER MAIN  
button or other user button, the button can be used to  
select a P2 card recording target from among multiple  
inserted P2 cards.  
1
When a new target P2 card is selected, the appropriate  
slot number appears on the P2 card remaining amount  
indicator in the viewfinder.  
3
For more information about the indications in the  
viewfinder, see [Viewfinder Status Indication Layout]  
(page 75).  
5
4
3
2
1
SLOT SEL function is enabled during recording. Until the  
P2 card on which images are recorded has been switched  
completely, “SLOT SEL” blinks on the viewfinder. If the  
SLOT SEL operation cannot be executed for any reason,  
for instance immediately after starting recording or  
switching the P2 card on which images are recorded,  
“SLOT SEL INVALID” is displayed.  
Note that the number of the P2 card to which recording is in  
progress will be retained even when the power is turned off.  
When the power is next turned on, the last card written  
before powering-down will be the target card.  
Recording and Playback: Basic Procedures  
33  
 
White/Black Balance Adjustment to Recording Completion  
For shooting, follow the steps below.  
White/Black balance adjustment to recording completion  
1
2
Select a filter according to light conditions.  
When the white balance is saved:  
Position the WHITE BAL switch to [A] or [B].  
When the white or black balance is not saved and  
you have no time to adjust the white balance:  
Position the WHITE BAL switch to [PRST].  
This adjusts the white balance against the filter  
according to the position of the FILTER control.  
If the white balance is adjusted on the spot:  
Position the WHITE BAL switch to [A] or [B] and shoot a  
white test subject so that it appears at the center of the  
screen. Then, follow the steps below to adjust the white  
balance.  
3
1 4 5, 6 2  
2
1 Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward [AWB] to  
adjust the white balance.  
2 Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward [ABB] to  
adjust the black balance.  
3 Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward [AWB] to  
adjust the white balance again.  
For directions on making adjustments, see [Adjusting  
the White Balance] (page 49) and [Adjusting the Black  
Balance] (page 52).  
3
4
Point the camera at your subject to adjust the focus, and  
zoom.  
To use the electronic shutter, set the shutter speed and  
operation mode.  
For more information, see [Setting the Electronic  
Shutter] (page 53).  
5
6
Press either the REC START/STOP button or VTR  
button at the lens to start recording.  
During recording, the REC lamp in the viewfinder stays  
illuminated.  
To stop recording, press either the REC START/STOP  
button or VTR button at the lens.  
The REC lamp in the viewfinder goes out.  
Operation Buttons  
During recording, all operation buttons (REW, FF, PLAY/  
PAUSE, STOP) are disabled.  
Recording and Playback: Basic Procedures  
34  
Normal Recording  
REC START/STOP button or VTR button at the lens starts recording of video and sound on the P2 card. A cluster of data that  
consists of video and sound generated through a shooting action, together with such added information as meta data, is  
called a “clip”.  
Normal Recording and Native Recording  
In the unit, the camera’s recording method is selectable  
between the native recording method with the frame rate  
Native recording  
unchanged and the normal recording method pulling the  
This recording method extracts and records effective frames  
frame rate down to 59.94 or 50 frames.  
at the frame rates of the AVC-Intra recording in 1080i, and  
DVCPRO HD and AVC-Intra recording in 720P.  
Normal recording (Pull-down recording)  
For 720P, it is possible to record images where the length is  
2 to 2.5 times longer than the pull-down recording.  
Even in native recording, the rate for outputting camera  
images and playback images is 59.94 or 50 frames that are  
pulled down.  
Images at 24P (23.98P: referred to as 24P) are pulled down  
in 2:3 mode. Images at 30P (29.97P: referred to as 30P) are  
pulled down in 2:2 mode and recorded as 59.94i or 59.94P  
(referred to as 60i and 60P). Images at 25P are recorded as  
50i or 50P with 2:2 pulled down. 1080i supports 24PA  
(2:3:3:2 Advanced Pull down) as well.  
Example of 1080-24PN (Native)  
Camera recording  
2:3 pull down  
Recording  
A
B
C
D
AVC-Intra does not support pull-down recording.  
Example of 24P Over 60i  
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De  
Camera recording  
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
2:3 pull down =  
recording  
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De  
Example of 720-24PN (Native)  
Camera recording  
Example of 720P 24P Over 60P  
A
B
C
D
Camera recording  
2:3 pull down  
A
B
C
D
A
B
B
C
D
D
Recording  
2:3 pull down =  
recording  
A
B
B
C
D
D
A
B
C
D
Effective frames  
Effective frames  
Notes  
The recording will start from the top frame of a 5-frame  
cycle for 24P/24PA recording, a 4-frame cycle for 24P  
native recording or a 2-frame cycle for 30P and 25P native  
recording of 720P, respectively. Therefore, the time code  
may be discontinued when recording clips continuously in  
another mode in which the recording cycle is different.  
Even if a P2 card has just been inserted, or the power has  
been just turned on, you can start recording using the  
internal memory of unit. In this case, recording cannot be  
stopped until the P2 card is recognized. If the inserted  
card is not recognized as a recordable P2 card, the record  
in internal memory is instantly discarded, and the  
message “CANNOT REC” is displayed on the viewfinder.  
Press the MODE CHECK button to check P2 card status  
(displayed in viewfinder).  
a
b
a. REC START/STOP button  
b. MODE CHECK button  
Recording and Playback: Normal Recording  
35  
 
PRE RECORDING function  
The internal memory of your unit is capable of storing  
The function of the menu option PRE REC MODE may be  
assigned to a desired user button by using any one of the  
menu options USER MAIN SW, USER1 SW, USER2 SW,  
MARKER SEL, or TEXT MEMO SW.  
These options can be found in the <USER SW> screen on  
the CAM OPERATION page.  
several seconds of video and sound data coming from the  
camera. This capability can be used to record video and  
sound several seconds before either the REC START/STOP  
button or VTR button at the lens is pressed to start  
recording. To use this function, the menu option PRE REC  
MODE must be set to “ON”. The storage duration of the  
internal memory can be set from the menu option PRE REC  
TIME. PRE REC MODE and PRE REC TIME menu options  
can be found in the <REC FUNCTION> screen on the  
SYSTEM SETTING page.  
The following is the option for PRE REC TIME.  
1-8SEC (for AVC-Intra100/50 or DVCPRO HD)  
Specify the duration for which data may be recorded before  
either the REC START/STOP button or VTR button at the  
lens is pressed.  
Recording starts  
Recording pauses  
Real-time video/  
sound  
A
B
C
Specified PRE REC duration  
Content on P2 card  
Previous clip  
A
B
New clip  
Notes  
“P-REC” indication when the PRE REC MODE menu  
option is set to “OFF”  
After recording is stopped, the “P-REC” indication remains  
displayed until all video and sound are recorded on the P2  
card, even if the PRE REC MODE menu option is set to  
“OFF”. For details of the “P-REC” display, refer to  
[28. INTERVAL REC/PRE RECORDING indication/SD  
memory card remaining free space] (page 81) in  
[Viewfinder Status Indication Layout].  
Immediately after the power is turned on, the menu option  
PRE REC TIME is selected and/or the storage duration is  
changed, the content in internal memory will be undefined.  
In these situations, the video or sound will not be recorded  
for the duration specified, even if either the REC START/  
STOP button or VTR button at the lens is pressed to start  
recording.  
A P2 card that has been just inserted takes some time to  
recognize. In this situation, video or sound may not be  
recorded for the duration specified, even if either the REC  
START/STOP button or VTR button at the lens is pressed  
to start a recording.  
The internal memory does not store video or sound when  
a playback or recording review is being performed. For  
this reason, no video or sound can be recorded during  
such operation.  
When recording starts, the time code (TCG) display may  
not update until the unit recognizes the P2 card.  
During native VFR recording and INTERVAL REC  
operation, the PRE RECORDING is not available.  
Recording and Playback: PRE RECORDING function  
36  
 
Variable Frame Rate (VFR) Recording Function  
This unit can shoot at a lower frame rate (undercrank) or  
higher frame rate (overcrank) in the 720P mode. The native  
Standard VFR Recording (Pull-down Recording)  
(PN) recording mode or standard (OVER) recording can be  
selected.  
1
Open the <SYSTEM MODE> screen from the SYSTEM  
SETTING page using the menu.  
Set SYSTEM MODE to “720-59.94P (50P)”, REC  
FORMAT to “AVC-I 100/60P”, and VFR to “ON”.  
Set FRAME RATE suitable for desired way of shooting.  
Native VFR Recording  
1
2
Open the <SYSTEM MODE> screen from the SYSTEM  
SETTING page using the menu.  
Set SYSTEM MODE to “720-59.94P (60P/50P)”, REC  
FORMAT to “AVC-I 100/24PN”, and VFR to “ON”.  
Set FRAME RATE suitable for desired way of shooting.  
2
Press the REC START/STOP button to begin recording  
in the VFR mode (OVER 60P).  
It is possible to select a combination of AVC-I 100, AVC-I 50,  
DVCPROHD, 60P and 50P as recording formats. For more  
details, refer to [Recording formats and output connector  
signal formats] (page 47) and [SYSTEM SETTING]  
(page 165).  
Press the REC START/STOP button to begin recording  
in the VFR mode.  
It is possible to select a combination of AVC-I 100, AVC-I 50,  
DVCPROHD, 30P, 25P and 24P as recording formats. For  
more details, refer to [Recording formats and output  
connector signal formats] (page 47) and [SYSTEM  
SETTING] (page 165).  
Recording a fast-moving subject with the frame rate set to a  
low value using the 60P (or 50P) recording format produces  
images which can be played back to achieve a flow effect.  
Notes  
When SYSTEM MODE is set to “720-59.94P”, setting  
REC FORMAT to “DVCPROHD/60P”, “AVC-I 100/60P” or  
“AVC-I 50/60P” results in operation at DVCPROHD/  
59.94P, AVC-I 100/59.94P or AVC-I 50/59.94P  
respectively. Setting REC FORMAT to “DVCPROHD/  
24PN” or “AVC-I 50/24PN” results in operation at  
DVCPROHD/23.98PN or AVC-I 50/23.98PN.  
When active frames are extracted using the frame  
converter to perform overcrank or undercrank recording, it  
is not possible to play back audio.  
Note the following for standard VFR recording.  
– It is not possible to switch between P2 cards.  
– It is possible to combine standard VFR recording with  
PRE RECORDING, LOOP REC, INTERVAL REC or  
proxy recording.  
Notes  
When SYSTEM MODE is set to “720-59.94P”, setting  
REC FORMAT to “DVCPROHD/30PN”, “AVC-I 100/30PN”  
or “AVC-I 50/30PN” results in operation at DVCPROHD/  
29.97PN, AVC-I 100/29.97PN or AVC-I 50/29.97PN  
respectively. Setting REC FORMAT to “DVCPROHD/  
24PN” or “AVC-I 50/24PN” results in operation at  
DVCPROHD/23.98PN or AVC-I 50/23.98PN.  
Similarly, when SYSTEM MODE is set to “720-60P”,  
setting REC FORMAT to “DVCPROHD/24PN”, “AVC-I  
100/24PN” or “AVC-I 50/24PN” results in operation at  
DVCPROHD/24PN, AVC-I 100/24PN or AVC-I 50/24PN  
respectively.  
Note the following when native recording with VFR.  
– It is not possible to switch between P2 cards.  
– It is not possible to use PRE RECORDING, LOOP REC,  
INTERVAL REC and proxy recording.  
– There is no 1394 output when recording or waiting to  
record.  
– There is 1394 output when recording or waiting to  
record.  
– During recording, it is not possible to switch VFR “ON”/  
“OFF”.  
– Audio is recorded.  
– During recording, it is not possible to switch VFR “ON”/  
“OFF”.  
– Audio is not recorded.  
– The time code is fixed by the Rec run.  
– Thumbnail screens may be produced one frame later  
than in the video recorded to the P2 card. It should be  
noted that this does not indicate a fault.  
Recording and Playback: Variable Frame Rate (VFR) Recording Function  
37  
 
Examples of VFR Recording Function Use  
Standard Speed Shooting for Film Production  
When producing for the cinema screen, a frame rate of 24 fps (24 frames per sec) matching the rate at which films are played  
back is normal (1speed). When settings below are used, the recorded material will play back as a film. By using the 720P  
progressive and the cine-like gamma, film-like images can be achieved.  
Standard Settings for Film Production  
SYSTEM MODE setting  
Recording Frame Rate  
SYSTEM MODE  
720-60P  
Other settings  
REC FORMAT  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
(AVC-I 50/24PN)  
(DVCPROHD/24PN)  
VFR  
OFF  
24 frames  
FRAME RATE  
REC FORMAT  
24FRAME  
1080-24PsF  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
(AVC-I 50/24PN)  
CAMERA MODE  
24P  
Standard Speed shooting for Commercial and TV production  
When producing commercials and TV shows for HDTV/SDTV broadcasts, a frame rate of 30 fps (30 frames per second) (or  
25 fps (25 frames per second) at 50 Hz), is the norm (1speed). When the settings below are used, the recorded material  
will play back as a television broadcast. Commercials and music clips can be recorded with film-like image quality, and a  
frame rate suitable for television broadcasting.  
Standard settings for commercials and TV shows  
SYSTEM MODE setting  
System frequency  
Recording Frame Rate  
SYSTEM MODE  
Other settings  
59.94 Hz  
720-59.94P  
REC FORMAT  
AVC-I 100/30PN  
(AVC-I 50/30PN)  
(DVCPROHD/30PN)  
VFR  
OFF  
FRAME RATE  
REC FORMAT  
30FRAME  
29.97 frames  
1080-59.94i  
AVC-I 100/30PN  
(AVC-I 50/30PN)  
(AVC-I 100/60i)  
(AVC-I 50/60i)  
(DVCPROHD/60i)  
CAMERA MODE  
REC FORMAT  
30P  
50 Hz  
720-50P  
1080-50i  
AVC-I 100/25PN  
(AVC-I 50/25PN)  
(DVCPROHD/25PN)  
VFR  
OFF  
FRAME RATE  
REC FORMAT  
25FRAME  
25 frames  
AVC-I 100/25PN  
(AVC-I 50/25PN)  
(AVC-I 100/50i)  
(AVC-I 50/50i)  
(DVCPROHD/50i)  
CAMERA MODE  
25P  
Recording and Playback: Variable Frame Rate (VFR) Recording Function  
38  
Undercrank Shooting  
This way of shooting provides the quick motion effects used, for instance to realize speeding clouds, a person standing  
stationary in the blur of a moving crowd, and kung-fu moves. For example, when the scenes have been shot using the 24P  
recording format for specifying playback frames, the speed of the quick motion effects can be doubled by setting the VFR  
recording frame rate to 12 fps.  
Standard settings for undercrank shooting  
SYSTEM MODE setting  
System frequency  
Recording Frame Rate  
SYSTEM MODE  
Other settings  
59.94 Hz  
720-59.94P  
REC FORMAT  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
(AVC-I 50/24PN)  
(DVCPROHD/24PN)  
1 - 23 frames  
VFR  
ON  
FRAME RATE  
REC FORMAT  
Set to 23FRAME or lower  
50 Hz  
60 Hz  
720-50P  
720-60P  
AVC-I 100/25PN  
(AVC-I 50/25PN)  
(DVCPROHD/25PN)  
1 - 24 frames  
1 - 23 frames  
VFR  
ON  
FRAME RATE  
REC FORMAT  
Set to 24FRAME or lower  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
(AVC-I 50/24PN)  
(DVCPROHD/24PN)  
VFR  
ON  
FRAME RATE  
Set to 23FRAME or lower  
When REC FORMAT is set to “DVCPROHD/60P” or “DVCPROHD/50P”, the quick motion effects can be obtained by using  
a nonlinear editing system to process what has been recorded.  
Overcrank shooting  
This way of shooting provides slow motion effects used in car chases, action scenes, climactic scenes and other dramatic  
moments. For example, when scenes have been shot using the 30P recording format for specifying the playback frames, the  
speed of the slow motion effects can be halved by setting the recording frame rate to 60 fps. Images in the 720P progressive  
format will create smooth slow motion sequences with a high picture quality.  
Standard settings for overcrank shooting  
SYSTEM MODE setting  
System frequency  
Recording Frame Rate  
SYSTEM MODE  
Other settings  
59.94 Hz  
720-59.94P  
REC FORMAT  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
(AVC-I 50/24PN)  
(DVCPROHD/24PN)  
25 - 60 frames  
VFR  
ON  
FRAME RATE  
REC FORMAT  
Set to 25FRAME or higher  
50 Hz  
60 Hz  
720-50P  
720-60P  
AVC-I 100/25PN  
(AVC-I 50/25PN)  
(DVCPROHD/25PN)  
26 - 50 frames  
25 - 60 frames  
VFR  
ON  
FRAME RATE  
REC FORMAT  
Set to 26FRAME or higher  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
(AVC-I 50/24PN)  
(DVCPROHD/24PN)  
VFR  
ON  
FRAME RATE  
Set to 25FRAME or higher  
When REC FORMAT is set to “DVCPROHD/60P” or “DVCPROHD/50P”, the slow motion effect can be obtained by using a  
nonlinear editing system to process what has been recorded.  
Recording and Playback: Variable Frame Rate (VFR) Recording Function  
39  
Flow Effect Shooting  
This way of shooting provides a flow effect and may, for instance, be used to shoot a subject on a far side of a road with a  
stream of fast-moving cars as the flow, in such a way that the stationary subject comes into focus though the cars.  
Standard settings for flow effect shooting  
SYSTEM MODE setting  
System frequency  
Recording Frame Rate  
SYSTEM MODE  
Other settings  
59.94 Hz  
720-59.94P  
REC FORMAT  
AVC-I 100/60P  
(AVC-I 50/60P)  
(DVCPROHD/60P)  
1 - 60 frames  
VFR  
ON  
FRAME RATE  
REC FORMAT  
Set to 23FRAME or lower  
50 Hz  
720-50P  
AVC-I 100/50P  
(AVC-I 50/50P)  
(DVCPROHD/50P)  
1 - 50 frames  
VFR  
ON  
FRAME RATE  
Set to 24FRAME or lower  
Loop Recording  
When two or more P2 card slots contain cards, this function  
allows the target P2 card to be switched in order. Even when  
the free space of a P2 card is used up, this function  
continues recording while erasing existing data.  
To use this function, the menu option LOOP REC MODE  
must be set to “ON”. The option LOOP REC MODE can be  
found in the <REC FUNCTION> screen on the SYSTEM  
SETTING page.  
Card1  
Card2  
Card3  
Before loop recording starts  
Content  
recorded  
No content  
Recording starts  
Recording Cycle 1  
B
B
C
C
A
Recording Cycle 2  
D
Data are recorded by connecting the unrecorded sections on the P2 card (in the sequence of A to B to C). When the  
remaining recording capacity is less than 30 seconds, A is deleted, and data are recorded on C up to nearly full, and  
then new data are recorded (D).  
When you set LOOP REC MODE to “ON”, VFR is set to  
“OFF”.  
During native VFR recording and use of the INTERVAL  
REC function, the LOOP REC function is not available.  
Notes  
When the loop recording capability is used, each P2 card  
must have at least 1 minute of free space.  
During loop recording, the P2 card access LEDs for all  
target P2 cards illuminate in orange. Note that if any of the  
target P2 card is removed, loop recording stops.  
When the menu option LOOP REC MODE is set to “ON”,  
the viewfinder and display window both show “LOOP”.  
However, when only one card is inserted, or when each  
card has less than 1 minute of free space, the loop  
recording capability does not work, even if the option  
LOOP REC MODE is set to “ON”. If this is the case, the  
indication “LOOP” flashes in the viewfinder and on the  
display window.  
Terminating the Loop Recording Mode  
You can terminate the loop recording mode by either:  
Turning off the POWER switch of unit; or  
Setting the menu option LOOP REC MODE to “OFF”.  
When the menu option LOOP REC MODE is set to “ON”,  
the space remaining on the P2 card is displayed as an  
estimated recording time for the current recording format.  
When LOOP REC is stopped immediately after deleting  
an old recording, the actual time remaining may be shorter  
than the displayed time.  
Recording and Playback: Loop Recording  
40  
 
Interval Recording  
It is possible to record in intervals of one frame as the  
Notes  
shortest length by using the internal memory of the unit.  
To use this option, open the <REC FUNCTION> screen from  
the SYSTEM SETTING page, and set the interval recording  
mode, REC TIME, PAUSE TIME and TAKE TOTAL TIME for  
the menu option INTERVAL REC MODE. When the settings  
are finalized, TOTAL REC TIME needed on the P2 card is  
automatically calculated and displayed.  
When executing interval recording, data cannot be output  
with IEEE1394. When the 1394 CONTROL is set to  
“BOTH”, it is also impossible to control external devices.  
When you set INTERVAL REC to “ON” or “ONE SHOT”,  
VFR is set to “OFF”.  
(When an item including any of the 24PN, 25PN or 30PN  
modes is selected using the REC FORMAT menu option.)  
The shortest recording time, stand-by time, and the set  
value of the cut-off unit frame number* may vary with the  
recording method as follows.  
The following are the options for INTERVAL REC MODE:  
OFF:  
ON:  
No interval recording performed.  
Interval recording performed.  
ONE SHOT:  
Performs “one-shot” recording for the duration  
Unit frame  
Recording method  
number  
specified under the REC TIME option by  
pressing either the REC START/STOP button  
or VTR button at the lens.  
1080i  
720P  
60i, 50i  
30P, 25P (Pull down)  
30PN, 25PN (Native)  
1 frame  
24P, 24PA (Pull down)  
24PN (Native)  
5 frames  
4 frames  
60P, 50P  
30P, 25P (Pull down)  
1 frame  
30PN, 25PN (Native)  
24P (Pull down)  
24PN (Native)  
2 frames  
5 frames  
4 frames  
* For instance, interval recording is at every 24 frames since  
frames are cut off every 2 frames even if the REC TIME is set to  
1 second (=25 frames) in the 25PN mode of 720P.  
Shooting procedures when INTERVAL REC is ON  
Interval recording starts. Recording automatically stops  
after the specified TAKE TOTAL TIME, and the entire  
recording is generated as one clip.  
“i” starts blinking in the display when the internal  
recording mode is selected. “iREC” illuminates after  
recording starts. “iREC” blinks during a pause.  
The display in the viewfinder is the same as that in the  
display window.  
The tally lamp illuminates during recording. If PAUSE  
TIME is set at 2 minutes or longer, the tally lamp  
illuminates at 5-second intervals to indicate that it is  
paused. The tally lamp also blinks 3 seconds before  
recording starts.  
1
Following basic operations of shooting and recording  
according to [Basic Procedures], lock the camera  
securely.  
2
3
Check that “i” is blinking in the display, and that the  
interval recording mode is selected.  
Press either REC START/STOP button or VTR button at  
the lens.  
iREC start  
t1  
Time Axis  
REC TIME  
(Recording time=t1)  
t1  
2
t1  
t1  
t1  
N
Real-time video  
Sound  
1
3
N-1  
PAUSE TIME  
(Pausing time=t2)  
t2  
t2  
t2  
TAKE TOTAL TIME  
(Time necessary for shooting)  
Content on P2 card  
One clip  
1
2
3
N-1  
N
TOTAL REC TIME  
(Recording time on P2 card)  
Recording and Playback: Interval Recording  
41  
   
For continuous recording  
To stop the Interval recording mode  
Press either the REC START/STOP button or VTR button at  
the lens, again. Interval recording resumes.  
Setting the menu option INTERVAL REC MODE to “OFF”.  
When INTERVAL REC HOLD is set to “OFF”, the mode  
returns to ordinary recording mode if the POWER switch of  
the unit is turned off.  
To stop recording  
If INTERVAL REC HOLD is set to “ON”, the interval  
recording mode will not change even if the POWER switch is  
turned off.  
Press the STOP button. Recording stops. Then, the camera  
accesses the P2 card to record the video stored in memory  
before recording stops. The record from the beginning of the  
interval recording to the moment of pressing the STOP  
button is generated as one clip.  
Shooting procedures for the ONE SHOT mode of INTERVAL REC  
After setting the INTERVAL REC mode, follow these steps:  
3
Performs recording for the duration specified under the  
1
Following basic operations of shooting and recording  
according to [Basic Procedures], lock the camera  
securely.  
REC TIME option by pressing either the REC START/  
STOP button or VTR button at the lens, and returns to  
ONE SHOT pause mode.  
2
Press either the REC START/STOP button or VTR  
button at the lens.  
The unit automatically goes into ONE SHOT pause  
mode after the specified REC TIME.  
4
Press the STOP button.  
The video and sound stored in memory are generated  
as one clip.  
Time Axis  
iREC  
start  
STOP button  
iREC start  
Real-time video/  
A
B
sound  
REC TIME  
(Recording time=t)  
t
t
Content on P2 card  
Previous clip  
A
B
One clip  
To check the previous recording during a pause  
To stop the ONE SHOT mode of INTERVAL REC  
Press the RET button at the lens to put the unit into REC  
REVIEW mode. ONE SHOT operation continues after the  
REC REVIEW.  
Set the menu option INTERVAL REC MODE to “OFF”.  
When INTERVAL REC HOLD is set to “OFF”, the mode  
returns to ordinary recording mode if the POWER switch of  
the unit is turned off.  
To divide clips or to change the P2 card used for  
recording  
If INTERVAL REC HOLD is set to “ON”, the interval  
recording mode will not change even if the POWER switch is  
turned off.  
Even during ONE SHOT mode, clips will not be generated  
on the P2 card until the STOP button is pressed. Press the  
STOP button, and stop ONE SHOT mode operation.  
Recording and Playback: Interval Recording  
42  
Time code indication  
When recording starts, the time code (TCG) display may  
not update until the unit recognizes the P2 card.  
During INTERVAL REC mode general notes  
Sound  
By selecting “ON”/“OFF” for the menu option AUDIO REC  
in the <REC FUNCTION> screen, it is possible to specify  
whether or not sound will be recorded during interval  
recording.  
Removing cards  
During INTERVAL REC mode operation, the P2 card  
access LED for the target P2 card blinks in orange. Do not  
remove the P2 card during this status. If you should  
remove the card accidentally, restore clips. However, even  
if the clips are restored, the last 3 to 4 seconds of the  
recording (up to a maximum of about 10 seconds if the P2  
card is removed while recording onto multiple P2 cards)  
may be lost. For more information on how to fix clips, see  
[Restoring Clips] (page 129).  
Record/playback buttons  
During interval recording, all operation buttons other than  
STOP (REW, FF, PLAY/PAUSE) are disabled. However,  
during a pause in ONE SHOT mode, REC REVIEW can  
be executed with the RET button on the lens.  
If the POWER switch is turned [OFF] during recording  
If the unit is turned off during interval recording, the video  
stored in memory is recorded onto the P2 card, and then  
the unit automatically turns off.  
Thumbnail operation and menu operation  
Thumbnail operation does not work during the INTERVAL  
REC mode operation. Press the STOP button before  
operating thumbnails.  
To start emergency recording during a pause  
If the REC START/STOP button is assigned to one of the  
USER MAIN, USER 1, USER 2, MARKER SELECT and  
TEXT MEMO button in advance, emergency recording  
can be started during a pause by holding down the  
relevant button. Pause time measurement continues after  
such emergency recording.  
When standby time is set to 1 minute or more or when in  
ONE SHOT mode, the following restrictions apply even  
though the menu can be operated during stand-by mode.  
– The respective settings of SYSTEM MODE, REC  
FORMAT, CAMERA MODE, PC MODE and VFR  
cannot be changed.  
– The respective settings for SD CARD READ/WRITE,  
LENS FILE CARD R/W, READ USER DATA, and READ  
FACTORY DATA cannot be executed.  
Note  
However, this function does not work in native recording with  
VFR operation.  
Recording Review Function  
When recording is paused, pressing the RET button  
automatically locates the last 2 seconds of video just  
recorded, and the viewfinder provides video playback. Thus,  
it is possible to check whether the recording has been  
performed correctly.  
After playback, the unit is again ready to start recording.  
The picture location/playback duration can be increased to  
up to 10 seconds by continuously pressing the RET button.  
For short clips, however, when the start of a clip is located,  
continuously pressing the RET button does not play back  
any clips before that clip.  
The function of the RET button may be assigned to a  
desired user button by using one of the menu options USER  
MAIN SW, USER1 SW, USER2 SW, MARKER SEL or  
TEXT MEMO SW. These options can be found in the  
<USER SW> screen on the CAM OPERATION page.  
When recording is paused, pressing the PLAY/PAUSE  
button plays back the last recorded clip, from the beginning.  
After completion of playback, the unit enters the stopped  
state.  
Recording pauses  
Recording starts  
2-10 Seconds  
Recorded clip  
The RET button puts the unit into REC  
REVIEW mode.  
The PLAY/PAUSE button plays back the  
clip from the beginning.  
Notes  
Set the menu option RET SW (found in the <SW MODE>  
screen on the CAM OPERATION page) to “R.REVIEW”.  
When the HD SDI A · B switch on the side panel is  
positioned at [MEM], the video for REC REVIEW is output  
from the video output connectors (HD SDI A · B and MON  
OUT connectors), and also to the viewfinder.  
Note that when a backup device is connected to back up  
the video the pictures for REC REVIEW are backed up.  
Recording and Playback: Recording Review Function  
43  
 
Normal and Variable Speed Playback  
The PLAY/PAUSE button provides monochrome playback  
Notes  
through the viewfinder and color playback on the LCD  
monitor. A color video monitor connected to the HD SDI A ·  
B or MON OUT connector of unit also provides color  
playback.  
The HD SDI A · B connector outputs an SDI playback (to  
view the playback, the HD SDI A · B switch on the side panel  
must be positioned to [MEM]).  
When a clip with a different SYSTEM MODE cannot be  
played back, change the SYSTEM MODE setting of this  
unit to match the format of the clip. For more details about  
the SYSTEM MODE, refer to [Recording formats and  
output connector signal formats] (page 47).  
When a P2 card has been just removed or inserted, or  
when the power has been just turned on for playback, it  
may take some time for unit to read clip information. If this  
is the case, the viewfinder displays “UPDATING”. If data is  
played back when the P2 card is being recognized, the  
message “CANNOT PLAY” will be displayed.  
If a P2 card is inserted while another P2 card is being  
played back, the clips on the inserted P2 card will not be  
played back. A P2 card inserted during playback will be  
recognized after playback ends.  
If you perform variable speed playback on a clip split  
across more than one P2 card, sound may disappear for a  
moment. This is not a fault.  
Variable speed playback  
The FF and REW buttons provide 32and 4fast  
playbacks and fast reverse playbacks.  
When playback is paused, the FF button locates the  
beginning of the next clip while maintaining the pause mode.  
When playback is paused, the REW button locates the  
beginning of the current clip while maintaining the pause  
mode.  
Text Memo Function  
Text memos are time-coded thumbnails added to any video  
point when a clip is being recorded or played back.  
The TEXT MEMO button adds text memo information at the  
appropriate point. You can edit added text memos using the  
P2 Viewer.  
Through a thumbnail display, you can choose and play back  
the text memo point or copy any portion. For more  
information, see [Text Memo] (page 126).  
Notes  
One clip can have up to 100 text memos.  
Text memos can also be recorded when the LCD monitor  
is in thumbnail mode. In this case, the text memo is added  
to the position on the clip where the cursor is set (normally  
at the beginning) only.  
Text memos cannot be recorded when the color bar is  
output or the unit is in LOOP REC mode and INTERVAL  
REC mode.  
a
a. TEXT MEMO button  
Recording and Playback: Normal and Variable Speed Playback  
44  
     
Shot Mark Function  
A shot mark is added to the thumbnail of a clip to distinguish  
Shot marks may also be added or erased using clip  
thumbnails. For more information, see [Shot Mark]  
(page 126).  
that clip from others. It is also possible to select only those  
clips which include shot marks, and display and playback the  
selected clips on the LCD monitor.  
Notes  
During color bar output, LOOP REC recording, and in  
INTERVAL REC mode, it is not possible to add/delete shot  
marks.  
It is impossible to add shot marks to incomplete clips (refer  
page 122).  
For clips recorded on plural P2 cards or clips split on a P2  
card (refer to Notes on page 10), a shot mark is added to  
the top clip only.  
Adding Shot Marks  
To add a shot mark during recording, press the SHOT  
MARKER button. The viewfinder displays “MARK ON” and  
adds a shot mark to the thumbnail of the appropriate clip.  
Another press of the button erases the shot mark.  
When the SHOT MARKER button is pressed during a  
recording pause, a shot mark is attached to the clip recorded  
immediately before. The shot mark can be deleted with  
another press.  
a
a. SHOT MARKER button  
Recording Setting and Operation Mode  
The unit’s recording mode works according to the priorities outlined in the following table, relative to the setting of the menus  
and switches.  
Menus related to system/recording  
Buttons  
Proxy  
recording  
(optional)  
Functional  
operation mode  
INTERVAL  
REC MODE  
LOOP REC  
MODE  
PRE REC  
MODE  
Recording a  
PC MODE  
VFR  
Shot mark  
text memo  
USB device  
USB host  
USB DEV.  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
USB HOST Disabled  
Enabled  
ON or  
ONE SHOT  
1
1
INTERVAL REC  
LOOP REC  
Disabled  
ON  
Disabled  
Enabled*  
Enabled*  
Enabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Enabled  
1s - 8s  
OFF  
OFF  
2
Enabled*  
1s - 8s  
3
3
2
Normal recording  
OFF  
Enabled*  
Enabled*  
Enabled*  
*1 Disabled for native recording  
*2 Disabled for native VFR recording  
*3 Disabled for color bars  
Recording and Playback: Shot Mark Function  
45  
     
Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
Multi Format  
Video system and Recording format  
The unit employs a progressive scan (full pixel reading) CCD system.  
With combinations of the SYSTEM MODE and CAMERA MODE menu options on the <SYSTEM MODE> screen on the  
SYSTEM SETTING page, you can select an video system from among 23 types.  
In any video system, the CCD operates in progressive (non-interlace) scan mode.  
Selecting a recording signal and method  
SYSTEM MODE menu option  
VFR menu option  
Allows you to select a combination of system frequency  
When the signal format is 720P, you can select whether  
(59.94 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 23.98 Hz and 24 Hz) and  
to perform VFR recording.  
signaling system (1080i or 720P). When a change has  
Enables variable frame rate shooting at the  
frame rate set in FRAME RATE.  
The frame rate is determined according to the  
REC FORMAT setting.  
been made to the SYSTEM MODE option, the  
viewfinder indicates “TURN POWER OFF”. Then, turn  
the POWER switch of the unit off and wait 5 seconds or  
longer before turning the unit on again.  
OFF  
FRAME RATE menu option  
CAMERA MODE menu option  
When the VFR menu option is set to “ON”, it is possible  
to shoot using the frame rate set in this menu option.  
When the VFR menu option is set to “ON”, pressing the  
jog dial button displays the frame rate on the upper left  
of the viewfinder screen as a blinking number. It is then  
possible to change the frame rate setting without  
opening the FRAME RATE menu option by pressing the  
SYNCHRO SCAN adjustment buttons (+/-). Note,  
however, that this operation is not available when the  
FRATE function has been set to on using a user button.  
Selecting a shooting mode when the signal format is  
1080i. For information about the behavior for each  
setting, see [Recording formats and output connector  
signal formats] (page 47).  
Note  
When the camera has been switched from 60i, 60P, or  
30P to 24P or 24PA, video may produce noise for a  
moment because the pull-down 5-frame cycle is  
adjusted. This is not an abnormal condition.  
REC FORMAT menu option  
Used to select the recording format  
AVC-I 100  
The AVC-Intra100 format is used to record  
video. The native recording format applies to  
the 30PN, 24PN and 25PN modes.  
AVC-I 50  
The AVC-Intra50 format is used to record  
video. The native recording is applied to the  
30PN, 24PN and 25PN modes.  
DVCPROHD  
The DVCPRO HD format is used to record  
video. The native recording is for the 30PN,  
24PN and 25PN modes.  
Note  
When “AVC-I 50” or “AVC-I 100” is selected, the 24PA  
mode cannot be selected.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Multi Format  
46  
     
Recording formats and output connector signal formats  
The table below shows the formats used to record signals from the CCD and externally input signals along with the formats for  
signals output from the output connectors.  
Menu setting  
Operating state  
Recording  
format/frame  
rate  
Recording TC  
frame number/  
mode  
Input/output  
TC frame  
number/mode  
SYSTEM  
MODE  
CAMERA  
MODE  
FRAME  
RATE  
Audio  
recording  
REC FORMAT  
VFR  
Video output format  
1080-59.94i  
1394 output  
60i  
60i  
59.94i  
29.97P Over  
59.94i  
30P  
24P  
24PA  
60i  
1080-29.97PsF Over 59.94i 2:2  
1080-23.98PsF Over 59.94i 2:3  
1080-23.98PsF Over 59.94i 2:3:3:2  
1080-59.94i  
30P Over 60i  
24P Over 60i  
24PA Over 60i  
DVCPROHD/60i  
23.98P Over  
59.94i 2:3  
30 frames  
23.98P Over  
59.94i 2:3:3:2  
1080-  
59.94i  
30 frames  
AVC-I 100/60i  
AVC-I 50/60i  
59.94i  
Not shown Not shown  
AVC-I 100/30PN  
AVC-I 50/30PN  
29.97P-29.97PN  
(Native)  
30P  
24P  
24P  
24P  
1080-29.97PsF Over 59.94i 2:2  
1080-23.98PsF Over 59.94i 2:3  
1080-23.98PsF Over 47.96i 2:2  
1080-24PsF Over 48i 2:2  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
AVC-I 50/24PN  
23.98P-23.98PN  
(Native)  
No output  
1080-  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
23.98PsF AVC-I 50/24PN  
23.98P-23.98PN  
(Native)  
24 frames  
25 frames  
24 frames  
25 frames  
1080-  
24PsF  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
AVC-I 50/24PN  
24P-24PN  
(Native)  
50i  
50i  
1080-50i  
50i  
DVCPROHD/50i  
25P  
25P Over 50i 2:2  
1080-25PsF Over 50i 2:2  
25P Over 50i  
AVC-I 100/50i  
AVC-I 50/50i  
1080-50i  
Not shown Not shown  
50i  
50i  
1080-50i  
No output  
AVC-I 100/25PN  
AVC-I 50/25PN  
25P-25PN  
(Native)  
25P  
1080-25PsF Over 50i 2:2  
720-59.94P  
OFF  
ON  
Disabled  
59.94P  
60P  
DVCPROHD/  
60P  
1FRAME-  
1-59.94P Over  
60FRAME 59.94P  
ꢅꢅP Over  
720-ꢅꢅP Over 59.94P  
30 frames  
30 frames  
30 frames  
60P  
29.97P-29.97PN  
(Native)  
OFF  
ON  
Disabled  
720-29.97P Over 59.94P 2:2  
DVCPROHD/  
30PN  
1FRAME-  
1-59.94P -  
For EE: 720-ꢅꢅP Over 59.94P  
Playback: 720-29.97P Over 59.94P 2:2  
30 frames  
R-RUN only  
For EE:  
60FRAME 29.97PN (Native) R-RUN only  
No output  
Playback:  
Over 60P  
23.98P-23.98PN  
(Native)  
OFF  
Disabled  
24 frames  
24 frames  
720-23.98P Over 59.94P 2:3  
30 frames  
DVCPROHD/  
24PN  
1FRAME-  
1-59.94P -  
For EE: 720-ꢅꢅP Over 59.94P  
Playback: 720-23.98P Over 59.94P 2:3  
30 frames  
R-RUN only  
ON  
60FRAME 23.98PN (Native) R-RUN only  
720-  
59.94P  
Not shown  
OFF  
ON  
Disabled  
59.94P  
720-59.94P  
AVC-I 100/60P  
AVC-I 50/60P  
1FRAME-  
1-59.94P Over  
60FRAME 59.94P  
720-ꢅꢅP Over 59.94P  
30 frames  
30 frames  
29.97P-29.97PN  
(Native)  
OFF  
ON  
Disabled  
720-29.97P Over 59.94P 2:2  
AVC-I 100/30PN  
AVC-I 50/30PN  
No output  
1FRAME-  
1-59.94P -  
30 frames  
For EE: 720-ꢅꢅP Over 59.94P  
Playback: 720-29.97P Over 59.94P 2:2  
30 frames  
60FRAME 29.97PN (Native) R-RUN only  
R-RUN only  
23.98P-23.98PN  
(Native)  
OFF  
ON  
Disabled  
24 frames  
24 frames  
720-23.98P Over 59.94P 2:3  
30 frames  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
AVC-I 50/24PN  
1FRAME-  
1-59.94P -  
For EE: 720-ꢅꢅP Over 59.94P  
Playback: 720-23.98P Over 59.94P 2:3  
30 frames  
60FRAME 23.98PN (Native) R-RUN only  
R-RUN only  
24P-24PN  
(Native)  
OFF  
ON  
Disabled  
24 frames  
*  
720-24P Over 60P 2:3  
30 frames  
DVCPROHD/  
24PN  
No output (or  
playback)  
1FRAME-  
1-60P -24PN  
60FRAME (Native)  
24 frames  
R-RUN only  
For EE: 720-ꢅꢅP Over 60P  
Playback: 720-24P Over 60P 2:3  
30 frames  
R-RUN only  
720-60P  
Not shown  
24P-24PN  
(Native)  
OFF  
Disabled  
24 frames  
*  
720-24P Over 60P 2:3  
30 frames  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
AVC-I 50/24PN  
No output  
50P  
1FRAME-  
1-60P -24PN  
60FRAME (Native)  
24 frames  
R-RUN only  
For EE: 720-ꢅꢅP Over 60P  
Playback: 720-24P Over 60P 2:3  
30 frames  
R-RUN only  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
Disabled  
50P  
720-50P  
DVCPROHD/  
50P  
1FRAME-  
50FRAME  
ꢅꢅP Over  
50P  
1-50P Over 50P  
720-ꢅꢅP Over 50P  
25 frames  
25 frames  
25P-25PN  
(Native)  
For EE:  
OFF  
Disabled  
720-25P Over 50P  
DVCPROHD/  
25PN  
No output  
Playback:  
Over 50P  
1FRAME-  
50FRAME (Native)  
1-50P -25PN  
25 frames  
R-RUN only  
For EE: 720-ꢅꢅP Over 50P  
Playback: 720-25P Over 50P 2:2  
25 frames  
R-RUN only  
ON  
720-50P  
Not shown  
OFF  
ON  
Disabled  
50P  
720-50P  
AVC-I 100/50P  
AVC-I 50/50P  
1FRAME-  
50FRAME  
1-50P Over 50P  
720-ꢅꢅP Over 50P  
25 frames  
25 frames  
No output  
25P-25PN  
(Native)  
OFF  
ON  
Disabled  
720-25P Over 50P  
AVC-I 100/25PN  
AVC-I 50/25PN  
1FRAME-  
50FRAME (Native)  
1-50P -25PN  
25 frames  
R-RUN only  
For EE: 720-ꢅꢅP Over 50P  
Playback: 720-25P Over 50P 2:2  
25 frames  
R-RUN only  
: Supported  
–: Not supported  
* The audio sampling frequency is 48.048 KHz  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Multi Format  
47  
 
Menu setting  
Supported Recording Functions  
PRE  
RECORDING  
INTERVAL/  
ONE SHOT  
SYSTEM MODE  
REC FORMAT  
CAMERA MODE  
VFR  
FRAME RATE  
PROXY  
LOOP REC  
60i  
30P  
DVCPROHD/60i  
24P  
24PA  
AVC-I 100/60i  
AVC-I 50/60i  
1080-59.94i  
60i  
AVC-I 100/30PN  
AVC-I 50/30PN  
Not shown  
Not shown  
30P  
24P  
24P  
24P  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
AVC-I 50/24PN  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
AVC-I 50/24PN  
1080-23.98PsF  
1080-24PsF  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
AVC-I 50/24PN  
50i  
DVCPROHD/50i  
25P  
AVC-I 100/50i  
AVC-I 50/50i  
1080-50i  
Not shown  
Not shown  
50i  
AVC-I 100/25PN  
AVC-I 50/25PN  
25P  
OFF  
ON  
Disabled  
DVCPROHD/60P  
DVCPROHD/30PN  
DVCPROHD/24PN  
1FRAME-60FRAME  
Disabled  
OFF  
ON  
1FRAME-60FRAME  
Disabled  
OFF  
ON  
1FRAME-60FRAME  
Disabled  
720-59.94P  
Not shown  
OFF  
ON  
AVC-I 100/60P  
AVC-I 50/60P  
1FRAME-60FRAME  
Disabled  
OFF  
ON  
AVC-I 100/30PN  
AVC-I 50/30PN  
1FRAME-60FRAME  
Disabled  
OFF  
ON  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
AVC-I 50/24PN  
1FRAME-60FRAME  
Disabled  
OFF  
ON  
DVCPROHD/24PN  
1FRAME-60FRAME  
Disabled  
720-60P  
720-50P  
Not shown  
Not shown  
OFF  
ON  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
AVC-I 50/24PN  
1FRAME-60FRAME  
Disabled  
OFF  
ON  
DVCPROHD/50P  
DVCPROHD/25PN  
1FRAME-50FRAME  
Disabled  
OFF  
ON  
1FRAME -50FRAME  
Disabled  
OFF  
ON  
AVC-I 100/50P  
AVC-I 50/50P  
1FRAME-50FRAME  
Disabled  
OFF  
ON  
AVC-I 100/25PN  
AVC-I 50/25PN  
1FRAME-50FRAME  
: Supported  
–: Not supported  
Note  
During playback, the formats for clips in the same system mode are switched automatically and played back.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Multi Format  
48  
Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance  
To record high-quality video with the unit, the black and white balances must be adjusted according to conditions.  
For higher quality, it is recommended that the adjustments should be made in this order AWB (white balance adjustment) ꢀ  
ABB (black balance adjustment) AWB (white balance adjustment).  
Adjusting the White Balance  
Whenever light conditions change, the white balance must  
be re-adjusted.  
To adjust the white balance, follow the steps below.  
4
5
Adjust the lens iris.  
Flip up the AUTO W/B BAL switch so that it is positioned  
at [AWB], then release it.  
The switch returns to the central position with the white  
balance automatically adjusted.  
1
Set the switches as illustrated below.  
Note  
To cancel automatic white balance adjustment in  
process (the viewfinder displays “AWB ACTIVE”), re-  
position the AUTO W/B BAL switch at [AWB].  
If automatic adjustment is canceled, the value in effect  
before automatic adjustment will be used.  
a
6
7
During an adjustment, the viewfinder displays the  
following message:  
  
e
d
c
b
The adjustment will take effect in a few seconds, and the  
following message will appear:  
a. CC/ND FILTER control  
b. AUTO W/B BAL switch:  
The adjusted value is automatically stored in the  
memory specified in step 1 ([A] or [B]).  
Used to perform AWB.  
Under normal conditions, set to “0 dB”.  
c. GAIN:  
If it is too dark, an appropriate gain should  
ޓ
ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ
  
d. OUTPUT:  
e. WHITE BAL: [A] or [B]  
8
For the 3200 K CC/ND filter, if the subject’s color  
temperature is lower than 2300 K or higher than 9900 K  
the following message appears:  
If the arrow points down () the actual color temperature  
is lower than the temperature indicated. If the arrow  
points up () the actual temperature is higher than the  
temperature indicated.  
2
3
Adjust the CC/ND FILTER control according to the light  
conditions.  
Note  
For examples of CC/ND FILTER adjustments, see  
[Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section]  
(page 18).  
Place a white pattern at a point where the light  
conditions match those for the light source of the  
subject. Then zoom-in on the white pattern so that white  
color appears in the screen. A white object (cloth or  
wall) may be used instead of a white pattern.  
The illustration below shows the required size for the  
white space.  
ޓ
ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ
  
Notes  
Do not include a high-intensity spot in the screen.  
The white object must appear at the center of the  
screen.  
1/4 or more of the screen in width  
1/4 or more of the  
screen in height  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance  
49  
   
Detection area for the white balance  
Retaining white balances  
The detection area for the white balance is selectable  
between “90%”, “50%” and “25%”, using the menu option  
AWB AREA.  
This option can be found in the <WHITE BALANCE MODE>  
screen on the CAM OPERATION page.  
Each value in memory is retained even if the unit is turned  
off; it will not be lost until the white balance is re-adjusted.  
White balances are stored in either of two systems: A or B.  
When the menu option FILTER INH is set to “ON” (default),  
each system stores only one value. If this is the case, the  
values are not synchronized with the filters.  
The detection area is factory-set to “25%”.  
This option can be found in the <WHITE BALANCE MODE>  
screen on the CAM OPERATION page.  
When the menu option FILTER INH is set to “OFF”, the  
adjusted value for each filter can be automatically stored in  
the memory that corresponds to the position of the WHITE  
BAL switch ([A] or [B]). Your unit has 4 built-in filters; it stores  
8 (42) adjusted values.  
90%  
50%  
25%  
When you have no time to adjust the white  
balance  
Position the WHITE BAL switch at [PRST].  
This adjusts the white balance for the filter according to the  
position of the CC/ND FILTER control.  
When the white balance has not been  
automatically adjusted  
When the white balance has not been successfully adjusted,  
the viewfinder displays an error message.  
If one of the error messages listed below appears, take the  
appropriate steps, then adjust the white balance again.  
If the error message appears after repeated readjustments,  
the interior of the unit must be inspected. For more  
information, contact your distributor.  
Error message  
Description  
The color  
temperature is too  
high.  
Remedies  
COLOR TEMP  
HIGH  
Select an appropriate  
filter.  
COLOR TEMP  
LOW  
The color  
temperature is too  
low.  
Select an appropriate  
filter.  
LOW LIGHT  
There is insufficient  
light.  
Increase the light  
level or gain.  
LEVEL OVER  
CHECK FILTER  
TIME OVER  
There is too much  
light.  
Decrease the light  
level or gain.  
The FILTER control is Check the FILTER  
displaced.  
control.  
AWB was not  
completed within the  
time allowed.  
Shooting conditions  
may be unstable. If  
flicker occurs, press  
the shutter and  
readjust the AWB  
under stable  
conditions.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance  
50  
Setting Color Temperature Manually  
The white balance can be manually adjusted by setting the  
color temperature. Manual color temperature settings can be  
performed for each of the WHITE BAL switch positions:  
[PRST], [A] and [B].  
The color temperature is set using the menu options COLOR  
TEMP PRE, COLOR TEMP A, and COLOR TEMP B.  
These options can be found in the <WHITE BALANCE  
MODE> screen on the CAM OPERATION page.  
Note  
Even if the color temperature has been manually set,  
automatic adjustment of the white balance (AWB) records  
the color temperature at the time of AWB at the position  
where the WHITE BAL switch was located. When the CC  
filter position is switched, the value for the color temperature  
changes.  
  
  
  
  
   
  
  
  
Viewfinder displays related to white balance  
See [Viewfinder Screen Status Displays] (page 74).  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance  
51  
 
Adjusting the Black Balance  
The black balance must be adjusted when:  
You use your unit the first time.  
Notes  
Ensure that the lens connector is connected and the  
lens iris is CLOSE.  
During a black balance adjustment, light is  
automatically cut off.  
Your unit has not been used for some time.  
The ambient temperature has changed substantially.  
The gain switchover value has been changed.  
During a black balance adjustment, the gain  
switchover circuit is automatically switched.  
The viewfinder screen may flicker and/or display  
noise; this is not a failure.  
1
Set the switches as illustrated below.  
If you find the black shading annoying after  
performing an auto black balance adjustment, adjust  
the black shading. To do so, go to the menu option  
DETECTION (DIG), move the cursor (), then press  
the jog dial button.  
The menu option DETECTION (DIG) can be found in  
the <BLACK SHADING> screen on the  
MAINTENANCE page.  
Note that pressing the ABB switch for longer than  
8 seconds automatically performs an auto black  
balance adjustment, followed by an automatic black  
shading adjustment. (For more information, see the  
menu option SHD.ABB SW CTL in [SW MODE]  
(page 187).)  
However, when the remote control unit (AJ-RC10G,  
optional) is connected, automatic black shading  
cannot be executed even if the ABB switch is held  
down.  
a
b
a. AUTO W/B BAL switch:  
Used to perform ABB.  
b. OUTPUT:  
[CAM]  
2
3
Tilt the AUTO W/B BAL switch so that it is positioned at  
[ABB], then release it.  
The switch returns to the central position with the black  
balance automatically adjusted.  
To cancel the automatic black balance adjustment in  
process (the viewfinder displays “ABB ACTIVE”), flip  
the AUTO W/B BAL switch down to [ABB] again.  
If automatic adjustment is canceled, the value in effect  
before automatic adjustment will be used.  
During adjustment, the viewfinder displays the following  
message:  
Retaining black balances  
  
Each value in memory is retained even if the unit is turned  
off.  
Note  
During adjustment, the lens iris automatically becomes  
CLOSE.  
4
The adjustment will take effect in a few seconds and the  
following message will appear:  
  
The adjusted value is automatically stored in the  
memory.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance  
52  
 
Setting the Electronic Shutter  
This section provides a description of the electronic shutter, together with setting and handling directions.  
Shutter Modes  
The table below lists the shutter modes in which the unit’s electronic shutter can be used as well as the shutter speeds which  
can be selected.  
To use the fixed shutter speed  
To use the half shutter speed (HALF)  
For eliminating flicker due to lighting  
For shooting images when adding effects as if taken with  
For shooting fast moving subjects clearly  
film  
Notes  
To use the shutter speed of SYNCHRO SCAN  
No matter in which mode the electronic shutter is used,  
the higher the shutter speed, the lower the camera’s  
sensitivity.  
For shooting monitor screens in a way that minimizes the  
pattern of horizontal lines  
For shooting images when adding effects to the subjects’  
movement  
When the aperture is in the automatic mode, it will  
increasingly open and the depth of focus will become  
shallower as the shutter speed is increased.  
By setting the shutter speed on the time axis (1/60, 1/100,  
1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000), the frame rate can  
be varied while keeping the exposure constant.  
This is equivalent to Ramping (compensating for changes  
in the frame rate using shutter angle) in a conventional film  
camera.  
SYNCHRO SCAN:  
Shutter is set using angle (deg) irrespective of  
frame rate.  
SYNCHRO SCAN2:  
Shutter is set using time (sec) irrespective of  
frame rate.  
Half shutter Variable range for SYNCHRO  
Variable range for SYNCHRO  
SCAN2  
Video system  
Fixed shutter speed  
Time/Angle display  
speed  
SCAN  
SYSTEM  
MODE  
CAMERA  
MODE*  
Angle  
display  
Angle  
Time display  
Time display  
Time display  
1
display  
60i  
1/120  
1/60  
1/48  
1/48  
1/48  
1/61.7 - 1/7200  
1/30.9 - 1/3600  
1/24.7 - 1/2880  
1/24.7 - 1/2880  
1/24.7 - 1/2880  
1/61.7 - 1/7200  
1/60.0 - 1/250  
1/30.0 - 1/250  
1/24.0 - 1/250  
1/24.0 - 1/250  
1/24.0 - 1/250  
1/60.0 - 1/250  
30P  
1080-59.94i  
24P  
1/60, 1/100,  
24PA  
1/120, 1/250,  
1/500, 1/1000,  
1/2000, HALF  
1080-23.98PsF 24P  
60P  
1/120  
1/60  
2
2
1/F* - 1/7200  
1/F* - 1/250  
180 deg, 172.8 deg,  
144.0 deg, 120.0 deg,  
90.0 deg, 45.0 deg  
1/30.9 - 1/3600  
1/24.1 - 1/250  
720-59.94P  
30P  
2
2
1/F* - 1/3600  
1/F* - 1/250  
1/24.7 - 1/2880  
1/F* - 1/2880  
1/60.3 - 1/250  
1/F* - 1/250  
Select from the  
14 types above  
24P  
24P  
24P  
1/48  
1/48  
1/48  
3.0 -  
2
2
350.0 deg  
(In 0.5 deg  
steps)  
Angle not  
displayed  
1080-24PsF  
720-60P  
1/24.7 - 1/2880  
1/24.7 - 1/2880  
1/24.0 - 1/250  
1/24.0 - 1/250  
2
2
1/F* - 1/2880  
1/F* - 1/250  
50i  
1/50, 1/60,  
1/100  
1/50  
1/51.4 - 1/6000  
1/25.7 - 1/3000  
1/51.4 - 1/6000  
1/50.2 - 1/250  
1/25.2 - 1/250  
1/50.2 - 1/250  
1080-50i  
1/120, 1/250,  
1/500, 1/1000,  
1/2000, HALF  
25P  
50P  
1/100  
2
2
1/F* - 1/6000  
1/F* - 1/250  
180 deg, 172.8 deg,  
144.0 deg, 120.0 deg,  
90.0 deg, 45.0 deg  
720-50P  
1/25.7 - 1/3000  
1/F* - 1/3000  
1/25.2 - 1/250  
1/F* - 1/250  
25P  
1/50  
2
2
Select from the  
14 types above  
*1 Not displayed in 720P mode. Corresponds to REC FORMAT option.  
*2 The “F” of “1/F” is the frequency corresponding to the frame rate when using the VFR function. For example, when the VFR function is  
used with a frame rate frequency is 15, the variable range of the SYNCHRO SCAN is at 1/15 or more.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting the Electronic Shutter  
53  
 
Setting the Shutter Mode and Speed  
The shutter speed in any shutter mode is set using the  
SHUTTER switch.  
2
Once more, press the SHUTTER switch towards [SEL].  
Repeat this switchover until the desired mode or speed  
appears in the viewfinder screen.  
If all modes and speeds are available, the display  
changes in the following order:  
In SYNCHRO SCAN/SYNCHRO SCAN2 mode, shutter  
speed can be switched easily, using the SYNCHRO SCAN  
adjustment buttons (+/–) on the side panel.  
Note that the range of selectable shutter speeds may be pre-  
defined; whether or not to use the SYNCHRO SCAN mode  
may be determined through the <SHUTTER SPEED> and  
<SHUTTER SELECT> screens. These screens are found in  
the CAM OPERATION page.  
POSITION1  
POSITION2  
POSITION3  
POSITION4  
POSITION5  
POSITION6  
SYNCHRO SCAN2  
mode  
SYNCHRO SCAN  
mode  
The selected shutter speed is retained even if the unit is  
turned off.  
  
Viewfinder displays relating to the shutter  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
See [Viewfinder Screen Status Displays] (page 74).  
Note  
When recording using VFR, set the shutter speed to 1/60 or  
1/100 to allow the recording to continue without any change  
in brightness when the frame rate is changed mid-way  
through recording.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
1
Press the SHUTTER switch, positioned at [ON], towards  
[SEL].  
a
a. SHUTTER switch  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting the Electronic Shutter  
54  
Placing the Unit in SYNCHRO SCAN Mode  
To place the unit in SYNCHRO SCAN mode, follow the steps  
below.  
1
2
Press the SHUTTER switch positioned at [ON] towards  
[SEL], to place the unit in SYNCHRO SCAN mode or  
SYNCHRO SCAN2 mode.  
In the SYNCHRO SCAN mode, it is possible to change  
the shutter speed continuously by operating the  
SYNCHRO SCAN (+/–) adjustment buttons.  
a
b
a. SYNCHRO SCAN adjustment buttons (+/–)  
b. SHUTTER switch  
3
In SYNCHRO SCAN mode, the shutter speed display  
can be switched between seconds and degrees.  
For more details, refer to [SYNCHRO SCAN DISP.]  
(page 179).  
In SYNCHRO SCAN2 mode, the shutter speed can  
only be displayed in seconds.  
When the frame rate is low, pressing the SYNCHRO  
SCAN adjustment buttons (+/–) to change the shutter  
speed only gives a small change in the time, and  
consequently the shutter value in the viewfinder  
display may remain unchanged.  
Note  
When the VFR function is enabled, the variable ranges in  
the SYNCHRO SCAN mode differs from those seen when  
the VFR function is disabled.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting the Electronic Shutter  
55  
Assigning Functions to User Buttons  
The USER MAIN, USER 1, USER 2, MARKER SELECT and  
TEXT MEMO buttons can be assigned user-selected  
functions.  
To select desired functions, use the menu options which can  
be found in the <USER SW> screen on the CAM  
OPERATION page.  
differences in color development when the DRS  
function is turned on/off.  
When the DRS function is turned on, Gamma mode,  
the Knee function and the BLACK GAMMA function  
are not available.  
ASSIST:  
The function to turn on or off of the focus  
assist indication is assigned.  
  
  
  
  
Note  
When the ASSIST function is turned on, a graph is  
displayed on the bottom right of the viewfinder and the  
LCD monitor. Adjust the focus ring on the lens so that  
the graph comes further right.  
  
  
  
  
  
C.TEMP:  
The function to switch to the mode that allows  
the jog dial button to change the assigned  
color temperature. It is useful for intentionally  
changing the color temperature after adjusting  
the white balance.  
Selectable Functions  
To change the color temperature, press the  
user button with this assigned function, and  
then press the jog dial button.  
For more details about functions which can be allocated to  
the buttons, refer to [USER SW] (page 186).  
The color temperature indicated on the  
viewfinder display is highlighted and starts  
blinking, indicating that the color temperature  
blinking, the jog dial button can be turned to  
change the color temperature. At this time, the  
value set for the position ([PRST], [A], or [B])  
to which the WHITE BAL switch is set is also  
changed.  
The function of switching the VFR function on/  
off is assigned. For more details about the  
VFR function, refer to [Variable Frame Rate  
(VFR) Recording Function] (page 37).  
When “ON” has been selected in the VFR  
menu option, a function of switching to the  
frame rate set in USR SW F.RATE is  
assigned.  
For example, if you have set FRAME RATE to  
“24P” and USR SW F.RATE to “12P” for the  
VFR function, you can use this button to  
switch between 12P and 24P when the VFR  
function is enabled. FRAME RATE and USR  
SW F.RATE can be set from the <SYSTEM  
MODE> screen of the SYSTEM SETTING  
page.  
When “FILM-REC” has been selected in the  
GAMMA MODE SEL menu option, telecine  
conversion correction is performed on the  
viewfinder video. GAMMA MODE SEL can be  
set from the <GAMMA> screen of the PAINT  
page.  
INH:  
I.OVR:  
No function assigned.  
Iris Override function assigned.  
The target (reference) value in Auto Iris mode  
must be changed.  
To change the target value, put the unit into  
this mode and press the jog dial button. Turn  
the jog dial button clockwise or anti-clockwise  
to change the value. The iris indication section  
of the viewfinder screen displays “+”, “+ +”,  
“–”, or “– –”.  
When the desired value is displayed, stop  
turning the jog dial button. Then, press the  
dial button to accept that value.  
VFR:  
FRATE:  
+:  
+ +:  
–:  
Iris opens up by 0.5.  
Iris opens up by 1.  
Iris closes down by 0.5.  
Iris closes down by 1.  
– –:  
No indication:  
The reference value is used.  
Super Black function assigned.  
This function lowers the black level to the  
pedestal level or below.  
S.BLK:  
B.GAMMA: The black gamma function is allocated. This  
function highlights the black gradations.  
BLACK GAMMA is set to “+6”, and B.GAMMA  
RANGE is set to “3”, regardless of the values  
set in the BLACK GAMMA item on the menu  
(<LOW SETTING> screen, <MID SETTING>  
screen and <HIGH SETTING> screen on the  
PAINT page).  
VF GAM:  
Y GET:  
Function of indicating the brightness level of  
the center marker assigned.  
DRS:  
The function of the dynamic range stretcher is  
allocated.  
The function is allocated to compress the  
video level with high brightness and stretched  
the dynamic range.  
Notes  
Since the DRS function compresses the video levels  
of sections with high brightness, there are slight  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Assigning Functions to User Buttons  
56  
       
AUDIO CH1: Function of switching the input signal source  
for audio channel 1 assigned.  
Pressing the button switches the input signal  
in the following order: FRONT W.L. ꢀ  
REAR. Note that the AUDIO IN switch can  
also be used to change the input signal: later  
specification takes precedence.  
AUDIO CH2: Function of switching the input signal source  
for audio channel 2 assigned.  
Pressing the button switches the input signal  
in the following order: FRONT W.L. ꢀ  
REAR. Note that the AUDIO IN switch can  
also be used to change the input signal: later  
specification takes precedence.  
REC SW:  
RET SW:  
PRE REC:  
Function of the REC START/STOP button  
assigned.  
Function of the RET button at the lens  
assigned.  
PRE RECORDING switch on/switch off  
function assigned.  
SLOT SEL: Function of switching the target P2 card  
among multiple cards assigned. Not available  
when recording with the VFR function is “ON”.  
PC MODE: The function to turn on or off the assigned  
Switching between the USB device and USB  
host modes is set by selecting the PC MODE  
SELECT menu option in the <SYSTEM  
MODE> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING  
page.  
TEXT MEMO:Function of switching the text memo function  
on/off is assigned. For more details about the  
text memo function, refer to [Text Memo  
Function] (page 44). This switching function  
can only be assigned to the TEXT MEMO  
button.  
VF MARK: Function to select A, B or OFF as the marker  
for recording in the viewfinder. The A or B  
marker type is set using the <VF MARKER>  
screen of the VF page. This switching function  
can only be assigned to the MARKER  
SELECT button.  
Notes  
When the remote controller, AJ-RC10G (optional), is  
connected and I.OVR or C.TEMP is assigned to the user  
button on the side of the AJ-RC10G, operation of the jog  
dial button on the main unit is disabled.  
The following functions are turned off when the power of  
the main unit is switched off.  
I.OVR/S.BLK/B GAMMA/Y GET/DRS/ASSIST/C.TEMP/  
VF GAM  
With regard to C.TEMP, note that the changes in color  
temperature will be stored.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Assigning Functions to User Buttons  
57  
Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting  
Recording Levels  
This unit is capable of recording 4 independent audio channels in all recording formats except for native recording with VFR.  
When the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch is positioned at [AUTO], the recording levels for audio channels 1 and 2 are  
automatically adjusted. To manually adjust the recording levels, position the switch at [MAN]. Note that the recording levels for  
audio channels 3 and 4 are selected through a menu option.  
Note  
4-channel sound is recorded on P2 cards.  
Selecting Audio Input Signals  
The input signals to be recorded on audio channels 1, 2, 3,  
Specific audio settings are performed through the <MIC/  
and 4 are selected with the AUDIO IN switch. For more  
AUDIO1> and <MIC/AUDIO2> screens on the MAIN  
information, see [Audio (input) Function Section] (page 16).  
OPERATION page.  
For more information, see [MAIN OPERATION] (page 189).  
f
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
a
b
c
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
e
d
a. Display window  
b. MONITOR CH1/3 / ST / CH2/4 selector switch  
c. MONITOR SELECT CH1/2 / CH3/4 selector switch  
d. AUDIO IN switch (CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4)  
e. AUDIO LEVEL CH1/CH2 controls  
f. AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch  
Notes  
Four-channel-recorded audio signals are SDI-output as  
they are.  
When using VFR with native recording, audio cannot be  
recorded or output.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels  
58  
 
Adjusting Recording Levels  
To adjust the recording levels for audio channels 1 and 2,  
follow the steps below.  
Audio level meter on the display window  
OVER  
SLAVE HOLD HD GPS  
NDF  
0
1
Position the MONITOR SELECT CH1/2 / CH3/4-  
selector switch at [CH1/2] so that the audio level meter  
on the display window will provide CH1 and CH2  
indications. Ensure that the channel indications  
displayed in the window are “1” and “2”.  
Whether to enable or disable the FRONT AUDIO  
LEVEL control must be preset through menu options  
FRONT VR CH1 and FRONT VR CH2. Note that this  
control is factory-disabled.  
CTL VTCG TIMEDATE P-iREC  
10  
20  
30  
h
Y
minM  
s
D
frm  
E
E
F
F
MEDIA  
BATT  
40  
OO  
-dB  
LOOP  
OP-SLOT  
1
2
The menu options are found in the <MIC/AUDIO1>  
screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.  
Audio level meter in the viewfinder  
F
:
:
1 -  
2 -  
-
-
-
-
-
-
2
3
Position the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch at [MAN].  
R
-
-
-
+
While checking the audio channel level meter in the  
display window or the audio level meter in the  
viewfinder, adjust the AUDIO LEVEL CH1/CH2 control.  
Note that if the level exceeds the top bar (0 dB), the  
word “OVER” illuminates to show that the input level is  
excessive. The adjustment made in such a way that the  
maximum level will not reach the 0 dB bar.  
When operating the unit without a sound recordist, it is  
recommended that the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control  
should be used to adjust the audio level.  
Preset the channel to be adjusted, and use the FRONT  
AUDIO LEVEL control to adjust the audio level while  
checking the audio level meter in the viewfinder to ensure  
that the level does not become excessive.  
Selecting Function for the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL Control  
This function enables the recording level to be adjusted  
using the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control.  
  
To select this function, perform menu operations to open the  
<MIC/AUDIO1> screen from the MAIN OPERATION page,  
and set whether to enable or disable the FRONT AUDIO  
LEVEL controls for the system selected as the input signals  
using the FRONT VR CH1 and FRONT VR CH2 items.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
CH3 and CH4 Recording Levels  
The following table shows the effects on the recording level  
for audio channels 3 and 4 that depend on the settings and  
input levels specified through the menu options AUTO  
LEVEL CH3 and AUTO LEVEL CH4. Note that the recording  
level cannot be adjusted manually.  
These options are found in the <MIC/AUDIO1> screen on  
the MAIN OPERATION page.  
Input level  
AUTO LEVEL  
CH3/CH4  
LINE  
AGC ON  
AGC/LIMITER OFF  
MIC  
ON  
AGC ON  
LIMITER ON  
OFF  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels  
59  
 
Setting Time Data  
The unit supports time codes, user bits, date, and time (real time) data, which are recorded as data for the sub-code area,  
VIDEO AUX area, and clip metadata files. It also includes a CTL counter and camera ID.  
Description of time data  
Time code  
CTL counter  
The TCG switch can be used to switch between Rec run and  
Free run.  
The CTL counter will measure total recording time after  
resetting in the recording operation. At playback, CTL is  
counted from the start of the first clip that can be played  
back. This can be used to find the current playback position.  
Free run:  
The time code always advances even when  
the power is turned off. It can be handled as  
time. It can be slaved to the time code input  
through the TC IN connector.  
Camera ID  
Rec run:  
The time code is recorded as sequential  
values regenerated as the time code for a clip  
recorded on a P2 card.  
The camera ID can be set with 10 characters 3 lines,  
which can be superimposed on the color bar video. It can be  
also superimposed along with date and time data.  
Note  
When using VFR, native recording is limited to Rec run. Free  
run operation is not possible.  
User bits  
The unit separately includes 2 types of user bits: one (UB) is  
recorded in the sub-code area and the other (VITC UB) in  
the VIDEO AUX area.  
Each user bits can be recorded as any of the following: a  
user defined value, time, date, same value as the time code,  
frame rate information for camera shooting, externally input  
value (through the TC IN or DVCPRO connector), and value  
regenerated as the user bits recorded in a clip on a P2 card.  
The unit includes only one user defined value. If user  
defined values are selected for both the UB and VITC UB,  
then the same value is used.  
Types of UB can be selected in UB MODE and types of  
VITC UB can be selected in VITC UB MODE, respectively.  
However, in the following cases, at least one of UB and VITC  
UB is always frame rate information in order to support  
editors (PC software of the like) which make use of  
information about the frame rate employed at shooting.  
In 720P mode, both the UB and VITC UB are always  
frame rate information.  
For recording 24P/24PA in 1080i mode, VITC UB is fixed  
to frame rate information.  
In Native mode, VITC UB is fixed to frame rate  
information.  
Date and time (real time)  
The built-in clock maintains the date and time. When the  
GPS unit AJ-GPS910G is installed, the built-in clock is  
corrected with accurate date and time information from the  
GPS.  
The built-in clock is used not only to keep track of the Free  
run time code when the power is switched off and to provide  
time and date data for the user bits, but also as a time  
reference when generating files during clip recording and to  
determine the arrangement and playback order of  
thumbnails.  
It is also used to generate clip metadata and UMIDs (Unique  
Material Identifiers) in the VIDEO AUX area.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data  
60  
 
Recording time code and user bits  
The following shows recording time codes and user bits for different input signal formats, and SYSTEM MODE and CAMERA  
MODE settings.  
System setting  
Time code (TC) operation  
No. of frames of  
User bit (UB) operation  
Sub-codes and  
VIDEO AUX area  
TC  
UB in VIDEO  
SYSTEM  
MODE  
CAMERA Recording frame VFR FRAME  
MODE  
TC during  
No. of frames of No. of frames of the UB in sub-code  
REC FORMAT  
AUX area (VITC  
UB)  
mode*7  
RATE  
recording and the output TC  
presetting  
displayed TC  
area  
60i  
60i  
As per the TC  
MODE*2  
30P  
24P  
30P (Over 60i) 2:3  
As per the VITC  
UB MODE  
24P (Over 60i)  
2:3:3:2  
DVCPROHD/60i  
As per the UB  
MODE*4  
Always non-drop  
frame*3  
24P (Over 60i)  
2:3:3:2  
30  
30/24 switchable  
24PA  
60i  
1080-  
59.94i  
30  
AVC-I 100/60i  
AVC-I 50/60i  
Always frame rate  
information*1  
60i  
As per the TC  
MODE*2  
AVC-I 100/30PN  
AVC-I 50/30PN  
30P  
30PN (Native)  
As per the UB  
MODE*4*6  
Always frame rate  
information*5  
Recording: 24 fixed  
Playback:  
30/24 switchable  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
AVC-I 50/24PN  
VFR cannot be Always non-drop  
used  
24P  
24PN (Native)  
24  
frame*3  
1080-  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
Always non-drop  
frame*3  
HD SDI A · B: 24 Recording/Playback: As per the UB  
Otherwise: 30 24  
MODE*4  
Always frame rate  
information*5  
24P  
24P  
24PN (Native)  
24PN (Native)  
24  
24  
23.98PsF AVC-I 50/24PN  
1080-  
24PsF  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
AVC-I 50/24PN  
Always non-drop  
frame*3  
HD SDI A · B: 24 Recording/Playback: As per the UB  
Always frame rate  
information*5  
Otherwise: 30  
24  
MODE*4  
60i  
50i  
DVCPROHD/50i  
25P  
25P (Over 50i)  
As per the VITC  
UB MODE  
As per the UB  
MODE*4  
AVC-I 100/50i  
AVC-I 50/50i  
1080-50i  
–*2  
25  
25  
25  
50i  
50i  
AVC-I 100/25PN  
AVC-I 50/25PN  
Always frame rate  
information*5  
25P  
60P  
25PN (Native)  
60P  
VFR: OFF  
VFR: ON  
Any frame rate  
except  
As per the TC  
MODE*2  
DVCPROHD/60P  
AVC-I 100/60P  
AVC-I 50/60P  
1-60P  
24P  
ꢅꢅP (Over 60P)  
Always frame rate Always frame rate  
information*1 information*1  
24FRAME  
VFR: ON  
24FRAME  
Always non-drop  
frame*3  
30  
30/24 switchable  
24P (Over 60P)  
720-  
59.94P  
As per the TC  
MODE*2  
VFR: OFF  
30  
DVCPROHD/30PN  
AVC-I 100/30PN  
AVC-I 50/30PN  
30P  
24P  
30PN (Native)  
24PN (Native)  
VFR: ON  
1-60FRAME  
Always Rec run  
Always frame rate Always frame rate  
information*1*6 information*5  
Always non-drop  
frame*3  
VFR: OFF  
DVCPROHD/24PN  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
AVC-I 50/24PN  
Recording: 24 fixed  
Playback:  
24  
24  
Always non-drop  
frame  
Always Rec run  
VFR: ON  
1-60FRAME  
30/24 switchable  
Always non-drop  
frame*3  
VFR: OFF  
DVCPROHD/24PN  
Recording: 24 fixed  
Playback:  
30/24 switchable  
Always frame rate Always frame rate  
information*1*6 information*5  
720-60P AVC-I 100/24PN  
AVC-I 50/24PN  
24P  
24PN (Native)  
30  
25  
Always non-drop  
frame  
Always Rec run  
VFR: ON  
1-60FRAME  
50P  
50P  
VFR: OFF  
DVCPROHD/50P  
AVC-I 100/50P  
AVC-I 50/50P  
Always frame rate Always frame rate  
information*1 information*1  
–*2  
VFR: ON  
1-50FRAME  
1-50P  
25P  
ꢅꢅP (Over 50P)  
720-50P  
25  
25  
VFR: OFF  
–*2  
DVCPROHD/25PN  
Always frame rate Always frame rate  
information*1*6 information*5  
AVC-I 100/25PN  
AVC-I 50/25PN  
25PN (Native)  
VFR: ON  
1-50FRAME  
1-50P  
Always Rec run  
*1 If the menu option FRAME RATE UB on the <OPTION> screen is set to “MENU”, then recording is performed as per the UB MODE or  
VITC UB MODE. Note that, with this setting, information required by editors (PC editing software) is not recorded.  
*2 For Free run, the time code is slaved to the time code input through the TC IN connector.  
*3 For Free run, the time code is slaved to the time code input through the TC IN connector if it is a non-drop frame.  
*4 When the menu option UB MODE is set to “EXT”, then the bits are slaved to the user bits input through the TC IN connector.  
*5 Regardless of the menu settings, frame rate information is always recorded. During playback, the information is output after being  
converted into pull-down frame rate information.  
*6 When the menu option UB MODE is set to “FRM RATE”, the pull-down frame rate information read out from the UB in the VAUX area is  
output during playback.  
*7 For details on this item, refer to [Recording formats and output connector signal formats] (page 47).  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data  
61  
 
Setting of the user bits  
The user bits (UB) to be recorded in the sub-code area are  
selected through the menu option UB MODE. The user bits  
(VITC UB) to be recorded in the VIDEO AUX area are  
selected through the menu option VITC UB MODE.  
Inputting a user value  
a
USER (UB MODE only)  
b
The included user value is recorded. A user value is  
input through the display window. For more information  
about how to input a user value, see [Inputting a user  
value] (page 62). The recorded user value is retained  
even if the power is turned off.  
c
TIME  
The time kept by the built-in clock is recorded.  
DATE  
The hour digits for date and time kept by the built-in  
clock are recorded.  
The user bits value input through the TC IN connector is  
recorded.  
The included user’s value will also be this input value.  
TCG  
The time code value is recorded.  
FRM RATE  
The frame rate information for camera shooting is  
recorded. For more information, see [Frame rate  
information recorded in user bits] (page 63).  
REGEN  
d
e
a. HOLD switch  
b. DISPLAY switch  
c. Display window  
d. TCG switch  
e. Cursor and SET buttons  
The user bits last recorded on the current target P2 card  
is read and recorded as is.  
1
2
Position the DISPLAY switch at [UB].  
Position the TCG switch at [SET].  
When the left digit starts blinking you can change the  
value.  
USER/EXT (VITC UB MODE only)  
The included user’s value is recorded as the user bits  
for the VIDEO AUX area. It is the same value as the  
user bits indicated when the option UB MODE is set to  
“USER” or “EXT”.  
3
Use cursor buttons to set the user bits.  
Z button:  
Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the right.  
Y button:  
Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the left.  
U button:  
Advances the blinking number by one digit.  
V button:  
Winds back the blinking number by one digit.  
4
5
Position the TCG switch at [F-RUN] or [R-RUN].  
Go to the <TC/UB> screen from the MAIN OPERATION  
page, and set the menu option UB MODE to “USER”.  
Notes  
When the TCG switch is positioned at [SET], thumbnails  
cannot be manipulated.  
To confirm VITC UB, press the HOLD switch to display  
VTCG on the display window.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data  
62  
   
For 1080i  
Retaining the user bits  
Frame rate: 24P Over 60i (2:3)  
The data set for the user bits are automatically saved and  
retained even if the unit is turned off.  
Starting field for the updated frame  
Time code frame digit  
• • •  
• • •  
• • •  
• • •  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
Frame rate information recorded in user bits  
Image  
If video information to be recorded based on the frame rate  
set through the menu option FRAME RATE or CAMERA  
MODE is recorded in the user bits, it can be edited with  
editing tools (e.g. PC editing software). In 1080i mode, the  
frame rate information for the user bits recorded in the  
VIDEO AUX area are used. In 720P mode, the video  
information is also recorded in the sub-code area because  
the frame rate information for the user bits recorded in the  
sub-code area is also used.  
Ao Ae Bo Be BoCeCoDeDoDeAo Ae Bo Be  
CoDeDoDeAo Ae Bo Be BoCeCoDeDoDe  
Sequence No.  
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
Updated frame information  
10  
10  
01  
01  
00  
10  
10  
01  
00  
10  
10  
01  
01  
00  
Frame rate: 24PA Over 60i (2:3:3:2)  
Time code frame digit  
• • •  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
Image  
Frame rate information  
• • •  
• • •  
• • •  
Ao Ae Bo Be BoCeCoCeDoDeAo Ae Bo Be  
CoCeDoDe Ao Ae Bo Be BoCeCoCeDoDe  
Sequence No.  
The frame rate and video pull-down menu are linked to the  
time code and user bits as follows:  
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
Updated frame information  
10  
10  
01  
00  
10  
10  
10  
00  
10  
10  
10  
01  
00  
10  
  
Frame rate: 30P Over 60i (2:2)  
25P Over 50i (2:2)  
a
b c  
d
e f  
Time code frame digit  
a. Checking information for the 6 digits at right.  
b. Fixed value  
• • •  
00  
01  
02  
c. Sequence No.  
Image  
0 to 4:  
24P, 24PA  
• • •  
Ao Ae Bo Be CoCe  
Fixed at F:  
d. Frame rate  
e. Camera shooting mode  
In all other modes  
Updated frame information  
• • •  
10  
10  
10  
SYSTEM  
CAMERA  
MODE  
At  
At  
REC FORMAT  
MODE  
VFR  
recording  
playback  
DVCPROHD/60i  
AVC-I 100/60i  
60i  
0
0
30P  
24P  
24PA  
30P  
24P  
24P  
24P  
50i  
8
8
8
8
DVCPROHD/60i  
1080-59.94i  
C
8
C
8
AVC-I 100/30PN  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
Not  
applicable  
C
C
E
2
8
1080-23.98PsF AVC-I 100/24PN  
8
1080-24PsF  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
A
2
DVCPROHD/50i  
AVC-I 100/50i  
1080-50i  
25P  
25P  
A
A
A
A
AVC-I 100/25PN  
f. Media management information  
Updated frame/Effective frame information  
REC START/STOP mark  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data  
63  
   
For 720P  
Notes  
During playback of clips recorded in native recording  
frame rate information of user bits is converted according  
to the image pull down and then output.  
Frame rate: 24P Over 60P (2:3)  
Starting field for the updated frame  
Time code frame digit  
Example:  
Recording  
• • •  
• • •  
• • •  
• • •  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
Image  
  
A
A
B
B
B
C
C
D
D
D
A
A
B
B
C
D
D
D
A
A
B
B
B
C
C
D
D
D
Sequence No.  
Playback  
10  
10  
01  
01  
00  
10  
10  
10  
01  
01  
00  
00  
10  
10  
10  
10  
01  
01  
01  
01  
00  
00  
  
Updated frame information  
10  
10  
01  
01  
00  
10  
# indicates sequence Nos. 0 to 4.  
When the VFR function is on and the CAMERA MODE  
menu option is set to any of “24P”, “25P”, or “30P”, the  
indication of camera recording mode is the same as the  
indication used when no CAMERA MODE menu option  
has been set.  
Frame rate: 30P Over 60P (2:2)  
25P Over 50P (2:2)  
Time code frame digit  
• • •  
00  
01  
02  
Image  
• • •  
A
A
B
B
C
C
Updated frame information  
• • •  
10  
10  
10  
The frame rate information of user bits in native recording is  
as follows.  
  
a
b
c
e
d
a. Verification information for the 6 digits to the right  
b. Fixed value  
c. Frame rate  
d. Camera recording mode  
SYSTEM  
MODE  
At  
At  
playback  
REC FORMAT  
VFR  
CAMERA MODE  
recording  
OFF  
ON  
Not set (60P)  
1-60FRAME  
Not set (30P)  
1-60FRAME  
Not set (24P)  
1-60FRAME  
Not set (24P)  
1-60FRAME  
Not set (50P)  
1-50FRAME  
Not set (25P)  
1-50FRAME  
8
9
8
9
DVCPROHD/60P  
AVC-I 100/60P  
OFF  
ON  
8
8
DVCPROHD/30PN  
AVC-I 100/30PN  
720-59.94P  
9
9
OFF  
ON  
C
D
E
F
A
B
A
B
8
DVCPROHD/24PN  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
9
OFF  
ON  
A
B
A
B
A
B
DVCPROHD/24PN  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
720-60P  
720-50P  
OFF  
ON  
DVCPROHD/50P  
AVC-I 100/50P  
OFF  
ON  
DVCPROHD/24PN  
AVC-I 100/25PN  
e. Media management information  
REC START/STOP mark  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data  
64  
Setting the Internal Clock’s Date and Time  
1
2
Position the DISPLAY switch at [UB].  
Time  
difference  
Time  
difference  
Area  
Area  
Press the HOLD button to display DATE in the display  
window.  
00:00 Greenwich  
–12:00 Kwajalein  
–11:30  
+00:30  
+01:00 Central Europe  
+01:30  
–11:00 Midway Island  
–10:30  
3
4
Position the TCG switch at [SET].  
+02:00 Eastern Europe  
+02:30  
–10:00 Hawaii  
–09:30 Marquesas Islands  
–09:00 Alaska  
–08:30  
Use the cursor and SET buttons to set the year, month  
and day (Y/M/D).  
Note that any later than 2030 cannot be set.  
+03:00 Moscow  
+03:30 Tehran  
+04:00 Abu Dhabi  
+04:30 Kabul  
Z button:  
Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the right.  
Y button:  
Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the left.  
U button:  
Advances the blinking number by one digit.  
V button:  
–08:00 Los Angeles  
–07:30  
+05:00 Islamabad  
+05:30 Bombay  
+06:00 Dacca  
–07:00 Denver  
–06:30  
–06:00 Chicago  
–05:30  
Winds back the blinking number by one digit.  
+06:30 Yangon  
+07:00 Bangkok  
+07:30  
–05:00 New York  
–04:30  
5
6
7
Press the HOLD button to display TIME in the display  
window.  
+08:00 Beijing  
+08:30  
–04:00 Halifax  
–03:30 Newfoundland Island  
–03:00 Buenos Aires  
–02:30  
Use the cursor buttons to set the hour, minute and  
second (h/min/s).  
+09:00 Tokyo  
+09:30 Darwin  
+10:00 Guam  
Position the TCG switch at [F-RUN] or [R-RUN]. The  
internal clock starts at the moment the switch position is  
changed.  
–02:00 Mid-Atlantic  
–01:30  
+10:30 Lord Howe Island  
+11:00 Solomon Islands  
+11:30 Norfolk Island  
+12:00 New Zealand  
+12:45 Chatham Islands  
+13:00  
–01:00 Azores Islands  
–00:30  
8
9
Press the HOLD button to display a time zone (time  
difference between local time and Greenwich Mean  
Time) in the display window.  
Position the TCG switch at [SET].  
10 Use the U and V buttons to set the desired hours and  
minutes ahead of (no sign) or behind (– sign) the  
Greenwich Mean Time.  
Notes  
In step 4, if the TCG switch is positioned at [F-RUN] or [R-  
RUN], this also activate the internal clock.  
To cancel date, time and time zone settings in process,  
hold down the SET button and position the TCG switch at  
[F-RUN] or [R-RUN].  
Clock accuracy fluctuates between about ±30 seconds per  
month when the power is turned off. If more accurate  
timekeeping is required, check the time when the power is  
turned on and, if necessary, reset the clock.  
Example: If the local time is 5 hours behind Greenwich  
Mean Time, set the time zone to “5:00 –”.  
The time zone is always recorded, together with the  
date and time, as metadata.  
See the table at right to set the time zone according to  
your local time.  
When the GPS unit AJ-GPS910G is installed, and if it  
successfully receives time information, the internal clock  
keeps accurate (local) time based on the received time  
(Greenwich Mean Time) and the time zone. If the date and  
time differ from the actual local time, the time zone may  
not be set correctly. Check again, to see if the time zone is  
set correctly. (The date and time need not be set again.)  
The built-in clock operates for several years on a lithium  
battery built into the unit. When the lithium battery is  
exhausted, the viewfinder indicates the message  
“BACKUP BATT EMPTY” when the power is turned on.  
For more information, see [Maintenance] (page 150).  
11 Position the TCG switch at [F-RUN] or [R-RUN] to  
accept the time zone.  
Notes  
When using the unit for the first time, be sure to perform  
this setting beforehand. Do not change the setting during  
use of the unit.  
When the TCG switch is positioned at [SET], thumbnails  
cannot be manipulated.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data  
65  
 
Setting the Time Code  
1
2
3
Position the DISPLAY switch at [TC].  
Position the TCG switch at [SET].  
Regeneration function using REC REVIEW  
If the menu option FIRST REC TC is set to “PRESET”, if the  
time code has been set or reset, or if the time code has been  
switched from Free run to Rec run, it is possible to  
regenerate the time code as the last time code of a clip  
recorded on the P2 card.  
This action requires you to preset the RET SW menu option  
on the <SW MODE> screen to “R.REVIEW” and the REC  
REVIEW REGEN menu option on the <TC/UB> screen to  
“ON”.  
Set the menu option TC MODE to “DF” or “NDF”. “DF”  
steps the time code in drop frame mode, and “NDF”  
steps it in non-drop frame mode. However, the camera  
always operates in “NDF” for 24P, 24PA and 24PN  
(Native) modes.  
The menu option TC MODE can be found in the <TC/  
UB> screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.  
Note  
1
2
3
Make sure the P2 card to record the data. To regenerate  
the time code of the last recorded clip when more than  
one P2 card is inserted, press the THUMBNAIL button  
to open the thumbnail screen.  
Switching between “DF” and “NDF” is operative only  
when the system frequency of the unit is set to  
59.94 Hz.  
4
5
Use the cursor buttons to set the time code.  
The time code setting range extends from 00:00:00:00  
to 23:59:59:29 (59.94 Hz), 23:59:59:23 (24PN) or to  
23:59:59:24 (50 Hz).  
Check the P2 card which recorded the last clip  
displayed on the screen, and then switch the slot with  
the user button assigned the SLOT SEL function so that  
data will be recorded on the P2 card.  
Z button:  
Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the right.  
Y button:  
Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the left.  
U button:  
Advances the blinking number by one digit.  
V button:  
Press the RET button on the lens. The message “TC  
REGEN” is displayed in the viewfinder. During the next  
recording, the time code of the last recorded clip on the  
card will be regenerated.  
Winds back the blinking number by one digit.  
Notes  
Change the position of the TCG switch.  
[F-RUN] steps the time code in Free run mode, and [R-  
RUN] set it in Rec run mode.  
When a card with recorded data is changed, the time code  
of the last recorded clip on the changed P2 card will be  
regenerated.  
This function is disabled during recording or Free run.  
Notes  
When the unit is in the 24P or 24PA mode, time code  
settings are adjusted to the 5-frame unit. For 24PN  
(Native) mode, it is adjusted for counting by the 4-  
frame unit. For 30PN (Native) of 720P, it is adjusted to  
even numbers. In the 25PN (Native) mode of 720P,  
[Sec+Frame] is adjusted to even numbers. The time  
code cannot be set when recording in the 24P, 24PA,  
and 24PN (Native) formats.  
Time code function during battery replacement  
Even during battery replacement, the backup mechanism  
functions, allowing the unit to operate continuously.  
If SYSTEM MODE is changed, a free-run time code may  
shift. After turning on the power again, confirm the time code  
and reset if necessary.  
When the TCG switch is positioned at [SET],  
thumbnails cannot be manipulated.  
Note  
When the POWER switch has been switched [ON] [OFF]  
[ON], the backup accuracy of the time code in Free run  
mode is about ±2 frames.  
Regeneration of Time Code  
When the TCG switch is positioned to [R-RUN], the time  
code recorded on the last frame of the last recorded clip  
(with the latest recording date) on the P2 card is read, and  
this time code can be used again.  
When the menu option FIRST REC TC is set to “REGEN”  
and a P2 card is removed or inserted or the target recording  
card is changed with the user button assigned the SLOT  
SEL function, the same time code is added to the last  
recorded clip on the target P2 card. When no clips have  
been recorded, recording starts from a value generated by a  
time code generator in the unit.  
The menu option FIRST REC TC can be found in the <TC/  
UB> screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data  
66  
 
Externally Locking the Time Code  
The unit’s internal time code generator can be locked to an  
external generator. In addition, the external time code  
generator can be locked to the unit’s internal generator.  
Note  
The system can be configured with multiple units by opening  
the <GENLOCK> screen from the SYSTEM SETTING page  
and setting the GL PHASE item to the connector using menu  
operations.  
Example of connections for external locking  
The phase of the time code can correspond to the VBS  
output signals of the MON OUT connector.  
As the figure shows, connect both the reference video signal  
and reference time code.  
However, the same value should commonly be set to the GL  
PHASE for all cameras. If different values coexist in the  
system, the shooting timing may not correspond to each  
other.  
Note that when the unit is in the 1080-23.98PsF or 1080-  
24PsF modes, it is not possible to lock the time code using  
the VBS connection with one unit as a reference unit in the  
manner shown in Example 2. When using these modes,  
connect the unit in the manner shown in Example 4 and  
Example 6.  
Example 1: When locking onto an external signal  
a
TC IN  
Reference video signal  
Setting of GL PHASE  
COMPOSIT  
GENLOCK IN  
MON OUT (VBS)  
b
Setting of GL PHASE  
a. Reference time code  
b. Reference video signal  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
For selecting the output signals that lock  
GL PHASE HD SDI  
Note  
COMPOSIT phases to the signals that are input in the  
GENLOCK IN connector.  
HD SDI:  
In place of the HD Y reference signal, composite video  
signals can be input as the reference video signal.  
For locking the HD SDI signals  
to the GENLOCK input.  
For the down converter output  
signals, the start position of the  
video delays by about 90 lines.  
COMPOSIT:  
Example 2: When connecting a multiple number of units  
and using one of them as the reference unit  
For locking the down converter  
output signals to the GENLOCK  
input.  
For the HD SDI output signals,  
the start position of the video  
gains by about 90 lines.  
Note, however, that in 1080-  
23.98PsF mode and 1080-  
24PsF mode, the phase is  
locked to HD SDI even if  
“COMPOSIT” has been  
selected.  
TC OUT  
Reference unit  
c
TC IN  
GENLOCK IN  
TC OUT  
c
TC IN  
GENLOCK IN  
c
TC OUT  
To the next camera  
c. MON OUT (VBS)  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data  
67  
 
As a result of processing to convert the video captured by  
the imaging devices from a progressive signal to an interlace  
signal, video signal delays will occur in the camera.  
Since time is required for making the 2:3 pull-down from the  
24P frame, there is a video signal delay in the camera.  
When recording from a device that can record images  
without a delay and the unit is connected in parallel, it is  
necessary to synchronize the time code. To set this timing,  
open the <TC/UB> screen from the MAIN OPERATION  
page and set it in the TC VIDEO SYNCHRO item.  
Set by referring to the connection example.  
Note  
In the 1080-23.98PsF or 1080-24PsF mode, set the  
23.98PsF or 24PsF HD signal as the reference signal and  
input a 24 frame time code to the TC IN input.  
If the VTR is capable of recording the HD SDI time code, it is  
possible to receive the time code output from the HD SDI A ·  
B output, and synchronously record video with the time  
code. In this case, it is not necessary to supply a time code  
output signal to the VTR.  
Example 4:  
When the unit and an external device are locked to the  
external time code generator and when several units of  
the camera are connected in a cascade configuration.  
Setting of the TC VIDEO SYNCHRO item  
Variable  
Item  
Remarks  
range  
TC VIDEO  
SYNCHRO  
0
1
2
3
For setting to correct the time code  
according to the delay of video signals.  
Reference video signal  
0:  
1:  
Do not correct.  
To delay the time code to be  
input according to the timing of  
the video images.  
External time code generator  
TCG  
2:  
3:  
To forward the time code to be  
output according to the timing of  
the video images.  
To delay the time code to be  
input and forward the time code  
to be output, respectively,  
according to the timing of the  
video images.  
TC OUT  
Device that records images without a  
delay  
TC IN  
DAT  
AJ-HPX2700  
Example 3: When the unit and an external device are  
locked to the external time code generator,  
which is connected externally, and when  
simultaneous recording is made by using the  
TC OUT output signals.  
1st unit and later  
Settings of the TC  
VIDEO SYNCHRO  
item: 3  
TC IN  
GENLOCK IN  
TC OUT  
Reference video signal  
AJ-HPX2700  
External time code generator  
2nd unit and later  
Settings of the TC  
VIDEO SYNCHRO  
item: 3  
TCG  
TC OUT  
Device that records images without a  
delay  
TC IN  
TC IN  
DAT  
GENLOCK IN  
TC OUT  
Settings of the TC  
VIDEO SYNCHRO  
item: 3  
AJ-HPX2700  
Settings of the TC VIDEO  
SYNCHRO item: 1  
TC IN  
AJ-HPX2700  
GENLOCK IN  
TC OUT  
TC IN  
GENLOCK IN  
TC OUT  
TC IN  
MON OUT  
or  
VTR etc.  
HD SDI A · B  
VIDEO IN  
HD SDI IN  
REF IN  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data  
68  
Example 5:  
When an external device is locked to the time code  
Example 6:  
When an external device is locked to the time code  
generator of the unit.  
generator of unit, which is connected in a cascade  
configuration.  
Reference video signal  
Reference video signal  
To be connected if necessary  
To be connected if necessary  
TCG  
TC OUT  
TCG  
TC OUT  
Settings of the TC VIDEO  
AJ-HPX2700 SYNCHRO item: 3  
AJ-HPX2700  
1st unit  
Settings of the TC  
VIDEO SYNCHRO  
item: 3  
TC IN  
TC IN  
GENLOCK IN  
TC OUT  
GENLOCK IN  
TC OUT  
A device that synchronizes with the TC  
IN input and capable to record without  
delay (DAT etc.)  
AJ-HPX2700  
From the 2nd unit to  
the (n–1)-th unit  
Settings of the TC  
VIDEO SYNCHRO  
item: 3  
TC IN  
DAT  
TC IN  
GENLOCK IN  
TC OUT  
AJ-HPX2700  
n-th unit  
Settings of the TC  
VIDEO SYNCHRO  
item: 3  
TC IN  
GENLOCK IN  
TC OUT  
A device that synchronizes with the TC IN  
input and capable to record without delay  
(such as DAT or a camera recorder)  
TC IN  
DAT  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data  
69  
To externally lock the time code  
Follow the steps below.  
Setting the user bits when the time code is  
externally locked  
When the TCG switch is positioned to [F-RUN], only the time  
code is locked to an external time code. To lock the user bits  
to an externally input value, the UB MODE and VITC UB  
MODE menu options must be set to “EXT” and “USER/EXT”,  
respectively.  
The menu option UB MODE and VITC UB MODE can be  
found in the <TC/UB> screen on the MAIN OPERATION  
page.  
1
2
3
4
Turn on the POWER switch.  
Position the TCG switch at [F-RUN].  
Position the DISPLAY switch at [TC].  
Set the menu option GENLOCK to “EXT”.  
This option can be found in the <GENLOCK> screen on  
the SYSTEM SETTING page.  
To unlock the externally locked time code  
Discontinue external time code supply, then position the  
TCG switch at [R-RUN].  
5
Supply a phase-relationship reference time code (that  
conforms to the time code requirements) and reference  
video signals to the TC IN and GENLOCK IN  
connectors, respectively.  
Cautions in switching the power source from  
battery to external power supply  
Now the built-in time code generator is locked with the  
reference time code.  
From about 10 seconds after locking the time code  
generator stays locked even if the supply of external  
reference time code is discontinued.  
Connect the DC IN socket with the external power supply  
before removing the battery pack, in order to keep the time  
code generator energized. If the battery pack is removed  
first, there is no guarantee that the time code will stay  
externally locked.  
Notes  
When the time code generator is externally locked, the  
time code instantly becomes locked with the external time  
code, and the counter displays the external time code  
value. Do not begin recording in the few seconds it takes  
for the synch generator to stabilize.  
Be sure to enter the non-drop-frame time code to  
externally lock the time code in the 24P, 24PA or 24PN  
(Native) mode. Externally locking the drop-frame time  
code is not permitted.  
Video quality may be degraded momentarily while  
externally locking to adjust the 5-frame cycle. This is not  
abnormal.  
While recording data in the 24P, 24PA, or Native modes, it  
is impossible to lock the time code externally. Lock it  
before recording.  
Note also that if the unit is used with PRE REC MODE set  
to “ON” in any of the 24P, 24PA or Native modes,  
changing the time code from Rec run to Free run or slave  
locking the time code before recording may result in a  
flickering video or a stopped code being recorded.  
In the 1080-23.98PsF mode, the 23.94 Hz non-drop frame  
time code should be supplied. In the 1080-24PsF mode,  
the 24 Hz non-drop frame time code should be supplied.  
External synchronization of the camera when the  
time code is externally locked  
When the time code is externally locked, the reference video  
signals input through the GENLOCK IN connector gen-lock  
the camera.  
Notes  
To externally lock the unit, as the master device, with more  
than one unit, the mode must be the same as that of the  
camera. Note that in a system using both interlaced and  
progressive scanning, there may be breaks in the video  
and time code.  
When using the MON OUT connector to output reference  
signals, position the OUTPUT SEL switch on the side  
panel at [CAM].  
Superimpose of time codes  
To display the time code in the viewfinder or the LCD monitor  
when recording or during playback, set TC in <VF  
INDICATOR3> to “TCG”, “TCR”, or “TCG/TCR”.  
To include the time code indication in the MON OUT or HD  
SDI A · B outputs, set the MON OUT CHARACTER switch to  
[ON], and set HD SDI A · B CHAR to “ON” from the  
<OUTPUT SEL> screen using the menu.  
To display the time code while the color bar is displayed, set  
TC ON COLOR BAR in <VF INDICATOR3> to “ON”.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data  
70  
Providing an ID to the Camera  
The camera ID is specified through the <CAMERA ID>  
screen.  
The ID can include up to 10 alphanumeric characters,  
symbols, and/or spaces.  
9
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
Notes  
When the menu option CAMERA ID is set to “BAR”,  
the camera ID is recorded together with color bar  
signals.This menu option is accessible from the <VF  
INDICATOR1> screen on the VF page.  
The ID POSITION menu option can be used to select  
a position where the camera ID is superimposed on  
the color bar. The ID POSITION option can be  
accessed through the <VF INDICATOR1> screen on  
the VF page.  
Note  
When the settings menu is displayed, outputting color bar  
signals does not indicate the camera ID.  
1
Go to the <CAMERA ID> screen from the CAM  
OPERATION page.  
  
When the TIME/DATE menu option is set to “ON”, the  
camera ID along with the date and time information  
are superimposed on the color bar. The TIME/DATE  
option can be accessed through the <VF  
  
  
  
INDICATOR1> screen on the VF page.  
2
3
4
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
options ID1: - ID3:.  
Press the jog dial button. The arrow (cursor) moves to  
the ID entry area, allowing you to enter an ID.  
Turn the jog dial button until a desired character  
appears. The characters that appear are switched in the  
following order:  
Space:  
Ð
Alphabetical characters:  
Ð
Numerals:  
Ð
Symbols:  
A to Z  
0 to 9  
', >, <, /, -  
5
6
Press the jog dial button to accept a desired character.  
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
next digit (clockwise), and repeat steps 4 - 5 to set  
characters.  
To change an input character, turn the jog dial button to  
move the arrow (cursor) to the appropriate character  
and carry out steps 4 and 5.  
7
8
When all the characters are set, turn the jog dial button  
to move the arrow (cursor) to : .  
Pressing the jog dial button brings the arrow (cursor)  
back to the options ID1: - ID3:.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data  
71  
Setting UMID Information  
The unit supports UMID metadata. You need to specify as  
UMID information the country where you live (using up to  
3 characters), organization or company (up to 4 characters)  
and user name (up to 4 characters). For the country name,  
you must use abbreviations prescribed in the ISO3166  
Country Code*.  
Here are some examples of the correct method for  
specifying a user name:  
*
Examples: China  
U.S.A.  
CHN  
USA  
CAN  
JPN  
Canada  
Japan  
  
  
  
  
  
  
1
2
3
4
Go to the <UMID SET/INFO> screen from the MAIN  
OPERATION page.  
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
option USER.  
Press the jog dial button. The arrow (cursor) moves to  
the user entry area, allowing you to enter a user name.  
Turn the jog dial button until a desired character  
appears. The characters appear in the following order:  
Space:  
Ð
Alphabetical characters:  
Ð
Numerals:  
Ð
Symbols:  
A to Z  
0 to 9  
', >, <, /, -  
Note  
The COUNTRY entry can only include alphabetical  
characters and spaces.  
5
6
Press the jog dial button to accept a desired character.  
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
next digit (clockwise), and repeat steps 4 to 5 to set  
characters.  
To change an input character, go back to step 3.  
7
8
When the last character is set, press the jog dial button  
to bring the arrow (cursor) back to the option USER.  
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data  
72  
 
CTL Count Setting and Display  
By setting the DISPLAY switch to [CTL], CTL count is  
displayed on the time count indication of the LCD display  
window.  
The CTL count is displayed in ±12 hours with non-drop-  
frame.  
The playback order of clips recorded on a P2 card is not  
linear as for VTRs. It is organized according to thumbnail  
operations or exchanging P2 cards, and the priority of  
recorded clips will be altered. Therefore, different CTL  
counts are displayed for recording mode and playback  
mode, respectively.  
The playback order of clips is altered when either of the  
following occurs:  
Clips are deleted, copied or restored, or the P2 card is  
formatted.  
The thumbnail display is switched (for more information,  
see [Switching the Thumbnail Display] (page 124)).  
A P2 card is inserted or removed.  
The reference value (value of the first frame of the first clip)  
is changed when either of the following occurs:  
The power is turned on, the first frame becomes 0.  
When the playback CTL count is reset, the current  
playback position is set as 0, and the previous reference  
value becomes a negative value.  
CTL count for recording mode (recording CTL)  
Recording CTL count is displayed during recording mode  
(REC, REC/PAUSE, STOP and REC REVIEW), and the  
count continues from the end point of the previous  
recording. Recording CTL count is retained even if the  
power is turned off. When the power is next turned on, the  
count continues from the previous value.  
Example:  
First frame  
Current value  
Clip 2  
00:01:00:00  
Clip 3  
00:02:00:00  
Clip 1  
00:00:00:00  
00:03:00:00  
Reset  
Notes  
First frame  
If the RESET button is pressed while the recording CTL  
count is being displayed, only the recording CTL count is  
reset. Note that reset is disabled during the REC REVIEW  
operation.  
Clip 1  
Clip 2  
Clip 3  
–00:03:00:00  
–00:02:00:00  
–00:01:00:00  
00:00:00:00  
24 frames are counted in the 24PN (Native) mode.  
Notes  
If the RESET button is pressed while the playback CTL  
count is being displayed, only the playback CTL count is  
reset.  
CTL count for the playback mode  
(playback CTL)  
For playback in 24PN (Native) mode, 30 frames are  
counted in accordance with the pull-down images.  
Note, however, that in the 1080-23.98PsF and 1080-  
24PsF modes, 24 frames are counted.  
During playback mode (PLAY, FF, REW, PLAY/PAUSE),  
playback CTL count is displayed.  
Whenever the playback order of clips is altered (clips are  
sorted by shooting dates), previous playback CTL count is  
disabled. The first frame of the first clip is used as a  
reference value for recalculation, and the new playback CTL  
count is displayed.  
Example:  
First frame  
Current value  
Clip 3  
Clip 1  
Clip 2  
00:00:00:00  
00:00:00:00  
00:01:00:00  
Delete Clip 2.  
Current value  
00:02:00:00  
00:03:00:00  
Clip 1  
Clip 3  
00:01:00:00  
00:02:00:00  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Setting Time Data  
73  
Viewfinder Screen Status Displays  
In addition to video images, the viewfinder displays lamps and text that indicate the settings and operating status of the unit,  
together with messages, a center marker, a safety zone marker and the camera ID.  
Lamps in the Viewfinder Screen  
2. Abnormal Operating Status Warning Lamp  
1
This lamp comes on when the unit is in any of the  
abnormal operating statuses specified through the  
<!LED> menu screen.  
For statuses that activate the lamp, see the options in  
the [!LED] (page 183).  
3. BATT (battery) Lamp  
This lamp starts blinking a few minutes before the  
battery charge starts to run out, and stays illuminated  
after the battery is completely flat. The battery should be  
replaced before it is nearly flat, so that operation will not  
be interrupted.  
For more information, see [Warning System]  
(page 155).  
2
4
The above viewfinder is the AJ-HVF21G (for further information  
on your optional viewfinder model, see the relevant instruction  
manual).  
4. SAVE Lamp  
In the normal setting:  
The lamp stays on when the SAVE switch is positioned  
at [ON] and the output of video and audio is power-  
saved.  
1. TALLY/REC (recording) Lamp  
This lamp stays illuminated in red during recording, and  
starts blinking if any abnormal action occurs.  
For more information, see [Warning System]  
(page 155).  
When the menu option SAVE LED is set to  
“P2CARD”:  
The lamp starts blinking when the P2 card remaining  
free space is getting low.  
The menu option SAVE LED can be found in the <VF  
INDICATOR3> screen on the VF page.  
Mode Check Screen Displays (MODE CHECK button function)  
The viewfinder can display a screen that allows you to check  
  
the settings and status of the unit.  
Each press of the MODE CHECK button switches the  
screen as follows:  
  
  
  
  
STATUS screen !LED screen FUNCTION screen ꢀ  
AUDIO screen CAC screen USER SW STATUS screen  
No indication  
  
  
  
  
  
Each screen is displayed for about 5 seconds. A press of the  
MODE CHECK button switches the current screen.  
Whether or not to display each screen is specified through  
the <MODE CHECK IND> screen, which is accessible from  
the VF page.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays  
74  
 
Selecting Viewfinder Display Information  
To select the information items you want to have displayed in  
the viewfinder screen, go to the <VF INDICATOR1>, <VF  
INDICATOR2> and <VF INDICATOR3> screens from the VF  
page, and turn on or off the appropriate options, or specify  
desired values.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
For directions on setting the options, see [Setting Menu  
Options] (page 163).  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
Viewfinder Status Indication Layout  
The indications are arranged as illustrated below.  
43  
42  
34  
35  
36  
32  
33  
6
4
3
5
7
                                  
9
8
2
1
                                  
            
     
      
          
15  
            
           
           
           
10  
11  
13  
14  
13  
12  
16  
17  
21  
18  
             
         
37  
29  
         
37  
                                  
  
                                 
28  
27  
                            
    
  
                              
        
  
                        
20  
30  
23  
24  
26  
31 19  
22  
25  
41  
44 45 38  
39  
40  
For more information, see the following pages.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays  
75  
   
Information Item  
1. System mode  
Indication  
1080-59.9i  
Status  
This indicates the mode that the unit operates in.  
1080-59.94 interlace mode  
1080-23.9PsF  
1080-24.0PsF  
1080-50i  
1080-23.98 segment frame mode  
1080-24 segment frame mode  
1080-50 interlace mode  
720-59.94P  
720-60P  
720-59.94 progressive mode  
720-60 progressive mode  
720-50P  
720-50 progressive mode  
2/43. Frame number  
for shooting and  
recording  
The shooting frame number is displayed next to the recording frame number  
(including native recording) and the recording type (progressive/interlacing).  
Examples: In the case of 24PN recording and 12 frame shooting, “12P:24PN”  
is displayed.  
ꢅꢅP: ꢅꢅi  
At native recording  
ꢅꢅP: ꢅꢅPN  
In the case of 12P Over 59.94i, “12P:60i” is displayed.  
When the VFR function is “ON”, the shooting frame number is displayed with  
black and white reversed. When operating in SYNCHRO SCAN mode, the  
shooting frame number blinks.  
3. REC FORMAT  
This indicates the recording mode.  
Note  
DVCPROHD is also displayed in the native recording.  
DVCPRO HD recording (including native recording)  
AVC-Intra100 recording  
DVCPROHD  
AVC-I100  
AVC-I50  
AVC-Intra50 recording  
4/41. Shutter speed/  
mode  
X1/ꢅꢅ., Xꢅꢅꢅ.d  
XX1/ꢅꢅꢅ.ꢅ  
1/50 (1/60) - 1/2000,  
HALF, ꢅꢅꢅ.d  
This indicates that the shutter speed is set to SYNCHRO SCAN.  
This indicates that the shutter speed is set to SYNCHRO SCAN2.  
This indicates that a fixed shutter speed has been set.  
5. P2 card remaining  
free space  
ꢅꢅꢅmin  
The indication “ꢅꢅꢅmin” stays illuminated under normal conditions or blinks  
when the remaining level is near zero.  
END  
WP  
When the card space is used up, “END” blinks.  
WP is illuminated when the P2 card is write-protected.  
LOOP  
LOOP is illuminated when the LOOP REC mode is set. When loop recording  
cannot be performed, for example because the P2 card has no free space, the  
indication blinks.  
INFO P2  
P2 card being recognized.  
/ꢅ  
Total free space/capacities of the P2 cards (when MODE CHECK is being  
performed).  
Note  
When the menu option P2CARD REMAIN is set to “ONE-CARD”, the number  
of the P2 card slot that contains the target card is indicated, together with the  
remaining space.  
For more information, see [P2 Card Remaining Free Space/capacity Indication]  
(page 82).  
With lower frame rates under VFR operation during native recording, the  
display period may lengthen for the indication that little space remains on the  
P2 card.  
6. P2 card remaining  
free space (when  
MODE CHECK is  
being performed)  
ꢅꢅꢅmin  
The number of the P2 card slot that contains the target card and the remaining  
free space are indicated (when MODE CHECK is being performed). In LOOP  
REC mode, an indication of estimated recording time appears. For more  
information, see [Loop Recording] (page 40). This indication also appears  
when the target P2 card has been switched with a user button.  
Note  
Under VFR operation in native recording, the amount of free space increases  
as the frame rate is lowered.  
7. Unit REC indication REC  
When an external device is controlled through the 1394 connection (when the  
1394 CONTROL option is set to “BOTH”), the recording status of the unit is  
displayed using characters. The indication stays illuminated during recording.  
This is displayed when the menu option REC TALLY of the <OPTION MODE>  
screen is set to “CHAR”.  
This can also be displayed during the recording using the unit alone.  
This is displayed when the menu option REC STATUS of the <VF  
INDICATOR3> screen is set to “ON”.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays  
76  
Information Item  
Indication  
Status  
8. Battery type (when  
MODE CHECK is  
PRO14 - AC ADPT  
Battery type, selected through a menu option. “AC ADPT” indicates when an  
external DC power supply has been input.  
being performed)  
9. Battery remaining  
level/voltage  
ꢅꢅ.V  
ꢅꢅꢅ%  
Battery remaining level in tenths of a volt  
The battery level of batteries having a level indicating function is displayed as a  
percentage.  
EMP  
MAX  
Where the battery has a level indicating function, this indicates that the battery  
is empty.  
Where the battery has a level indicating function, this indicates that the battery  
is fully charged.  
10.  
MODE CHECK  
Indication Area  
LOW/MID/HIGH  
–3 to 30  
Value set for the master gain  
Example: LOW: 0  
(STATUS: Master gain)  
(Cause of !LED  
GAIN (0dB)  
Gain status  
illumination: displayed full- SHUTTER  
Shutter status  
screen)  
Indications selected  
through the menu  
option !LED are marked MATRIX  
with [ ! ].  
Indications which may  
activate the !LED are  
marked with [ ].  
WHITE PRE.  
EXTENDER  
B.GAMMA  
White balance status  
Extender status (EX2 or OFF)  
BLACK GAMMA status (ON or OFF)  
MATRIX status (A, B, or OFF)  
Color correction status (ON or OFF)  
Filter status  
COLOR COR.  
FILTER  
(FUNCTION: HD SDI A · OUTPUT: MEM/CAM/OFF  
B) CHAR: ON/OFF  
Position of OUTPUT SEL switch.  
Indicates current setting of HD SDI A · B CHAR.  
HD SDI A · B CHAR is set from the <OUTPUT SEL> screen of the SYSTEM  
SETTING page.  
(FUNCTION: MON OUT) OUTPUT: MEM/CAM/OFF  
SELECT: VBS/HD SDI  
Position of OUTPUT SEL switch.  
Indicates current setting of MONITOR OUT.  
MONITOR OUT is set from the <OUTPUT SEL> screen of the SYSTEM  
SETTING page.  
CHAR: ON/OFF  
Indicates current setting of MON OUT CHARACTER switch.  
(FUNCTION: P2CARD  
STATUS)  
TOTAL  
Total remaining free space/capacities of the P2 cards loaded in P2 card slots  
1 - 5.  
SLOT1/SLOT2/SLOT3/  
SLOT4/SLOT5  
Status and remaining free space/capacity of each card. The numbers denote  
the P2 card slot numbers.  
The card status is indicated as:  
ACTIVE/ACCESSING/INFO READING/FULL/PROTECTED/  
NOT SUPPORTED/FORMAT ERROR/NO CARD/PROXY  
For details of statuses, see [P2 card access LED and status of P2 cards]  
(page 31).  
OP-SLOT  
Indicates optional slot status.  
The card status is indicated as:  
PROXY/NO CARD/NOT SUPPORTED  
(AUDIO: Enabling or  
disabling the FRONT  
AUDIO LEVEL control)  
CH1: ON/OFF  
CH2: ON/OFF  
If the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control is in effect for channel 1, then “ON” is  
indicated. If not, “OFF” is indicated.  
If the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control is in effect for channel 2, then “ON” is  
indicated. If not, “OFF” is indicated.  
(AUDIO: Phantom power FRONT:  
status for the microphone) REAR:  
ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
Phantom power status of the front microphone  
Phantom power status of the rear microphone  
For more information, see [MIC/AUDIO2] (page 193).  
(AUDIO: Input signal and FRONT/W.L./REAR  
level for each channel) CH1/2/3/4  
Input signal and level for each channel  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays  
77  
Information Item  
Indication  
Status  
11.  
Camera Warning AWB A ACTIVE  
and Report Area AWB B ACTIVE  
AWB A OK .K  
AWB being performed on Ch A.  
AWB being performed on Ch B.  
AWB successful on Ch A.  
AWB successful on Ch B.  
AWB action aborted by user.  
(Related to AWB, ABB  
and switch settings)  
AWB B OK .K  
AWB BREAK .K  
AWB NG  
AWB action failed. The second line indicates the status.  
Color temperature too low.  
COLOR TEMP LOW  
COLOR TEMP HIGH  
LEVEL OVER  
Color temperature too high.  
Brightness too high.  
LOW LIGHT  
Brightness too low.  
TIME OVER  
Action timed-out.  
AWB PRESET .K  
AWB cannot be performed because the AWB switch is position at [PRST] or  
the super gain is enabled.  
CHECK FILTER  
ABB ACTIVE  
ABB OK  
Make sure the FILTER control is positioned correctly.  
ABB being performed.  
ABB action successful.  
ABB BREAK  
ABB NG  
ABB action aborted by user.  
ABB action failed.  
B-SHD READY  
Black shading accepted (by holding down the ABB switch during ABB  
adjustment).  
B-SHD ACTIVE  
B-SHD OK  
B-SHD BREAK  
B-SHD NG  
Black shading being adjusted.  
Black shading adjustment successful.  
Black shading adjustment aborted by user.  
Black shading adjustment failed.  
(Switch changeover  
indication)  
WHITE: # .K  
AUTO KNEE: ON/OFF  
GAIN: ꢅꢅdB  
SS: 1/ꢅꢅꢅꢅ, ꢅꢅꢅ.d,  
Xꢅꢅꢅ.d  
The WHITE BAL switch has been switched. # is replaced with A, B or PRE.  
AUTO KNEE switch has been switched to [ON] or [OFF].  
Gain has been switched with the GAIN selector switch or a user button.  
When the shutter speed has been switched, the shutter speed is indicated.  
SS: X 1/ꢅꢅꢅꢅ, XX1/ꢅꢅꢅ Shutter speed is in SYNCHRO SCAN mode.  
ND: /CC: ꢅꢅK  
EXTENDER: ON/OFF/ꢅꢅK  
IRIS: ꢅꢅ F .ꢅ  
This appears when the filter setting has been selected.  
Lens extender has been turned on or off.  
Indicated when the iris override correction value is to be changed.  
The dynamic range stretcher has been switched.  
DRS: ON/OFF  
(Low light warning)  
(Y GET value)  
LOW LIGHT  
Brightness too low.  
ꢅꢅꢅ.%  
With the Y GET ON setting, the output brightness level near the center marker  
is displayed as “%”.  
12.  
User button  
functions  
INH  
User buttons disabled.  
I.OVR ON/OFF  
S.BLK –ꢅꢅ/OFF  
B.GAMMA ON/OFF  
Y GET ON/OFF  
DRS ON/OFF  
ASSIST ON/OFF  
C.TEMP ON/OFF  
Iris override can be set (the iris override setting is on).  
Status of super black (on or off). When it is on, the set value is also indicated.  
Status of black gamma (shade correction for the black level): on or off  
Indicates whether the Y GET function is on or off.  
Indicates whether the dynamic range stretcher function is on or off.  
Indicates whether the focus assist function is on or off.  
Indicates the mode for changing the color temperature with the jog dial button  
is on or off.  
UM:  
USER MAIN  
button  
USER 1 button  
USER 2 button  
MARKER  
SELECT button  
TEXT MEMO  
button  
U1:  
U2:  
U3:  
U4:  
VFR ON/OFF  
FRATE ON/OFF  
VF GAM ON/OFF  
AUDIO CH1  
AUDIO CH2  
REC SW  
Indicates whether the VFR function is on or off.  
Indicates whether the frame rate set in USR SW F.RATE is being applied.  
Indicates whether the monitor gamma function is enabled for the viewfinder.  
Input signal to be recorded on audio channel 1 has been switched.  
Input signal to be recorded on audio channel 2 has been switched.  
User button acts as REC switch.  
RET SW  
User button acts as RET switch.  
PRE REC  
SLOT SEL  
Indicates that PRE RECORDING mode has been switched on or off.  
Switch that changes the target card is set.  
USB HOST/DEVICE/OFF  
VF MARK A/B/OFF  
USB action status has been switched.  
Displayed when the marker displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD screen  
has been changed.  
TEXT MEMO  
Indicates whether the TEXT MEMO function is on or off.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays  
78  
Information Item  
Indication  
Status  
13.  
System  
information and  
warnings  
SYSTEM ERROR-ꢅꢅ  
Something abnormal is happening to the internal computer communications or  
reference signal. No further recording or playback can be performed. ꢅꢅ is  
replaced with an error code. For more information, see [Error Codes]  
(page 158).  
TURN POWER OFF  
P2 card has been removed while being accessed (recorded, played back, or  
formatted), and subsequent operation is disabled.  
CARD ERR ꢅ  
An error has occurred while recording data to or playing data from a P2 card. In  
the actual indication the is replaced by the slot number of the P2 card that  
triggered the error.  
REC WARNING  
BACKUP BATT EMPTY  
FAN STOP  
WIRELESS-RF  
EOM  
Something abnormal is happening to video and/or audio being recorded.  
Backup battery needs replacing.  
The fan is locked and halted.  
RF signal from the wireless receiver is degraded.  
P2 card has no free space.  
BOS  
Playback position is at the start of all the clips.  
Playback position is at the end of all the clips.  
EOS  
CANNOT REC  
Indicates that it is not possible to record to a P2 card directly after insertion or  
switching on the power. Detailed information is provided on the FUNCTION  
screen of MODE CHECK. See the relevant section of the 10. MODE CHECK  
indication area.  
CANNOT PLAY  
COMM ERROR  
Clip cannot be played back perhaps because no P2 card is loaded, or the P2  
card contains no clips.  
Displayed when disconnection between microcomputers continues for a  
specified period or longer.  
TEXT MEMO  
Text memo has been added.  
TEXT MEMO INVALID  
MARK ON/OFF  
Text memo has not been successfully added.  
Shot mark has been added or deleted. For information on shot marks, see  
[Shot Mark Function] (page 45).  
SHOT MARK INVALID  
UPDATING  
This is displayed when shot marks cannot be added.  
Clip information is being updated. Playback operation disabled.  
USB DEVICE  
The unit is in USB DEVICE mode. When communication is disabled, the  
indication blinks.  
USB HOST  
Indicates that the unit is set to the USB HOST mode. When the external hard  
disk is not successfully recognized, then the indication blinks.  
THUMBNAIL OPEN  
1394 INITIAL ERROR  
PROXY REC P2&SD  
Thumbnail is being manipulated.  
Displayed when the connection of the DVCPRO connector is abnormal.  
Displayed when proxy recording on either the P2 card or the SD memory card  
starts (when AJ-YAX800G is attached, the PROXY REC item on the <VF  
INDICATOR3> screen is turned on).  
PROXY REC P2  
NEAR END (SD)  
Displayed when proxy recording on the P2 card starts (when AJ-YAX800G is  
attached, the PROXY REC item on the <VF INDICATOR3> screen is turned  
on).  
When the remaining free space on the SD Memory card drops below 1 minute  
during proxy recording, the message is displayed (when AJ-YAX800G is  
attached).  
EOM (SD)  
Displayed when full capacity is reached during proxy recording on the SD  
memory card (when AJ-YAX800G is attached).  
PROXY CARD ERROR  
Displayed when proxy recording stops because of failure on either the video  
encoder card or the stream. Check the video encoder card or avoid use of  
proxy recording. (When AJ-YAX800G is attached.)  
SD CARD WRITE ERR  
Displayed when a failure occurs on the SD memory card during proxy  
recording, and only recording on the SD memory card stops (when AJ-  
YAX800G is attached).  
TC REGEN  
The RET button was pressed to regenerate the time code as the time code for  
the last clip recorded on a P2 card.  
SLOT SEL  
This blinks while the recording slots of P2 cards are switched after pressing the  
user button where the SLOT SEL function is assigned.  
SLOT SEL INVALID  
This is displayed if the recording slots of P2 cards cannot be switched when  
the user button where the SLOT SEL function is assigned is pressed.  
DIR NG CARD  
SLOT1/2/3/4/5  
This is displayed when a P2 card with an irregular directory structure is  
inserted or when beginning or ending a recording to an inserted card having  
such a directory structure.  
RUN DOWN CARD  
SLOT1/2/3/4/5  
This is displayed when the recording starts or completes with a P2 card on  
which the maximum number of overwrites has been exceeded, or when data is  
recorded after inserting such a P2 card.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays  
79  
Information Item  
Indication  
Status  
14.  
Time code  
indication  
TCG  
TCR  
(V)UBG  
(V)UBR  
CTL  
12:59:59:20  
12:59:59:20  
AB CD EF 00  
12 34 56 78  
–1:59:59:20  
TCG (time code generator value)  
TCR (time code reader value)  
UBG VUBG (User bits generator value)  
UBR VUBR (User bits reader value)  
Displays CTL count.  
15.  
16.  
CAC  
CAC  
EX  
This is displayed when CAC is operating normally.  
Lens extender used.  
Extender  
17/40. Color  
temperature  
.K  
Color temperature assigned to [A], [B], and [PRST] of the WHITE BAL switch  
(this is a value stored at AWB performance or a value set through the menu  
option).  
18/39. Filter position  
1 - 4  
A - D  
This indicates the position of the ND filter.  
This indicates the position of the CC filter.  
This indicates that the filter has not been set to a proper position.  
19.  
20.  
Dynamic range  
stretcher mode  
DRS  
This is displayed when the function for compressing the video levels of  
sections with high brightness to stretch the dynamic range has been selected.  
WHITE BAL  
switch position  
A
B
P
WHITE BAL switch positioned at [A].  
WHITE BAL switch positioned at [B].  
WHITE BAL switch positioned at [PRST].  
21/42. Gamma  
Indication  
HD  
SD  
This indicates the gamma used in the unit.  
FLK1  
FLK2  
FLK3  
FREC  
VREC  
22.  
23.  
Gain value  
ꢅꢅdB  
Current gain value.  
Audio input  
channel and  
level meter  
- - - - - - - - +  
F
W
R
Selected channel together with its audio level.  
AUDIO IN switch is positioned at [FRONT].  
AUDIO IN switch is positioned at [W.L.] (wireless)  
AUDIO IN switch is positioned at [REAR].  
24.  
25.  
Super black ON  
B
Super black ON.  
Iris override  
indication  
+ +  
+
Correction phase of the iris override (when active)  
+ +:  
+:  
– –:  
–:  
On the open side by 1  
On the open side by 0.5  
On the closed side by 1  
On the closed side by 0.5  
(No indication)  
– –  
No indication: Standard status  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays  
80  
Information Item  
Iris, F value  
Indication  
Status  
26.  
NC  
OPEN  
Lens cable is not connected.  
Lens iris is at maximum.  
Lens iris value  
F1.7 - F16  
CLOSE  
Lens iris closed.  
Note  
These indications are provided when the lens is capable of indicating the iris  
value. When the iris is being overridden, they blink.  
27.  
28.  
Zoom indication Z00 - Z99  
Zoom degree is indicated. This indication is not provided for a lens that does  
not return the zoom position, even if the indication is set to on.  
INTERVAL REC/  
PRE  
Displayed before and after operation during INTERVAL REC mode.  
Displayed during INTERVAL REC operation.  
(blink)  
RECORDING  
indication/SD  
memory card  
remaining free  
space  
(blink)  
ꢅꢅhꢅꢅm/ꢅꢅs  
Displays the pause time before the next recording during INTERVAL REC.  
P-REC (blink)  
Indicated while pre-recorded video and audio are being recorded on the P2  
card. If the user button is set to perform the PRE RECORDING function, either  
“P-REC OFF” or the specified duration “1s - 8s” is displayed when the PRE  
RECORDING mode is switched by pressing the user button.  
If a video encoder card (AJ-YAX800G, optional) is attached, the remaining free  
space on the SD Memory card will be displayed when the MODE CHECK  
button is pressed during proxy recording.  
ꢅꢅh ꢅꢅm  
END  
“END” is displayed when there is no remaining free space.  
29.  
Compression  
mode  
COMP  
This appears when setting the mode for suppressing distortion of compressed  
video images that may occur when dark parts are shot. (Only for the  
DVCPRO HD at 720P)  
30/44. VF-GAMMA  
This is only enabled when “FILM-REC” has been selected in the GAMMA  
MODE SEL menu option. Video shot in the FILM-REC gamma mode is  
converted to high-contrast video and supplied to the viewfinder. GAMMA  
MODE SEL can be selected from the screen <GAMMA> in the PAINT page.  
31/45. MON-GAMMA  
M
This is only enabled when “FILM-REC” has been selected in the GAMMA  
MODE SEL menu option. Video shot in the FILM-REC gamma mode is  
converted to high-contrast video and supplied to the MON OUT output.  
GAMMA MODE SEL can be selected from the screen <GAMMA> in the PAINT  
page.  
32.  
F-REC DYNAMIC 200%  
This indicates the dynamic range at FILM-REC.  
At other times, it indicates knee-slope.  
LVL indication  
300%  
400%  
500%  
600%  
33.  
34.  
35.  
F-REC BLACK  
STR LVL  
indication  
00% - 30%  
This indicates the level of black stretch at FILM-REC.  
At other times, it indicates knee-point.  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
indication  
0.30 - 0.75  
This indicates the master gamma level.  
BLACK GAMMA –8 - OFF - +8  
This indicates the gamma curve setting for dark locations on the screen.  
setting  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays  
81  
Information Item  
Indication  
Status  
36.  
37.  
38.  
B.GAMMA  
RANGE  
1
2
3
This indicates the level (upper limit) of the compression/expansion.  
Switch lock  
setting  
!SW LOCK  
This is displayed when any of the side switches (GAIN, OUTPUT and AWB  
switches) are operated with SIDE SW LOCK in a locked state. Note that it is  
not displayed during when AJ-RC10G is connected and in operation.  
Exposure  
Indication  
–4  
When GAMMA MODE SEL has been set to “FILM-REC” and STATUS MODE  
to “FILM REC”, executing the Y GET operation measures brightness in  
proximity to the center marker. The measured value is displayed as an  
exposure level.  
–3„„  
–3„  
–3  
–2„„  
–2„  
–2  
–1„„  
–1„  
–1  
A measured output signal of 30% is displayed as ±0 (normal). This value is  
then adjusted by +1 STOP for every doubling of the amount of incident light  
and by –1 STOP for every halving of the amount incident light. Each „  
represents 1/3 STOP.  
GAMMA MODE SEL is set from the <GAMMA> screen of the PAINT page.  
STATUS MODE is set from the <VF DISPLAY> screen of the VF page.  
±0  
+0„  
+0„„  
+1  
+1„  
+1„„  
+2  
+2„  
+2„„  
+3  
+3„  
+3„„  
+4  
+4„  
+4„„  
+5  
P2 Card Remaining Free Space/capacity Indication  
Recording  
status  
Menu option  
P2CARD REMAIN*  
5. P2 card remaining free space  
6. P2 card remaining free space  
indication (during MODE CHECK)*  
Status of unit  
1
2
2
indication*  
Under normal Other than  
TOTAL  
The total remaining free space of all P2  
cards loaded in the P2 card slots is  
indicated in minutes.  
Not provided  
conditions  
LOOP REC  
mode  
Example: 30min  
ONE-CARD  
The number of the P2 card slot holding the Not provided  
target P2 card, together with that card’s  
remaining free space indicated in minutes.  
Example:  
8min  
OFF  
Not provided  
Not provided  
LOOP REC  
mode  
TOTAL/ONE-CARD  
OFF  
Indicated as “LOOP”  
Not provided  
Not provided  
Not provided  
During MODE Other than  
TOTAL/ONE-CARD/  
OFF  
The total remaining free space and  
capacities of all P2 cards loaded in the P2 holding the target P2 card, together  
card slots are indicated in minutes.  
Example: 20/40  
The number of the P2 card slot  
CHECK  
LOOP REC  
mode  
with that card’s remaining free space,  
indicated in minutes.  
Example: 8min  
LOOP REC  
mode  
Indicated as “LOOP”  
The estimated recording time is  
indicated in minutes.  
Example: 7min  
*1 The menu option P2CARD REMAIN can be found in the <VF INDICATOR3> screen on the VF page.  
*2 If the remaining free space or memory capacity is 9999 min or more, [9999min] is displayed.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays  
82  
   
Indications Available in the Viewfinder Screen  
Selectable  
Provided when  
the appropriate  
status is  
between on and  
off through menu  
options  
Provided during Can be switched Provided during  
MODE CHECK*  
off.  
playback  
encountered.  
1.  
2.  
System mode  
Frame number for shooting and  
recording  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
REC FORMAT  
Shutter speed/mode  
P2 card remaining free space  
P2 card remaining free space  
(when MODE CHECK is being  
performed)  
7.  
8.  
Unit REC indication  
Battery type (when MODE CHECK  
is being performed)  
9.  
Battery remaining level/voltage  
10. MODE CHECK Indication Area  
11. Camera Warning and Report Area  
12. User button functions  
13. System information and warnings  
14. Time code indication  
15. CAC  
16. Extender  
17. Color temperature  
18. Filter position  
19. Dynamic range stretcher mode  
20. WHITE BAL switch position  
21. Gamma Indication  
22. Gain value  
23. Audio input channel and level  
meter  
All 4ch input  
information  
24. Super black ON  
25. Iris override indication  
26. Iris, F value  
27. Zoom indication  
28. INTERVAL REC/PRE RECORDING  
indication/SD memory card  
remaining free space  
29. Compression mode  
30. VF-GAMMA  
31. MON-GAMMA  
32. F-REC DYNAMIC LVL indication  
33. F-REC BLACK STR LVL indication  
34. MASTER GAMMA indication  
35. BLACK GAMMA setting  
36. B.GAMMA RANGE  
37. Switch lock setting  
38. Exposure Indication  
39. Filter position  
40. Color temperature  
41. Shutter speed/mode  
42. Gamma Indication  
43. Frame number for shooting and  
recording  
44. VF-GAMMA  
45. MON-GAMMA  
* : Not provided when the menu option STATUS is set to “OFF”, which can be found in the <MODE CHECK IND> screen on the VF page.  
: Provided regardless of the menu option setting.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays  
83  
Display Modes and Setting Changes/adjustment Result Messages  
The messages that appear on the viewfinder screen to  
  
  
  
  
  
  
indicate changes to settings and adjustment results may be  
limited, or set not to appear, through the menu option DISP  
MODE. This menu option can be found in the <VF  
DISPLAY> screen on the VF page.  
  
For directions on navigating the menu, see [Setting Menu  
Options] (page 163).  
  
  
   
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
Setting change/adjustment messages and DISP MODE settings  
Message appears when:  
DISP MODE  
settings  
Message  
1
2
3
CC filter/ND filter changed.  
Gain changed.  
ND: n (n=1, 2, 3, 4), CC: m (m=A, B, C, D)  
GAIN: n dB  
(n=–3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, 30)  
WHITE BAL switch re-positioned.  
WHITE: n (n=A, B, PRE)  
AUTO KNEE: ON (or OFF)  
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch positioned at  
[AUTO KNEE] or [OFF].  
1/180.0 deg (or 1/172.8 deg, 1/144.0 deg, 1/120.0 deg, 1/90.0 deg,  
1/45.0 deg, 1/ꢅꢅꢅꢅ, X1/ꢅꢅꢅꢅ, Xꢅꢅꢅ.deg, XX1/ꢅꢅꢅ)  
Shutter speed/mode changed.  
White balance adjusted (AWB performed).  
Black balance adjusted (ABB performed).  
Extender selected.  
Example: AWB A OK 3.2 K  
Example: ABB OK  
Example: EXTENDER ON  
Example: UM: SLOT SEL  
Example: ++ F 5.6  
User button selected.  
Iris being overridden.  
: Message appears.  
: Message does not appear.  
The center, safety zone, safety zone area and frame  
markers may be set to on or off, along with specifications of  
the marker types. To set and select markers, go to the <VF  
MARKER> screen from the VF page and select the  
appropriate options.  
For directions on navigating the menu, see [Setting Menu  
Options] (page 163).  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
  
  
Note  
The indication “MRK: A” at the upper right of the screen  
shows the current indication status. To view TABLE B, press  
the MARKER SELECT button. This changes the indication  
to “MRK: B”, allowing you to view the settings.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays  
84  
 
Marker Check Screen Displays (MARKER SELECT button function)  
The viewfinder can display a screen that allows you to view  
the marker settings of the unit.  
Markers  
Pressing the MARKER SELECT button on the unit switches  
the marker indication as follows.  
b
c
Marker A Marker B No marker  
If the menu option FRAME SIG is set to “16:9” as the  
information of Marker A and “4:3” as the information of  
Marker B, then the 16:9 and 4:3 view angles can easily be  
checked with the button, as required.  
d
b. Center marker  
c. Safety zone  
d. The view angle specified through the menu option  
FRAME SIG is displayed.  
a
a. MARKER SELECT button  
Checking Return Video Signal in the Viewfinder  
The viewfinder displays the return video signal input to the  
GENLOCK IN connector while the RET button at the lens is  
held down.  
Note, however, that the return video signal cannot be viewed  
unless the signal format set using SYSTEM MODE matches  
the input signal to the GENLOCK IN connector.  
To enable this capability, select “CAM RET” for the menu  
option RET SW. This option can be found in the <SW  
MODE> screen on the CAM OPERATION page.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
Note  
1080-23.98P, 1080-24P and SD format signals cannot be  
viewed.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Viewfinder Screen Status Displays  
85  
 
Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor  
5
Through the menu option VFR/LCD CHAR, specify  
whether or not the LCD should display the same  
characters as the viewfinder.  
Using the LCD Monitor  
1
2
Turn on the POWER switch of the unit.  
This menu option can be found in the <OUTPUT SEL>  
screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.  
Slide the OPEN button in the arrow 1 direction to open  
the LCD monitor in the arrow 2 direction.  
  
  
  
  
   
  
  
  
  
  
   
  
  
  
Notes  
When closing the LCD monitor make sure that it is  
shut tight.  
In an environment with sudden temperature changes,  
condensation may form on the liquid crystal surface of  
the monitor. If this happens, wipe off the moisture with  
a soft, dry cloth.  
When the unit is very cold, the video image in the LCD  
monitor will appear slightly darker immediately after  
the power is turned on. Once the interior of the unit  
warms up, the LCD monitor delivers normal  
brightness.  
3
Adjust the angle of the LCD monitor for most convenient  
viewing.  
The monitor can turn up to 180 degrees towards the  
lens and up to 90 degrees towards you.  
Note  
To prevent unit failure, do not allow undue force to be  
applied to the monitor (when it is open).  
Self-portrait Shooting  
When shooting with the LCD display angled 180 degrees  
towards the lens, you can set the menu option SELF  
SHOOT to “MIRROR”, to horizontally flip the video image on  
the LCD display, and allow you to view a mirror image while  
shooting.  
Note that only the video image on the LCD monitor is  
horizontally flipped, not the actual video being recorded.  
The menu option SELF SHOOT can be found in the <LCD  
MONITOR> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.  
Notes  
When the LCD monitor is angled 180 degrees towards the  
lens with the menu option SELF SHOOT to “MIRROR”,  
the LCD monitor does not provide the same status  
indication as the viewfinder, regardless of the setting for  
the menu option VFR/LCD CHAR.  
4
The options BRIGHTNESS, COLOR LEVEL, and  
CONTRAST show respectively the brightness, color  
level and contrast of the screen. These options can be  
found in the <LCD MONITOR> screen on the SYSTEM  
SETTING page.  
Return signals from the GENLOCK IN connector cannot  
be output to the LCD monitor.  
When the OUTPUT SEL switch of MON OUT is in the  
[CAM] position, playback cannot be output to the LCD  
monitor. The viewfinder must be used to view playback.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor  
86  
 
Selection of video output signals  
The unit employs the HD SDI A · B connector and the MON OUT connector as connectors for outputting video signals.  
Settings of signals output from HD SDI A · B connector  
Change the characters of the signal output from the HD SDI  
A · B connector using the <OUTPUT SEL> screen from the  
menu. The character content output from the HD SDI A · B  
connector and MON OUT is the same.  
The signals output from the HD SDI A · B connector are  
switched with the HD SDI A · B switch.  
However, the switching operation is not acknowledged  
during the recording operation.  
MEM:  
During EE, such as recording, video images  
taken by the camera are output. Meanwhile,  
signals on the P2 card are output during  
playback.  
CAM:  
OFF:  
The camera images are output at all times.  
No signal is output from the HD SDI A · B  
connector.  
a
HD SDI AB  
MEM  
TCG  
F-RUN  
SET  
R-RUN  
CAM  
OFF  
MON OUT  
CHARACTER OUTPUT SEL  
MEM  
CAM  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
a. HD SDI A · B switch  
Variable  
range  
Item  
Remarks  
OUTPUT  
ITEM  
MENU  
ONLY  
TC  
Set the characters to be superimposed  
on the output signals from the HD SDI A  
· B connector and MON OUT connector.  
MENU ONLY:  
STATUS  
The menu screen is  
superimposed only when the  
menu is accessed. This normally  
displays nothing.  
TC:  
Time codes are superimposed.  
(When the menu is accessed,  
the menu screen is  
superimposed.)  
STATUS:  
The characters that are the  
same as the characters  
superimposed in the viewfinder  
screen are superimposed.  
(When the menu is accessed,  
the menu screen is  
superimposed.)  
HD SDI A · OFF  
B CHAR ON  
ON:  
The characters are  
superimposed on the HD SDI A ·  
B connector.  
OFF: The characters are not  
superimposed on the HD SDI A ·  
B connector.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Selection of video output signals  
87  
   
Settings of signals output from MON OUT connector  
The MON OUT connector outputs HD SDI signals or down-  
converted analog signals.  
Set the video signals output from the MON OUT connector  
by using the MONITOR OUT item on the menu (<OUTPUT  
SEL> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page).  
Variable  
Item  
Remarks  
range  
MONITOR VBS  
OUT HD SDI  
Set video signals output from the MON  
OUT connector.  
VBS: Analog composite signals are  
output.  
HD SDI: HD SDI signals are output.  
The signals output from the MON OUT connector are  
switched with the OUTPUT SEL switch.  
However, the switching operation is not acknowledged  
during the recording operation.  
MEM:  
During EE, such as recording, video images  
taken by the camera are output. Meanwhile,  
signals on the P2 card are output during  
playback.  
CAM:  
OFF:  
The camera images are output at all times.  
No signal is output from the MON OUT  
connector.  
HD SDI AB  
MEM  
TCG  
F-RUN  
SET  
R-RUN  
CAM  
OFF  
b
MON OUT  
CHARACTER OUTPUT SEL  
MEM  
CAM  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
b. MON OUT OUTPUT SEL switch  
Set the characters to be superimposed on the signals output  
from the MON OUT connector in the OUTPUT ITEM item on  
the menu (<OUTPUT SEL> screen on the SYSTEM  
SETTING page).  
c
HD SDI AB  
MEM  
TCG  
F-RUN  
SET  
R-RUN  
CAM  
OFF  
MON OUT  
CHARACTER OUTPUT SEL  
MEM  
CAM  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
c. MON OUT CHARACTER switch  
Note  
When VBS has been selected as the MON OUT signal and  
the menu option SYSTEM MODE has been set to “1080-  
24PsF” and “720-60P”, the MON OUT signal is luminance  
signal video. The menu option SYSTEM MODE can be  
found in the <SYSTEM MODE> screen on the SYSTEM  
SETTING page.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Selection of video output signals  
88  
 
Handling data  
Set data file configuration  
The unit employs 5 sets for the file data area.  
For menu items that can be read from or stored in the  
respective areas, refer to [Menu] (page 161).  
FACTORY data:  
The area for storing factory settings  
Data cannot be revised with menu operations.  
USER data:  
The area for storing the data set by menu operations  
The FACTORY data is stored as the factory setting.  
CURRENT data:  
The area for storing the operating status of the unit  
The set value in this area is revised by menu operations.  
SCENE file:  
16 sets of scene files are provided.  
LENS file:  
Notes  
For information about how to navigate through the menu  
for this section, see [Setting Menu Options] (page 163).  
Access the respective data settings files after switching  
the PC MODE to “OFF”. If the respective data settings  
files are accessed when the unit is in USB DEVICE mode,  
an error may occur. The PC MODE can be operated from  
the <SYSTEM MODE> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING  
page.  
Do not edit the data stored on the SD memory card using  
a PC or the like.  
64 sets of lens files are provided.  
It is possible to write 8 setup files on  
the SD memory card.  
SD memory card  
SET UP data  
No. of files: 8  
Menu operations  
SD CARD READ/WRITE  
READ  
SD CARD READ/WRITE  
WRITE  
To revise the set  
value  
SCENE  
WRITE  
SCENE file  
No. of files: 16  
SCENE  
READ  
CURRENT data  
(Operating status of the unit)  
No. of files: 1  
LENS FILE  
READ  
WRITE USER READ USER  
DATA  
DATA  
USER data  
LENS file  
LENS FILE  
WRITE  
No. of files: 1  
No. of files: 64  
READ FACTORY  
DATA  
FACTORY data  
(Revision disable)  
No. of files: 1  
LENS FILE CARD R/W  
READ  
LENS FILE CARD R/W  
WRITE  
SD memory card  
Lens file  
: Files built in the unit  
No. of files: 88  
: Menu operations  
It is possible to write 8 titles for 8 lens files  
on the SD memory card.  
Setting Data Using an SD memory card  
An SD memory card (optional) can be used as a setup card that stores up to 8 files of settings menu specifications.  
This data allows you to quickly reproduce an optimum state.  
Regarding SD memory cards, please see <Cautions in using SD memory cards> (page 22).  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data  
89  
 
Handling SD memory cards  
An SD memory card may be inserted or removed, either before or after the power is turned on.  
To insert an SD memory card  
To remove the SD memory card  
Open the lid of the switch cover, and insert an SD memory  
card (optional) into the SD memory card slot with the notch  
upward. Close the lid.  
Open the lid of the switch cover, and ensure that the busy  
lamp is not illuminated. Then, further depress the SD  
memory card towards the main unit. This releases the SD  
memory card from the insertion slot. Take hold of the SD  
memory card and remove it. Close the lid.  
When using or storing SD memory cards, be sure to  
Avoid high temperature and humid environments  
Avoid water  
Avoid static electricity  
For storage, the SD memory card must be kept inserted into  
the unit with the lid closed.  
Note  
An SD memory card must be inserted with the right side  
facing the slot. If the card is hard to insert, it may be  
reversed or upside down. Do not force it into the slot. Check  
the card before re-inserting it.  
SD memory card operations  
To format an SD memory card, write settings data or read  
data on an SD memory card, navigate the menu to the <SD  
CARD READ/WRITE> screen from the FILE page.  
To format an SD memory card  
Note  
  
SD memory cards may be formatted via the thumbnail  
screen. For more information, see [Formatting SD memory  
cards] (page 135).  
  
  
  
  
  
  
1
2
3
Navigate the menu to the <SD CARD READ/WRITE>  
screen.  
  
  
  
  
  
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
menu option CARD CONFIG.  
Insertion of an SD memory card formatted to a standard  
other than the SD and SDHC standards using some other  
device will result in the display of “FORMAT ERROR” on the  
top right part of the window. In this case, reformat the card  
as follows.  
Press the jog dial button to display the following  
message:  
Note that the indication “FORMAT ERROR” does not  
disappear if the SD memory card is replaced with this menu  
page open. When the SD memory card is replaced, perform  
TITLE READ.  
  
  
  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data  
90  
   
4
To format the SD memory card, turn the jog dial button  
to move the arrow (cursor) to YES. Then, press the dial  
button.  
When the SD memory card has been formatted, the  
following message appears:  
To write set data on an SD memory card  
1
Navigate the menu to the <SD CARD READ/WRITE>  
screen.  
To select a file number  
2
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
option W.SELECT. Then, press the dial button.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
The card will not be formatted if the following message  
appears when the jog dial button is pressed:  
  
  
  
  
  
Error message  
CONFIG NG  
Remedy  
Insert an SD memory card.  
NO CARD  
(No SD memory card inserted.)  
3
Turn the jog dial button to select a desired number (1 -  
8). Then, press the dial button.  
CONFIG NG  
ERROR  
The card may be defective.  
Replace the card.  
(SD memory card cannot be  
formatted.)  
To give the selected file a title  
CONFIG NG  
Remove the card and cancel the  
protect.  
4
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
option TITLE.  
WRITE PROTECT  
(SD memory card is write-  
protected.)  
  
CONFIG NG  
Example: The SD memory card  
is not accessible because it is  
being played back.  
After the operation in process,  
format the card.  
CANNOT ACCESS  
(SD memory card not  
accessible).  
  
  
  
  
  
  
5
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
The settings menu disappears and the status of the unit  
is indicated at the top and bottom of the viewfinder  
screen.  
  
  
  
  
  
Note  
5
Press the jog dial button. This moves the arrow (cursor)  
to the entry area, putting the unit in entry mode.  
When an SD memory card is inserted or removed with  
the <SD CARD READ/WRITE> screen open, the titles  
of data on the card cannot be updated.  
  
Move the cursor to the option TITLE READ and press  
the jog dial button. The titles of the data will be updated.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data  
91  
6
Turn the jog dial button until a desired character  
appears.  
The data will not be written if any of the following messages  
appears when the jog dial button is pressed:  
The characters that appear are switched in the following  
order:  
Error message  
WRITE NG  
Remedy  
Insert an SD memory card.  
NO CARD  
Space:  
(No SD memory card inserted.)  
Ð
Alphabetical characters:  
Ð
Numerals:  
Ð
Symbols:  
A to Z  
0 to 9  
', >, <, /, -  
WRITE NG  
The card has not been  
formatted using the unit.  
Replace the card.  
FORMAT ERROR  
(SD memory card not properly  
formatted.)  
WRITE NG  
ERROR  
The card may be defective.  
Replace the card.  
(SD memory card not writable.)  
7
8
Press the jog dial button to accept a desired character.  
WRITE NG  
Remove the card and disable  
the protect.  
WRITE PROTECT  
(SD memory card write-  
protected.)  
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
next digit (clockwise), and repeat steps 6 - 7 to set  
characters (up to 8 characters).  
WRITE NG  
It is impossible to access the SD  
memory card while the card is in  
use. After completion of the  
respective operations, perform  
the write operation again.  
CANNOT ACCESS  
(SD memory card not  
accessible.)  
To write data on a selected file  
9
When the title is set, turn the jog dial button to move the  
arrow (cursor) to : .  
WRITE NG  
CARD FULL  
(SD memory card has no free  
space.)  
The card is not writable because  
it has no free space. Delete  
unwanted files or replace the  
card with a new one.  
  
  
  
13 Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
YES. Then, press the dial button.  
  
  
  
  
When the data has been written, the following message  
appears:  
  
  
  
  
  
  
10 Press the jog dial button to return the arrow (cursor) to  
the option TITLE.  
  
11 Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
option WRITE.  
12 Press the jog dial button to display the following  
14 To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
The settings menu disappears and the status of the unit  
is indicated at the top and bottom of the viewfinder  
screen.  
message:  
Notes  
The <SD CARD R/W SELECT> screen can be used to  
select the type of the menu to be written on the SD  
memory card.  
  
  
It is possible to overwrite a setup file stored by a different  
device with a new setup file from this unit. Note that if the  
file is overwritten, the original setup file from the other  
device will be lost.  
  
  
We recommend managing the respective SD memory  
cards on the respective devices independently.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data  
92  
6
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
YES. Then, press the dial button.  
To read data on an SD memory card  
When the data has been read, the following message  
appears:  
1
Navigate the menu to the <SD CARD READ/WRITE>  
screen.  
To select a file number  
2
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
menu option R.SELECT. Then, press the dial button.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
The data will not be read if any of the following messages  
appears when the jog dial button is pressed:  
  
  
  
  
  
Error message  
READ NG  
Remedy  
Insert an SD memory card.  
NO CARD  
(No SD memory card inserted.)  
3
Turn the jog dial button to select a desired number (1 -  
8). Then, press the dial button.  
READ NG  
The card has not been  
formatted using the unit.  
Replace the card.  
FORMAT ERROR  
(SD memory card not properly  
formatted.)  
To read data on a selected file  
READ NG  
NO FILE  
Write file data.  
(No file found.)  
4
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
option READ.  
READ NG  
Only data written with the unit is  
readable.  
ERROR  
(SD memory card not  
readable.)  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
READ NG  
Example: The SD memory card  
is not accessible because it is  
being played back.  
After the operation in process,  
read data.  
CANNOT ACCESS  
(SD memory card not  
accessible.)  
  
  
  
  
  
7
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
The settings menu will be replaced by status indications  
for the unit.  
5
Press the jog dial button to display the following  
message:  
  
  
  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data  
93  
How to Use the User Data  
It is possible to write the settings data into the user area of  
the internal memory of the unit, or to read data written in this  
area.  
This data allows you to quickly reproduce an optimum setup  
state.  
2
3
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
option READ USER DATA.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
To write data, go to the <INITIALIZE> screen from the FILE  
page. To read the written user data, go to the <SCENE>  
screen from the FILE page.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
To write settings data in the user area  
1
2
Navigate the menu to the <INITIALIZE> screen.  
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
option WRITE USER DATA.  
Press the jog dial button to display the following  
message:  
  
  
  
  
  
  
3
4
Press the jog dial button to display the following  
message:  
4
5
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
YES. Then, press the dial button.  
The data written in the user area of the internal memory  
of the unit is read to complete the setting.  
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
The set user data may be also read without navigating the  
menu.  
  
  
1
2
Turn off the POWER switch.  
  
Position the WHITE BAL switch at [PRST].  
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
YES. Then, press the dial button.  
This writes the settings data into the user area of the  
internal memory of the unit.  
5
1
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
To read written user data  
Navigate the menu to the <SCENE> screen.  
a
a. WHITE BAL switch  
3
With the AUTO W/B BAL switch flipped up, turn on the  
POWER switch.  
This resets all settings for USER menu options to their  
defaults.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data  
94  
How to Use Scene File Data  
It is possible to write the settings data into the scene file area  
of the internal memory of the unit, or to read data written in  
this area. 16 types of scene files are available. This data  
allows you to quickly reproduce an optimum setup state.  
7
8
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
YES. Then, press the dial button.  
This writes the setting data into the scene file area of the  
unit internal memory.  
To use the scene file data, go to the <SCENE> screen from  
the FILE page.  
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
To write settings data for scene files  
1
2
Navigate the menu to the SCENE screen.  
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
SCENE SEL option.  
3
Press the jog dial button to blink scene file numbers.  
Then, turn the dial button to select a desired scene file  
number (1 to 16).  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
4
5
Press the jog dial button to accept the scene file.  
Turn the jog dial button to return the arrow (cursor) to  
the option WRITE.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
6
Press the jog dial button to display the following  
message:  
  
  
  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data  
95  
To read settings data for scene files  
To return data for scene files to their defaults  
Navigate the menu to the <SCENE> screen.  
1
2
Navigate the menu to the <SCENE> screen.  
1
2
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
option SCENE SEL.  
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
option SCENE SEL.  
3
Press the jog dial button to blink scene file numbers.  
Then, turn the dial button to select a desired scene file  
number (1 to 16).  
3
Press the jog dial button to blink scene file numbers.  
Then, turn the dial button to select the scene file that  
you want to reset (1 to 16).  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
4
5
Press the jog dial button to accept the scene file.  
4
5
Press the jog dial button to accept the scene file.  
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
READ option.  
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
option RESET.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
6
Press the jog dial button to display the following  
message:  
6
Press the jog dial button to display the following  
message:  
  
  
  
  
  
  
7
8
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
YES. Then, press the dial button.  
The data stored in the scene file area of the internal  
memory of the unit is read to complete the setting.  
7
8
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
YES. Then, press the dial button.  
The data stored in the scene file area of the internal  
memory of the unit is reset to the defaults.  
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data  
96  
10 Press the jog dial button to display the following  
To title settings data for scene files  
message:  
1
2
Navigate the menu to the <SCENE> screen.  
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
TITLE item.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
11 Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
YES. Then, press the dial button.  
This writes the title into the scene file area of the unit  
internal memory.  
3
4
Press the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
the title entry area, putting the unit in entry mode.  
12 To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
Turn the jog dial button until a desired character  
appears.  
The characters that appear are switched in the following  
order:  
Space:  
Ð
Alphabetical characters:  
Ð
Numerals:  
Ð
Symbols:  
A to Z  
0 to 9  
', >, <, /, -  
5
6
Press the jog dial button to accept a desired character.  
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
next digit (clockwise), and repeat steps 4 - 5 to set  
characters (up to 8 characters).  
7
8
9
When the title is set, turn the jog dial button to move the  
cursor to : .  
Press the jog dial button to return the arrow (cursor) to  
the options TITLE.  
Turn the jog dial button to return the arrow (cursor) to  
the option WRITE.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data  
97  
Resetting Menu Option Settings to Defaults  
The menu settings can be reset to their defaults.  
To reset the settings to their defaults, select the menu option  
  
READ FACTORY DATA in the <INITIALIZE> screen on the  
FILE page.  
  
  
All settings will be reset to their defaults.  
Note  
This operation does not delete the scene file, lens file, and  
the information stored as the user data.  
Lens file  
The built-in memory of the unit can store 64 sets of lens files.  
On the SD memory card, 8 titles for 8 sets of lens files in a  
table (total 64 sets) can be written.  
The following data are recorded on the lens file.  
Title name  
White shading correction value  
Flare compensation value  
RB gain offset correction value  
How to provide lens files  
Adjustment of white shading  
Adjustment of RB gain offset  
For the white shading adjustment, refer to [Adjusting the  
Lens White Shading] (page 112)  
For correcting changes in white balance that may occur  
when replacing the lens.  
1
2
Mount the lens as standard on the unit.  
Adjustment of the flare  
Shoot the grayscale chart with appropriate lighting  
(2000 lx, 3200 K are preferable).  
Using the menu operations, open the <LENS FILE ADJ>  
screen from the MAINTENANCE page and adjust the flare in  
the LENS R FLARE item, the LENS G FLARE item and the  
LENS B FLARE item.  
3
4
Set the WHITE BAL switch to the [A] position.  
  
Adjust the lens aperture so that the white window at the  
center of the grayscale chart is about 80%.  
  
  
  
5
6
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to [AWB] to adjust the  
white balance automatically.  
  
  
  
Measure the signal level of RGB by using the waveform  
monitor (WFM).  
7
8
Replace the lens to one where a lens file is provided.  
Example of the chart for flare adjustment  
Adjust the lens aperture so that the signal level of Gch is  
the same signal level as the one obtained in 6 above.  
9
Using the menu operations, open the <LENS FILE  
ADJ> screen from the MAINTENANCE page and set the  
RB GAIN CTRL RESET to “ON”.  
10 Adjust the signal level of Rch to be the same as Gch in  
0.1H  
0.1L  
the LENS R GAIN OFFSET item.  
11 In the same way, adjust the signal level of Bch to be the  
same as Gch in the LENS B GAIN OFFSET item.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data  
98  
 
To save the lens file into the built-in memory  
7
Press the jog dial button again and turn it until the  
character to be set is displayed.  
Select the file No.  
When the button is turned, the character displayed is  
switched in the following sequence:  
1
Using the menu operations, open the <LENS FILE>  
screen from the FILE page.  
Space:  
Ð
2
3
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
FILE SELECT item.  
Alphabetical characters:  
Ð
Numerals:  
Ð
Symbols:  
A to Z  
0 to 9  
Press the jog dial button and the file number will flash.  
Turn the jog dial button to select the file (1 to 64) to be  
recorded.  
', >, <, /, -, . , x  
8
9
Press the jog dial button to enter the character.  
  
  
  
  
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
next position (right), and repeat steps 7 and 8 to set the  
characters (maximum of 12).  
  
  
  
  
10 When the title has been input, turn the jog dial button to  
  
  
  
  
  
move the arrow (cursor) to the : position.  
  
  
  
  
  
4
Press the jog dial button to enter the file number.  
   
Give a title to the selected file.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
5
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
TITLE item.  
  
11 When the jog dial button is pressed, the arrow (cursor)  
  
  
  
returns to the TITLE item.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
6
When the jog dial button is pressed, the arrow (cursor)  
moves to the title input area, and the input mode is  
established.  
  
12 Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
WRITE position.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data  
99  
 
13 When the jog dial button is pressed, the following  
14 Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
YES, and press the jog dial button.  
message appears.  
The current white shading correction value, the flare  
compensation value, and the RB gain offset correction  
value are stored in the built-in memory of the unit.  
Note  
The values will not be stored in the unit’s internal  
memory if another menu screen is selected without  
executing WRITE or if the menu is exited.  
  
  
  
15 Press the MENU button.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays showing  
the unit’s current statuses appear at the top and bottom  
of the viewfinder screen.  
To read the lens file from the builtin memory  
1
2
3
Using menu operations, open the <LENS FILE> screen  
from the FILE page.  
6
When the jog dial button is pressed, the following  
message appears.  
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
FILE SELECT item.  
Press the jog dial button and the file number will flash.  
Turn the jog dial button to select the file (1 to 64) to be  
read.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
7
8
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to  
YES, and press the jog dial button.  
The recorded correction values for the white shading,  
flare, and RB gain offset are read.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
Press the MENU button.  
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays showing  
the unit’s current statuses appear at the top and bottom  
of the viewfinder screen.  
4
5
Press the jog dial button to enter the file number.  
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
READ item.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data  
100  
   
To write in and read out the lens file to/from the SD memory card  
The contents of the 8 lens files stored in the unit’s internal  
memory can be saved onto an SD memory card as card files  
Saving lens files on the SD memory card  
under a single title. A total of 8 titles can be saved on an SD  
memory card.  
Select the card file No.  
Furthermore, the 8 lens files saved under one title on an SD  
memory card can be loaded into the unit’s internal memory.  
1
Using menu operations, open the <LENS FILE CARD  
R/W> screen from the FILE page.  
The correlation between the lens files stored in the internal  
memory and lens files saved on an SD memory card is  
shown below.  
When the message “FORMAT ERROR” appears in the  
upper right corner, format the SD memory card with the  
unit. SD cards can be formatted through the CARD  
CONFIG menu option on the <SD CARD READ/  
WRITE> screen. For more information, see [Handling  
SD memory cards] (page 90).  
2
3
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
CARD FILE SELECT item.  
Internal memory  
Up to 64 sets of the lens file  
can be stored in the built-in  
memory.  
64 lens files  
Press the jog dial button and the card file number will  
flash. Turn the jog dial button to select the file (1 to 8) to  
be recorded.  
ꢀꢀꢀ  
  
  
  
  
  
The contents of 8 lens files  
can be saved onto an SD  
memory card as card files  
under one title or they can be  
loaded from the SD memory  
card.  
  
  
  
  
  
Card files  
Title 1  
Title 2  
Title 3  
Title 4  
4
Press the jog dial button to enter the file number.  
Give a title to the selected card file.  
Title 5  
Title 6  
Title 7  
Title 8  
5
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
TITLE item.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
A total of 64 lens files (8 lens files 8 titles) can be saved on an SD  
memory card.  
6
When the jog dial button is pressed, the arrow (cursor)  
moves to the title input area, and the input mode is  
established.  
Now perform step 7 on page 99 through step 15 on  
page 100.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data  
101  
Loading lens files from the SD memory card  
1
2
3
Using menu operations, open the <LENS FILE CARD  
R/W> screen from the FILE page.  
Turn the jog dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the  
CARD FILE SELECT item.  
Press the jog dial button and the card file number will  
flash. Turn the jog dial button to select the file (1 to 8) to  
be read.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
4
Press the jog dial button to enter the file number.  
Now perform steps 5 through 8 on page 100.  
Note  
The card file titles on the SD memory card are displayed on  
the <LENS FILE CARD R/W> screen, but the titles of the  
lens files contained in the card files are not shown on this  
screen.  
To display these titles, load the files, and check the titles on  
the <LENS FILE> screen.  
The lens files in the unit’s internal memory will be rewritten  
as the loaded lens files at this time. For this reason, save the  
lens files in the internal memory onto the SD memory card  
first to back them up before loading them on the SD memory  
card.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Handling data  
102  
Chromatic Aberration Compensation (CAC)  
CAC is a function that automatically corrects registration errors mainly caused by slight chromatic aberration, which cannot be  
corrected with lenses, and minimizes color weepage on the images.  
What is the chromatic aberration?  
CAC operation  
Chromatic aberration means magnification ratio chromatic  
aberration. Magnification ratio chromatic aberration is  
caused by differences in the red (R), green (G), and blue (B)  
refractive indexes of a lens. The lens itself corrects  
chromatic aberration but the astigmatism remains in the  
surrounding area in particular. The zooming ratio, iris, and  
focal distance involves complicated chromatic aberration  
phenomena in a zoom lens. Images have registration errors.  
For the 4 lenses listed on the left  
1
2
3
Install the lens on the unit and connect the lens  
connector.  
Open the <CAC ADJ> screen on the MAINTENANCE  
page.  
Turn on the CAC CONTROL.  
If the lens product number recorded on the unit  
coincides with the product number of the connected  
lens, the CAC data stored in the unit are read out  
automatically.  
B
G
R
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
Chromatic aberration compensation function  
Confirmation of the CAC operation status  
To correct the chromatic aberration, record the chromatic  
aberration characteristics of the lens for the zooming ratio,  
iris, and focal distance in the unit and connect a lens suitable  
for these characteristics. Then perform the correction in  
accordance with the zooming ratio, iris, and focus distance  
of the lens.  
1
2
When the menu is not displayed on the viewfinder  
screen, press the MODE CHECK button.  
If letters of the “CAC” are indicated at the left top of the  
viewfinder screen, the CAC is operating properly. If the  
letters of “CAC” are not indicated, the CAC is not  
operating.  
The CAC data for the following 4 kinds of lenses are stored  
in the unit at the time of shipment from the factory.  
Open <VF INDICATOR2> screen on the VF page and  
set the menu option CAC to “ON”, and then the letters of  
“CAC” are indicated in the left top of the viewfinder  
screen.  
Indication on the unit  
HA166.3BERM-M58  
HA227.8BERM-M58  
HJ17e7.6B IASE  
Supporting lens model No.  
HA166.3BERM-M58  
HA227.8BERM-M58  
HJ17E7.6B IASE  
  
HJ22e7.6B IASE  
HJ22E7.6B IASE  
  
  
  
  
  
  
Note  
   
After the release of this unit, visit our Web site at the address  
given below for details on new lenses compatible with this  
function and any changes in this function.  
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Chromatic Aberration Compensation (CAC)  
103  
 
To read the CAC FILE from an SD memory card  
7
Select YES using the jog dial button and then press the  
jog dial button.  
The CAC file for the lens selected in step 4 is recorded  
in memory on the unit.  
If EMPTY is selected in MEM STORE NO.: EMPTY/1/  
2... at this time, data are recorded in available space of  
the CAC file numbers on the unit. If “1” is selected, the  
data will overwrite the contents of CAC file No. 1.  
1
Insert the SD memory card with the CAC file  
downloaded from our support website.  
For downloading, refer to the following URL.  
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/  
2
3
Open the <CAC FILE CARD READ> screen from the  
FILE page via the menu operation.  
If the following messages are displayed when the jog  
dial button is pressed, the data cannot be read out.  
Select TITLE READ using the jog dial button and then  
press the jog dial button.  
The lens product number is indicated in the TITLE  
column.  
Error message  
READ NG  
Measures  
Insert an SD memory card.  
NO CARD  
(No SD memory card is  
inserted)  
  
READ NG  
NO FILE  
(No file is available)  
Select a file containing data and  
perform the read operation  
again.  
  
  
  
  
READ NG  
ERROR  
(Data cannot be read out)  
Insert an SD memory card  
again, and then perform the  
read operation again.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
READ NG  
It is impossible to access the SD  
memory card while the card is in  
use. After completion of the  
respective operations, perform  
the read operation again.  
  
  
  
  
CANNOT ACCESS  
(It is impossible to access the  
data)  
READ NG  
FILE DATA INVALID  
(File data are abnormal)  
The written file data have errors.  
Use the proper file data.  
4
5
6
Select CARD FILE SELECT using the jog dial button  
and then press the jog dial button.  
READ NG  
FILE MEMORY FULL  
(Memory is full)  
The memory is full, and new  
data cannot be written on it.  
Delete unnecessary CAC data  
and then perform the write  
operation again.  
Select the TITLE No. to be read and press the jog dial  
button.  
Select READ using the jog dial button and then press  
the jog dial button.  
The following screen is displayed.  
8
9
To store multiple CAC files in the unit, repeat steps 3 to  
7.  
  
  
To close the menu operation, press the MENU button.  
The setting menu disappears, and the current state of  
the unit is displayed.  
  
   
  
  
  
  
  
Notes  
  
  
  
  
  
  
The unit is capable of recording 32 CAC files. When the  
CAC file is full, delete any of the CAC files.  
While the SD memory card is inserted, the busy lamp for  
the SD memory card blinks, which is normal and not a  
malfunction.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Chromatic Aberration Compensation (CAC)  
104  
To delete the CAC file from the unit  
To delete the CAC file from the SD memory card  
1
Open <CAC ADJ> screen from the MAINTENANCE  
page using the menu operation.  
The following screen is displayed.  
1
2
Open <CAC FILE CARD READ> screen from the FILE  
page using the menu operation.  
The following screen is displayed.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
2
3
Select “OFF” in CAC CONTROL.  
Select TITLE READ using the jog dial button and then  
press the jog dial button.  
The lens product number is displayed in the TITLE part.  
Select the lens product number to be deleted in CAC  
FILE NO. using the jog dial button.  
3
4
5
Select CARD FILE SELECT using the jog dial button  
and then press the jog dial button.  
4
5
Press the jog dial button to fix the selected operation.  
Select CAC FILE DELETE using the jog dial button and  
then press the jog dial button.  
Select the TITLE No. of the CAC file to be deleted, and  
then press the jog dial button.  
6
When the following screen is displayed, move the arrow  
(cursor) to YES by turning the jog dial button and then  
press the jog dial button.  
Select DELETE using the jog dial button and then press  
the jog dial button.  
The following screen is displayed.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
6
Move the arrow (cursor) to YES by turning the jog dial  
button and then press the jog dial button.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Chromatic Aberration Compensation (CAC)  
105  
If the following messages are displayed when the jog dial  
button is pressed, the data cannot be deleted.  
When CAC file does not operate properly  
The following error messages are displayed in the viewfinder  
when CAC does not operate properly or CAC files cannot be  
read properly.  
Error message  
DELETE NG  
Measures  
Insert an SD memory card.  
NO CARD  
(No SD memory card is  
inserted)  
Error message  
Meanings  
Measures  
FILE MEMORY  
FULL  
When the CAC file is Read the CAC file in a  
read from the SD  
memory card to  
memory in the unit in  
EMPTY mode, the  
built-in memory is full.  
DELETE NG  
ERROR  
(Data cannot be deleted)  
It is assumed that the SD  
memory card is defective.  
Replace the card.  
mode other than  
EMPTY mode.  
DELETE NG  
WRITE PROTECT  
Eject the SD memory card and  
release write protection.  
(The SD card is write protected)  
CAC FILE DATA When the CAC  
NOT FOUND function is set to ON  
Read the CAC file that  
is applicable for the  
lens to be used.  
DELETE NG  
It is impossible to access the SD  
memory card while the card is in  
use. After completion of the  
respective operations, perform  
the delete operation again.  
and no CAC file  
applicable to the  
connected lens is  
available. This is  
displayed when the  
power of the unit is  
turned on.  
CANNOT ACCESS  
(It is impossible to access the  
data)  
DELETE NG  
NO FILE  
(No file is available)  
Select the file No. containing  
astigmatism files and perform  
the delete operation.  
CAC LENS DATA When the unit cannot This lens does not  
INVALID  
respond to the return support CAC  
data from the lens, or correction. Although it  
when any responses cannot execute CAC  
7
Move the arrow (cursor) to YES by turning the jog dial  
button and then press the jog dial button. When the  
write operation is completed, the following message is  
displayed.  
other than ones as  
correction, using this  
defined in the CAC file lens presents no  
are returned.  
problems.  
LENS  
Initialization of the  
Turn the focus/zoom  
INITIALIZE NOT lens position detection ring to through the  
COMPLETED  
(focus/zoom) in the  
encoder type is not  
completed yet.  
intermediate point of  
the operation range.  
Notes  
When lens optical accessories (converter lens,  
attachment) are installed, the CAC may not operate  
properly due to changes in the optical characteristics of  
the lens. In this case, turn off the CAC function.  
When focus servo is used with Canon lenses, data must  
be recorded after initialization in the automatic initialization  
mode. The state where the focus ring is moving may be  
recorded.  
  
When the CAC does not operate and no error message is  
displayed, the version of the software for the lens may be  
out of date and invalid. Please contact the lens  
manufacturer.  
Adjustments and Settings for Recording: Chromatic Aberration Compensation (CAC)  
106  
Preparation  
Power Supply  
A battery pack or an external DC power supply can be used as the unit’s power supply.  
Using a Battery Pack  
Battery packs from the following manufacturers can be used:  
Anton/Bauer  
IDX  
PACO  
Sony  
The type of the battery can be checked or changed through  
the menu screen on the viewfinder or on the monitor.  
Pressing the MODE CHECK button on the side of the unit  
displays the current type of the battery in the upper right  
corner of the viewfinder display.  
Navigate the menu to open the <BATTERY/P2CARD>  
screen from the MAIN OPERATION page. Then, through  
the BATTERY SELECT menu option, you can check and  
change the battery type.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
Notes  
Other batteries may be used by changing the menu  
setting, but system compatibility is not guaranteed.  
Charge the battery pack with the battery charger before  
using it. (Please refer to the battery charger’s instruction  
manual for information about charging.)  
Preparation: Power Supply  
107  
     
Mounting the Battery and Setting the Battery Type  
3
Setting the battery type.  
Using an Anton/Bauer Battery Pack  
Mount the Anton/Bauer battery pack.  
Select the battery type listed under BATTERY SELECT.  
Select BATTERY SELECT from the <BATTERY/  
P2CARD> screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.  
Please refer to [BATTERY SETTING1] (page 190) for  
more information.  
1
a
b
The following Anton/Bauer batteries can be used:  
PROPAC14  
TRIMPAC14  
HYTRON50  
HYTRON140  
DIONIC90  
DIONIC160  
c
a. Power supply output connector for lighting  
b. Anton/Bauer battery pack  
c. Lighting control switch  
<For your information>  
The Anton/Bauer battery holder includes both a power  
supply output connector for lighting and a lighting control  
switch, which are convenient when attaching a light. Please  
contact Anton/Bauer for information about the lighting  
system.  
2
Insert the battery and slide it in the direction of the  
arrow.  
d
d. Release lever  
<For your information>  
Removing the battery pack  
Completely push down and hold the release lever on the  
battery holder. Then, slide the battery pack in the  
opposite direction to the arrow while holding the lever  
down.  
Preparation: Power Supply  
108  
When using a V-mount type battery pack  
Using an NP-1 type battery pack  
Mount the V-mount adapter plate (optional).  
Fit the plate, sliding it in the manner shown in the  
illustration.  
CAUTION:  
These servicing instructions are for use by qualified  
service personnel only. To reduce the risk of fire or  
electric shock do not perform any servicing other than  
that contained in the operating instructions unless you  
are qualified to do so.  
1
Remove the battery holder.  
2
Mount the NP-1 type battery case on the unit.  
1
2
3
Tighten the mounting screws.  
Tighten the power contact screws.  
Insert the upper part of the removed cover in the  
direction of the arrow.  
4
Align the holes in the bottom part (metal part) of the  
cover with the holes in the case, and secure the  
cover with the screw.  
Note  
When mounting the battery holder, take care not to  
pinch the connection cord.  
a
3
Setting the battery type.  
Select the battery type listed under BATTERY SELECT.  
Select BATTERY SELECT from the <BATTERY/  
P2CARD> screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.  
When using another battery which cannot be selected  
using the BATTERY SELECT item setting, select  
“TYPE A” or “TYPE B”, and set the items that  
correspond to the characteristics of the battery.  
Please refer to [BATTERY SETTING2] (page 191) for  
more information.  
a. Battery case (for NP-1 type)  
Note  
For information about the V-mount adapter plate, please  
contact the store where you purchased the unit.  
Preparation: Power Supply  
109  
Use of the external DC power supply  
1
Connect the external DC power supply to the DC IN  
socket on the unit.  
Notes  
If both the battery pack and the external DC power  
supply are connected, the electric power is supplied  
from the external DC power supply. While the external  
DC power supply is used, the battery can be mounted  
and removed on/from the unit.  
When the external DC power supply is used, ensure  
that the power switch of the external DC power supply  
is turned on first and then the POWER switch on the  
unit is turned on. In the case of the reverse operation,  
a malfunction may occur on the unit since the output  
voltage of the external DC power supply is raised  
slowly.  
DC IN socket  
External DC power  
supply  
2
3
Turn on the power switch of the external DC power  
supply. (If the power switch is available on the external  
DC power supply.)  
Turn on the POWER switch on the unit.  
Inrush current is generated when the power of the  
unit is turned on. Insufficient power supply when  
turning on the power may cause a malfunction. We  
recommend using an external DC power supply with  
double the capacity of the total power consumption  
of the unit and any other connected device that is  
turned by interlocking with the power on of the unit  
(the viewfinder). Select the DC cord that is  
recommended for the external DC power supply.  
Confirm the pin arrangements of the DC output  
connector of the external DC power supply and the  
DC IN socket on the unit, and connect the proper  
polarities to each other.  
If the +12 V power supply is connected to the GND  
connector in error, it may cause a fire or failure of the  
unit.  
Pin No.  
Signal  
GND  
1
2, 3  
4
4
1
2
3
+12 V  
DC IN socket  
Preparation: Power Supply  
110  
Mounting the lens and Performing the Flange Back  
and White Shading Adjustments  
Mounting the Lens  
Adjusting the Lens Flange Back  
If images are not clearly focused at both telephoto and wide-  
angle positions during zoom operations, adjust the flange  
back (distance from the lens mounting surface to the image  
formation surface).  
Once adjusted, the flange back does not need to be re-  
adjusted as long as the same lens is mounted on the  
camera.  
1
Raise the lens clamping lever and remove the mount  
cap.  
a
Note  
Please also refer to the lens instruction manual for directions  
on adjustment and locations of individual lens parts.  
b
a. Lens clamping lever  
b. Mount cap  
1
2
Mount the lens on the camera.  
Make sure you connect the lens cable.  
2
To mount the lens, align the indentation at the top center  
of the lens mount with the center mark of the lens.  
Set the lens iris to manual, and fully open the iris.  
c
Approximately 3 m  
c. Mark  
3
4
Lower the lens clamping lever to clamp the lens.  
3
4
Place the flange back adjustment chart about 3 m from  
the lens and adjust the lighting on the chart to obtain an  
appropriate video output level.  
If the video level is too high, use the filters or the shutter.  
Loosen the F.f (Flange focus) ring clamping screw.  
Note  
Secure the cable through the cable clamp, and plug it  
into the LENS connector.  
F.b (Flange back) may be indicated on some lenses.  
5
6
7
Set the zoom ring to the telephoto position, either  
manually or by electric drive.  
Aim the lens at the flange back adjustment chart and  
turn the distance ring to bring the chart into focus.  
Set the zoom ring to the wide-angle position and turn  
the F.f ring to bring the chart into focus.  
d
d. LENS connector  
While focusing, take care not to move the distance ring.  
5
Adjust the lens flange back.  
Notes  
Please refer to the lens instruction manual for guidance on  
lens handling.  
When the lens is removed, install the mount cap to protect  
the device.  
Preparation: Mounting the lens and Performing the Flange Back and White Shading Adjustments  
111  
 
8
9
Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the lens is in focus at both the  
telephoto and wide-angle positions.  
7
Set the lens aperture control to manual, and adjust it so  
that the zebra pattern covers the whole screen.  
Check that the lens aperture is between F4 and F10.  
Firmly tighten the F.f ring clamping screw.  
Adjusting the Lens White Shading  
Notes  
The zebra pattern will not cover the whole screen if  
there is any unevenness in the lighting. In this case,  
make adjustments to the position of the lighting, etc.  
Make adjustments to the position of the lighting, etc.  
also when the lens aperture is not between F4 and  
F10.  
Method to correct the waveform to be more flat by  
combining the sawtooth-shaped waveform and the  
parabola waveform when watching the respective  
waveforms of R, G and B of the video signals.  
Be absolutely sure to leave the electronic shutter at  
OFF.  
Note  
Coloring may occur in the vertical direction near where the  
lens aperture is open even when the white shading has been  
adjusted. This is something that is inherent to lenses and  
optical systems and is therefore not indicative of a failure or  
malfunctioning.  
8
9
1Set the WHITE BAL selector switch to [A] or [B], and  
use the AUTO W/B BAL switch to adjust the white  
balance automatically (AWB).  
2Use the AUTO W/B BAL switch to adjust the black  
balance automatically (ABB).  
3Again, use the AUTO W/B BAL switch to adjust the  
white balance automatically (AWB).  
1
2
3
4
Attach the lens to the camera.  
At this stage, do not forget to connect the lens cable.  
Repeat step 7.  
Set the electronic shutter to OFF and the gain to “L  
(0 dB).”  
10 Using the menu operation, open the <WHITE  
SHADING> screen from the MAINTENANCE page and  
a range of items from R H SAW item to B V PARA item,  
so that the waveform is more flat.  
If the extender is attached to the lens, release the  
extender function.  
Perform a menu operation to open the <VF DISPLAY>  
screen from the VF page, check that the settings  
selected for the ZEBRA1 DETECT item, ZEBRA2  
DETECT item and ZEBRA2 item match the settings  
shown in the figure below. If they differ, make the  
appropriate changes, and then close the menu screen.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
H SAW  
  
  
   
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
Before  
After correction  
correction  
5
6
Set the ZEBRA switch on the viewfinder to [ON].  
H PARA  
Shoot a white sheet of paper with no unevenness of  
color.  
11 When an extender is fitted to the lens, switch on the  
extender function, and repeat steps 7-9. The unit stores,  
as one lens file data item, two different correction  
values, one for when the extender is fitted and the other  
for when it is not fitted. When a ratio converter is  
inserted, the correction value for the latter correction  
value is used.  
Note  
Since fluorescent lights, mercury lamps and other such  
kinds of lighting tend to flicker, use a light source which  
is free from flicker such as sunlight or a halogen lamp.  
Preparation: Mounting the lens and Performing the Flange Back and White Shading Adjustments  
112  
 
When making the white shading correction, make the  
adjustment while observing the R, G, and B waveforms in  
the horizontal and vertical directions with the waveform  
monitor.  
This now completes the white shading adjustments.  
The adjustment values are now stored in the non-volatile  
memory so that even when the unit’s power is turned off,  
there will be no further need to perform the white shading  
adjustment.  
Preparation: Mounting the lens and Performing the Flange Back and White Shading Adjustments  
113  
Preparing for Audio Input  
Take the following steps to prepare the camera for connecting audio input devices.  
When Using the Front Microphone  
The unit can be equipped with the AJ-MC900G stereo  
microphone kit (optional).  
3
Connect the microphone cable to the MIC IN jack on the  
camera.  
1
Open the microphone holder.  
b
b. MIC IN jack  
4
Set the AUDIO IN switch to [FRONT] depending on the  
audio channel to be recorded.  
2
Mount the microphone and tighten the clamping screw.  
The microphone must be attached with the UP mark on  
the microphone facing up.  
c
a
c. AUDIO IN switch  
a. Clamping screw  
When Using a Wireless Receiver  
3
When using a 2-channel wireless receiver, select  
“DUAL” in the WIRELESS TYPE menu option. The  
menu option WIRELESS TYPE can be found in the  
<MIC/AUDIO2> screen on the MAIN OPERATION  
page.  
When Using the Unislot Wireless Receiver  
1
Remove the cover to insert the wireless receiver and  
secure it with the screws.  
2
Set the AUDIO IN switch to [W.L.] depending on the  
audio channel to be recorded.  
Preparation: Preparing for Audio Input  
114  
   
When Using Audio Devices  
1
2
3
Connect the audio device to the AUDIO IN jack with the  
XLR cable.  
Set the AUDIO IN switch to [REAR] for the channel to  
which the XLR cable is connected.  
Set the LINE/MIC/+48V selector switch on the rear  
panel to [LINE].  
a
c
b
a. LINE/MIC/+48V selector switch  
b. AUDIO IN switch  
c. AUDIO IN jack  
Mounting the Camera on a Tripod  
When mounting the camera on a tripod, use the tripod adapter supplied with the camera.  
Removing the Camera from the Tripod Adapter  
1
Mount the tripod adapter on the tripod.  
a
c
b
e
d
c. Tripod adapter  
d. Red lever  
e. Black lever  
a. Tripod adapter  
b. Pan head  
While holding the red lever down, move the black lever in the  
direction of the arrow, and slide the camera backward to  
remove it.  
Note  
Select an appropriate hole in the adapter, taking into  
account the center of gravity of the camera and tripod  
adapter combined.  
Also, make sure that the diameter of the selected hole  
matches the diameter of the pan head screw.  
Note  
If the tripod adapter pin does not return to its original position  
after the camera has been removed, hold the red lever down  
and move the black lever in the direction of the arrow again,  
in order to return the pin to its original position.  
Please note that the camera cannot be mounted if the pin  
remains in the center.  
2
Mount the camera on the tripod adapter.  
Slide the camera forward along the grooves until you  
hear a “click”.  
Preparation: Mounting the Camera on a Tripod  
115  
 
Attaching the Shoulder Strap  
To detach the shoulder strap, first open the hooks, then  
detach the strap.  
Shoulder strap  
Note  
Make sure that the shoulder strap is securely attached.  
Press to open the  
hook.  
Attaching the Rain Cover  
When using the SHAN-RC700 Rain Cover  
a
b
b
a. Tighten the cord  
b. Secure with the surface fastener  
Preparation: Attaching the Shoulder Strap  
116  
   
Connection of the remote control unit  
(AJ-RC10G)  
It is possible to control some of the functions remotely by  
Recording and playback Operations in the  
remote control mode  
connecting the remote control unit AJ-RC10G (optional).  
When AJ-RC10G is connected to the REMOTE connector  
on the unit and the power switches of both of the unit and  
AJ-RC10G are turned on, the unit automatically enters the  
remote control mode.  
When the remote control is connected, recording and  
playback can be controlled through both the unit and the AJ-  
RC10G.  
The remote control mode is released when AJ-RC10G is  
removed or the power for the AJ-RC10G is turned off.  
Notes  
The state that was adjusted by connecting AJ-RC10G is  
stored in the unit. Not to store the adjusted state in the  
unit, open the FUNCTION MENU of AJ-RC10G to set the  
RC DATA SAVE item to “OFF”.  
When the dedicated cable is connected or removed,  
ensure that the POWER switches on both the main unit  
and AJ-RC10G are turned off.  
Use Ver 1.11-00-000 or a later version of AJ-RC10G.  
See the P2 support page on the following website for  
information about upgrades to AJ-RC10G.  
Switch functions in the remote control mode  
In the remote control mode, the following switches and  
buttons on the unit are disabled.  
SHUTTER switch  
MENU button  
Jog dial button  
GAIN switch  
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch  
WHITE BAL switch  
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/  
USER MAIN button  
USER 1 button  
USER 2 button  
b
AJ-RC10G  
a
a. REMOTE connector  
b. Dedicated cable  
Notes for the remote control unit  
When this unit and AJ-RC10G are connected, the following  
functions differ from those described in the operating  
instructions that accompany AJ-RC10G.  
A. KNEE ON button  
When “DRS” has been selected in the AUTO KNEE SW  
menu option of this unit, this button can be used to  
switch DRS on/off. This button is lit when DRS is on and  
not lit when DRS is off.  
The menu option AUTO KNEE SW can be found in the  
<SW MODE> screen on the CAM OPERATION page.  
Preparation: Connection of the remote control unit (AJ-RC10G)  
117  
   
CHARA ON button  
SHUTTER menu  
This button is used to select whether to superimpose  
characters on the video signal output to the MON OUT  
connector of this unit. Note that the MON OUT  
CHARACTER switch of this unit does not function when  
the AJ-RC10G is connected.  
“S.S2” can be selected in MODE.  
The variable range for this is 1/1.0 - 1/250.0.  
The values which can be selected in SPED differ  
depending on the settings of this unit.  
When “FIX” has been selected in MODE, the options  
available in SPED are as follows.  
Scene file  
Scene files created on other types of device cannot be  
read. When an attempt is made to read such a file, AJ-  
RC10G displays “NG” on the liquid crystal screen.  
Menu option  
1/50, 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,  
1/2000, HALF, 180.0d, 172.8d, 144.0d, 120.0d,  
90.0d, 45.0d  
The values that can be selected in SPED differ  
depending on the settings of the SYSTEM MODE  
menu option in this unit.  
SYNCRO SCAN DISP is added to the 2nd layer.  
When “S.S” has been selected in MODE, it is possible  
to select between SEC and DEG as units for the  
values displayed in SPED. The changes to the units  
are reflected in this unit.  
GAMMA menu  
The options available in GAMMA-MODE-SEL are as  
follows.  
HD, SD, F-LIKE1, F-LIKE2, F-LIKE3, FILM REC,  
VIDEO REC  
DYMC-LVL and BSR-LVL are added to the 4th layer.  
The variable ranges for these are as follows.  
DYMC-LVL: 200% - 600%  
When “S.S” has been selected in MODE, the variable  
ranges of SPED are as follows.  
BSR-LVL: 00% - 30%  
Note, however, that these values can only be changed  
when “FILM REC” has been selected in GAMMA-  
MODE-SEL.  
For SEC: 1/1.0 - 1/7200 (selectable values differ  
depending on the settings of this unit)  
For DEG: 3.0d - 350.0d  
V-KNSLP and V-KNPNT are added to the 5th layer.  
The variable ranges for these are as follows.  
V-KNSLP: 150% - 600%  
SKIN DTL menu  
The options available in OUTPUT are as follows.  
MONI, SDI AB  
V-KNPNT: 30% - 107%  
A zebra is added to the colors of the table selected in  
SDTL.  
SCORG of the 3rd layer changes to SKIN DTL  
EFFECT. The variable range for this is 0 - 31.  
FUNC menu  
Note, however, that these values can only be changed  
when “VIDEO REC” has been selected in GAMMA-  
MODE-SEL.  
WHITE menu  
The variable range of COLR-TEMP-PRE, TEMP-A  
and TEMP-B is 2300K- 9900K.  
KNEE menu  
CHROMA LEVEL is added to the 5th layer.  
The variable range for this is OFF/–99% - +40%.  
HI-COLOR LVL is added to the 6th layer.  
The variable range for this is 1 - 32.  
The options available in SELECT of the 4th layer are  
as follows.  
INH, I.OVR, S.BLK, B.GAMMA, Y GET, DRS,  
ASSIST, C.TEMP, FRATE, VFR, VF GAM, AUDIO  
CH1, AUDIO CH2, REC SW, RET SW, PRE REC,  
SLOT SEL, PC MODE  
Note, however, that the C.TEMP function will not work  
when assigned to a user button on AJ-RC10G.  
The variable range of BLK-GAMMA of the 5th layer is  
–8 - 8.  
RANGE is added next to BLK-GAMMA of the 5th  
layer. The variable range for this is 1 - 3.  
FRAME-RATE is added to the 6th layer.  
The variable range for this is 1 - 60. Note, however,  
that the variable range will differ depending on the  
settings of this unit.  
Attaching the Front Audio Level Control Knob  
If you use the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control frequently,  
attach the accessory knob so that it can be easily operated.  
Remove the screw in the center of the FRONT AUDIO  
LEVEL control, and attach the accessory knob (included)  
using the screw (included). When attaching the knob, be  
sure to align the marks on the control with the marks on the  
knob.  
a
c
d
e
b
a. FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control  
b. Screw  
c. Marks  
d. Knob (included)  
e. Screw (included)  
Preparation: Attaching the Front Audio Level Control Knob  
118  
 
Connection of the external switch  
It is possible to draw 1.5 A current from the DC OUT  
connector of the unit.  
Recording start/stop can be controlled by connecting an  
external switch to this connector.  
Since a tally lamp can be used by connecting an LED to this  
connector, it is useful for shooting video when fixing the  
camera on a crane.  
DC OUT connector  
Connector at the cable side  
HR10A-7P-4P(73)  
(Hirose Denki)  
4
3
1
2
LED  
Resistance  
Max. 50 mA  
Recording start/stop  
1: GND  
2: TALLY OUT  
Open collector output on the unit side.  
TALLY ON:  
TALLY OFF:  
Low impedance  
High impedance  
3: Recording start/stop switch  
This is connected in parallel to the REC START/STOP button  
on the unit or the VTR button on the lens.  
4: +12 V  
Preparation: Connection of the external switch  
119  
   
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails  
A clip is a data group that includes the images and sounds  
created from one shooting session, together with additional  
information such as text memos and meta data.  
The following manipulations can be performed using the  
cursor and SET buttons, while checking the images  
displayed on the LCD monitor:  
Playback, delete, copy or restore the clip.  
Add or delete a shot mark and a text memo on the clip  
thumbnail.  
Copy part of a clip by using the text memo.  
Change the thumbnail image.  
Format P2 cards and SD memory cards.  
Uploading and editing clip metadata from the SD memory  
card  
Thumbnail Manipulations Overview  
Thumbnail screens are configured as follows:  
THUMBNAIL  
OPERATION  
PROPERTY  
DELETE  
ALL CLIP  
CLIP PROPERTY  
FORMAT  
SAME FORMAT CLIPS  
REPAIR CLIP  
RE-CONNECTION  
COPY  
SELECTED CLIPS  
MARKED CLIPS  
TEXT MEMO CLIPS  
EXCH. THUMBNAIL  
DEVICE SETUP  
EXIT  
CARD STATUS  
SLOT CLIPS  
SETUP  
EXIT  
ALL HIDE  
MARKER IND.  
TEXT MEMO IND.  
WIDE IND.  
PROXY IND.  
DATA DISPLAY  
DATE FORMAT  
THUMBNAIL SIZE  
PLAYBACK RESUME  
THUMBNAIL INIT  
EXIT  
DEVICES  
PROPERTY SETUP  
EXIT  
HDD  
META DATA  
EXPORT  
LOAD  
EXPLORE  
RECORD  
FORMAT  
SETUP  
EXIT  
USER CLIP NAME  
INITIALIZE  
PROPERTY  
LANGUAGE  
EXIT  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Manipulations Overview  
120  
     
Thumbnail Screen  
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail  
1. Display Mode  
screen on the LCD monitor. Pressing the THUMBNAIL  
button again returns the display to the regular display. When  
switching is done from the regular screen display to the  
thumbnail screen display, all the clips will be displayed on  
the thumbnail screen.  
The type of the thumbnail indicated on the display and  
ALL:  
SAME FORMAT:  
The clips in the same format as the system  
Display all clips.  
Pressing the THUMBNAIL MENU button allows you to  
navigate the thumbnail menu.  
format are shown. To check the format,  
consult system mode and REC FORMAT  
indicated on the STATUS screen of the  
viewfinder. For more details, refer to  
[Viewfinder Status Indication Layout]  
(page 75).  
Note  
With the TCG switch positioned at [SET], when the time  
code or user bits are set or when camera menus are being  
manipulated, thumbnails cannot be manipulated.  
SELECT:  
The clips selected with the SET button are  
shown.  
2
1
MARKER:  
Display clips with shot marks.  
TEXT MEMO:  
Display clips with text memo data.  
SLOT n: Display clips in the specified P2 card.  
(n: 1 to 5, which indicates slots 1-5.)  
UPDATING..:  
3
Indicated when the unit is updating the screen  
or reading data. When the screen is being  
updated, the rotating icon  
is indicated.  
Please refer to [Switching the Thumbnail Display]  
(page 124) for more information.  
4
6
5
7
2. Slot numbers and HDD status  
This section indicates on which P2 card the pointed clip  
is recorded. The number of the slot that contains the  
appropriate P2 card is indicated in yellow. If the clip is  
recorded on more than one P2 card, then the numbers  
of all slots that contain the appropriate cards are  
indicated. The numbers of the other slots are shown in  
white if they contain P2 cards.  
Thumbnail screen  
10  
9
8
When the following P2 card is inserted, the slot number  
is displayed with a pink frame.  
RUN DOWN CARD  
(A P2 card on which the maximum number of overwrites  
has been exceeded.)  
11 12 13 14 15  
DIR ENTRY NG CARD  
(A P2 card on which the directory structure is not  
supported.)  
The USB HDD section is indicated as follows:  
Other than the USB HOST mode: gray  
Not connected in USB HOST mode: gray  
HDD recognized and usable in USB HOST mode:  
white  
HDD recognized and thumbnails shown in USB  
HOST mode: yellow  
HDD recognized and data unable to be copied in USB  
HOST: red  
3. Time Display  
You can set this to display the time code at the start of  
clip recording, the user bits at the start of clip recording,  
the shooting time, the shooting date, the shooting date  
and time or USER CLIP NAME.  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Screen  
121  
 
4. Recording mode  
The recording mode for the clip on which the pointer is  
located is indicated.  
5. System mode  
The format for the clip on which the pointer is located is  
indicated.  
6. Duration  
The duration of the clip on which the pointer is located is  
indicated.  
7. USB HOST mode indicator  
Indicated when the mode has been switched to USB  
HOST.  
8. Clip Number  
The numbers set by the camera for all the clips  
recognized correctly by the P2 card. These numbers are  
allocated in chronological order, by shooting dates and  
times.  
If clips cannot be played because of different recording  
formats, they are displayed in red.  
9.  
Defective Clip Indicator and  
Unknown Clip indicator  
This marker is displayed for defective clips, which may  
result from a variety of causes, e.g., powering-down  
during recording.  
Clip with yellow defective clip indicators can be restored  
in some cases. Please refer to [Restoring Clips]  
(page 129) for more information.  
A clip displayed with a red defective clip indicator cannot  
be restored and must be deleted. If the clip cannot be  
deleted, format the P2 card.  
is displayed for clips such as those which differ in  
format from the P2 standard.  
10.  
11.  
Incomplete Clip Indicator  
Indicates that although a clip is recorded across multiple  
P2 cards, one of these cards is not inserted into a P2  
card slot.  
Shot Mark Indicator  
This marker is displayed for a clip with a shot mark  
attached. Please refer to [Shot Mark] (page 126) for  
more information about shot marks.  
12.  
13.  
Indicator for clips with proxy  
This marker is displayed for clips with proxy attached.  
Text Memo Indicator  
This marker is displayed for a clip with a text memo  
attached.  
14.  
15.  
Edit Copied Clip Indicator  
In models which support edit copying, such as the AJ-  
HPM110, this marker is displayed on clips which have  
undergone edit copying. For more information about edit  
copying, see the instruction manual for a model that  
supports edit copying.  
Wide Clip Indicator  
This marker is displayed for clips recorded with the 16:9  
aspect ratio. However, it does not accompany clips in  
HD format.  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Screen  
122  
 
Selecting Thumbnails  
Multiple thumbnails can be randomly selected in the  
thumbnail screen.  
It is possible to display only the selected thumbnails in the  
thumbnail screen for playback. Please refer to [Switching the  
Thumbnail Display] (page 124) for more information.  
1
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer (yellow  
frame) to the desired clip and press the SET button.  
The frame around the selected thumbnail changes to a  
blue frame. Press the SET button again to deselect the  
clip.  
2
Additional clips can be selected by repeating step 1.  
e
a
b
c
d
a. LCD monitor  
b. THUMBNAIL button  
c. EXIT button  
d.  
cursor buttons  
SET button  
e. THUMBNAIL MENU button  
Playing back Clips  
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
6
Pressing the STOP button during clip playback stops the  
playback and returns the display to the thumbnail  
screen.  
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the  
desired clip.  
Notes  
When playback is stopped, the position of the pointer  
moves to the clip that was being played back,  
regardless of where the playback started.  
When the PLAY/PAUSE button is pressed again,  
playback will start from the beginning of the clip on  
which the pointer is positioned. To begin playback  
from the last stop position, set PLAYBACK RESUME  
to on. Refer to [Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode]  
(page 136) for further details.  
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button, and the clip under the  
pointer will be played back on the LCD monitor.  
After playback of the clip under the pointer, subsequent  
clips are played back in order, according to when they  
were shot. The thumbnail screen returns after the last  
clip has been played back.  
Notes  
After closing the thumbnail screen by pressing the  
THUMBNAIL button, pressing the PLAY/PAUSE  
button plays back the first clip (i.e., the clip with the  
earliest recording date and time), not the clip on which  
the pointer was last positioned.  
When playing back clips, it is not necessary to “select”  
the clips (blue frames around the thumbnails).  
Clips with clip numbers displayed in red cannot be  
played.  
4
5
During playback, pressing the REW button starts 4ꢃ  
speed reverse playback, and the FF button starts 4ꢃ  
speed fast playback. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to  
return to normal playback.  
During clip playback, pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button  
will temporarily stop (pause) the process.  
During a pause, pressing the REW button moves the  
pause position to the beginning of the clip. Pressing the  
REW button again moves the pause position to the  
beginning of the previous clip.  
During a pause, pressing the FF button moves the  
pause position to the beginning of the next clip.  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Selecting Thumbnails  
123  
   
Switching the Thumbnail Display  
The display can be switched so that only those clips matching the specified conditions are displayed in the thumbnail screen.  
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
3
Select THUMBNAIL from the thumbnail menu. Switch  
the thumbnail display by selecting one of the following  
items:  
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button. The thumbnail  
menu appears.  
a
ALL CLIP:  
Display all clips.  
SAME FORMAT CLIPS:  
a. THUMBNAIL MENU button  
Displays clips of the current system format.  
SELECTED CLIPS:  
Display randomly selected clips.  
MARKED CLIPS:  
Display clips with shot marks attached.  
TEXT MEMO CLIPS:  
Display clips with text memo data attached.  
SLOT CLIPS:  
Display clips recorded in the P2 card inserted  
in the specified slot.  
When this item is selected, “SLOT1” to  
“SLOT5” are displayed as a sub-menu. Select  
the desired slot to display the clips.  
SETUP: Please refer to [Setting the Thumbnail Display  
Mode] (page 136) for information about this  
item.  
EXIT:  
Close the sub-menu.  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Switching the Thumbnail Display  
124  
   
Changing thumbnails  
It is possible to replace thumbnails with images that include  
previously attached text memos while images are recorded  
or played back.  
1
Add text memos to images that you intend to change.  
Refer to [Text Memo Function] (page 44) for the method  
to add text memos.  
2
3
Select THUMBNAIL TEXT MEMO CLIPS to display  
thumbnails of the clips with text memos.  
Place the pointer on the clip of the thumbnail that you  
intend to change, and then press SET button. Move the  
pointer to the text memo display on the lower row.  
4
Select the thumbnail that you intend to replace, place  
the pointer on it, and then select OPERATION EXCH.  
THUMBNAIL on the thumbnail menu.  
5
Press SET button. When the YES/NO confirmation  
window is displayed, select YES by using the cursor  
button and the SET button. The menu closes and the  
thumbnail for the clip is replaced.  
Note  
Display clip properties by selecting PROPERTY CLIP  
PROPERTY on the thumbnail menu to confirm the position  
of the thumbnail (the number of frames from the top of the  
clip). Since thumbnails come generally from the top of the  
clip, “0” is displayed.  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Switching the Thumbnail Display  
125  
Shot Mark  
A shot mark can be added to a clip thumbnail to distinguish this clip from the others.  
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip  
to which you want to attach a shot mark.  
3
4
Press the SHOT MARKER button.  
A shot mark will be attached to the clip thumbnail under  
the pointer.  
To delete a shot mark, reposition the pointer over the  
clip and press the SHOT MARKER button.  
a
Notes  
a. SHOT MARKER button  
A shot mark can be attached during recording. Please  
refer to [Shot Mark Function] (page 45) for more  
information.  
When adding a shot mark to (or deleting the shot mark  
from) a clip recorded across multiple P2 cards, do this with  
all these P2 cards inserted into P2 card slots.  
Text Memo  
During recording or playback, you can add text memos to clips. Text memos can be used to play back clips at some point or  
break clips into chunks and copy the necessary portions.  
Adding a text memo  
Text memos can be added in one of the following ways.  
Press the TEXT MEMO button during recording or  
playback of a clip. A text memo is added to the position  
where the button is pressed.  
Press the TEXT MEMO button when the thumbnail screen  
is displayed. A text memo is added to the beginning of the  
clip.  
Note  
One clip can have up to 100 text and voice memos in  
combination. Note that the unit is not capable of adding or  
showing voice memos.  
a
a. TEXT MEMO button  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Shot Mark  
126  
       
Playing back a clip at the position where a text memo is recorded  
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
3
Move the pointer over the clip that contains the desired  
text memo to playback and press the SET button.  
The pointer moves to the lower part of the LCD monitor.  
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select  
THUMBNAIL TEXT MEMO CLIPS from the thumbnail  
menu.  
The clip thumbnails with text memos attached are  
displayed in the upper section of the LCD monitor. The  
lower section of the LCD monitor shows information  
about the text memo on the clip selected by the pointer.  
d
d. The pointer moves down.  
4
5
With the pointer located in the lower part, move the  
pointer to the desired text memo number using the  
cursor right and left buttons (YZ). Then, press the  
PLAY/PAUSE button.  
a
b
c
a. Thumbnail display  
b. Shows the total number of text memos attached to the  
clip.  
Playback will start from the time code position of the text  
memo where the pointer is located.  
If the STOP button is pressed during playback or the  
playback has finished at the end of the clip, then the  
thumbnail screen appears again with the pointer  
replaced with the text memo where the playback  
started.  
c. Shows the still image that the text memo is related to.  
6
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select EXIT or  
press the EXIT button to return the pointer to the upper  
part of the thumbnail screen.  
Note  
For AVC-Intra format clips which cannot be played back, the  
clip thumbnails with text memos may not be displayed. In  
this case, a gray section will be displayed instead.  
Deleting a text memo  
1
Select the desired text memo by carrying out steps 1-3  
for [Playing back a clip at the position where a text  
memo is recorded] (page 127).  
2
3
Move the pointer to the desired text memo, and then  
press the SET button.  
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select  
OPERATION DELETE from the thumbnail menu.  
YES and NO appear to confirm deletion. Use the cursor  
buttons and the SET button to select YES.  
The text memo is deleted.  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Text Memo  
127  
 
Using a text memo to break a clip and copy the necessary portion  
1
2
Select a desired text memo in a clip by carrying out  
steps 1-3 for [Playing back a clip at the position where a  
text memo is recorded] (page 127).  
5
When the clip is being copied, the unit indicates the  
progress of the copy process and cancellation status. To  
discontinue the copy process, press the SET button.  
Then, a YES/NO confirmation screen is displayed. Use  
the cursor buttons and SET button to select YES.  
Move the pointer to the desired text memo, and then  
press the SET button. You can select more than one text  
memo.  
Note  
When copying between text memos, the copied section may  
be automatically adjusted depending on the unit frame  
number of the employed recording methods.  
If the section to be copied is smaller than the unit frame  
number, the copy cannot be performed. For more about  
recording methods and unit frame numbers, refer to the  
table on page 41.  
3
4
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select  
OPERATION COPY.  
Use the cursor buttons and SET buttons to select the  
destination slot. Then, select YES to start copying the  
clip. The portion between the selected text memo and  
the next one is copied. If no text memo is found after the  
selected one, then all part after the selected text memo  
is copied. If multiple text memos are selected, the  
selected sections are copied.  
Deleting Clips  
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
4
The following screen appears. Use the cursor buttons  
and the SET button to select YES.  
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip  
you want to delete.  
Press the SET button to select the clip.  
3
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select  
OPERATION DELETE from the thumbnail menu.  
5
The clip is deleted. All selected clips (in blue frames) are  
deleted by this operation.  
Note  
Pressing the SET button stops the deletion operation in the  
middle.  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Deleting Clips  
128  
 
Restoring Clips  
Restores clips that are defective as a result of sudden  
powering-down during recording, or removal of the P2 card  
being accessed.  
1
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
2
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip  
you want to restore (defective clips are indicated by  
defective clip indicators).  
Note  
Only those clips with yellow defective clip indicators can be  
restored. Delete the clips with red defective clip indicators. If  
the clip cannot be deleted, format the P2 card.  
During restoration of the clips, however, the defective-clip  
indicator may change from yellow to red, resulting in inability  
to restore the clips.  
Press the SET button to select the clip.  
3
4
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button, and select  
OPERATION REPAIR CLIP from the thumbnail  
menu.  
The confirmation window appears. Use the cursor  
buttons and the SET button to select YES.  
Reconnection of Incomplete Clips  
Incomplete clips may be generated when clips recorded on  
3
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select  
OPERATION RE-CONNECTION from the thumbnail  
menu.  
multiple P2 cards (connected clips) are separately copied to  
different cards. Reconnection function generates one clip  
(the original, connected clip) from incomplete clips.  
4
The confirmation window appears. Use the cursor  
buttons and SET button to select YES.  
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
Note  
indication stays illuminated until all the incomplete clips  
that comprise the original clip are reconnected.  
Use the cursor and SET button to select incomplete  
clips to reconnect.  
Usually, thumbnails of incomplete clips (clips with  
marker) are displayed in line.  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Restoring Clips  
129  
     
Copying Clips  
Selected clips can be copied to the P2 card in the desired  
slot or SD memory card.  
Notes  
Do not turn off the power or remove a P2 card while data  
is being copied. Doing so may cause the P2 card to fail. If  
you should accidentally perform one of the above  
operations, defective clips will be generated. Delete them,  
and then copy them again.  
When clips are copied to P2 cards, all the information on  
the clips is copied. However, when they are copied to the  
SD memory card*, video and sound information is not  
copied, only thumbnails, clip metadata, icons, voice  
memo, text memo, proxy, and real-time metadata.  
When there is insufficient recording capacity on the  
destination, the message “LACK OF REC CAPACITY!” is  
displayed, and copying will not proceed. When clips to be  
copied include some with defects, the message “CANNOT  
ACCESS!” is displayed, and copying will not proceed. If  
selected clips include any that are already recorded on the  
destination P2 card, copying will not proceed.  
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer to the  
desired clip and press the SET button.  
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select  
OPERATION COPY from the thumbnail menu.  
Select slot 1-5 or SD memory card as the destination.  
To stop copying, press the SET button. Clips currently  
being copied to the destination will be deleted.  
When identical clips exist on the destination card, the  
“OVERWRITE?” is displayed. Select “YES” or “NO”.  
* Regarding SD memory cards to be used, see <Cautions in using  
SD memory cards> (page 22).  
4
The confirmation window appears. Use the cursor  
buttons and SET button to select YES.  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Copying Clips  
130  
 
Setting of Clip Meta Data  
Information such as the name of person who shot the video, the name of the reporter, the shooting location, or a text memo  
can be read from the SD memory card, and can be recorded as Clip Meta Data.  
Reading Clip Meta Data (metadata upload)  
Note  
The file which was edited by except P2 Viewer is displayed  
as “UNKNOWN DATA!”, and may not be read.  
1
2
Insert the SD memory card that contains the Clip Meta  
Data (metadata upload file).  
GLOBAL CLIP ID:  
Displays the global clip ID, which indicates the  
shooting status of the clip.  
USER CLIP NAME:  
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
1
Displays the clip name specified by the user.*  
Displays [FRAME RATE] (frame rate of the  
clip), [PULL DOWN], and [ASPECT RATIO].  
[SAMPLING RATE] (sampling frequency of  
recorded sound) and [BITS PER SAMPLE]  
(digitized bit[s] of recorded sound).  
Note  
VIDEO:  
AUDIO:  
Press the THUMBNAIL button while pressing MODE  
CHECK button when a thumbnail is displayed to move  
to step 4.  
3
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and Select META  
DATA LOAD from the thumbnail menu, and press the  
SET button.  
ACCESS:  
Displays [CREATOR] (person who recorded  
the clip), [CREATION DATE] (date when the  
clip was recorded), [LAST UPDATE DATE]  
(date of the latest update of the clip), and  
[LAST UPDATE PERSON] (person who made  
the latest update of the clip).  
DEVICE:  
SHOOT:  
Displays [MANUFACTURER] (name of the  
device manufacturer), [SERIAL NO.] (serial  
number of the device) and [MODEL NAME]  
(model name of the device).  
Displays [SHOOTER] (name of the person  
who shot the video), [START DATE] (start  
date of shooting), [END DATE] (end date of  
shooting), and [LOCATION] ALTITUDE/  
LONGITUDE/LATITUDE/SOURCE/PLACE  
NAME (altitude, longitude, latitude, and  
source of the information and name of the  
location).  
SCENARIO:  
NEWS:  
4
Names of metadata upload files stored on the SD  
memory card are displayed*. Select the desired files  
using the cursor buttons, and choose YES. Upload  
starts.  
Uploaded metadata is retained even if the power is  
turned off.  
For more information on confirmation of uploaded data,  
see [Checking and modifying read metadata]  
(page 132).  
Displays [PROGRAM NAME], [SCENE NO],  
and [TAKE NO].  
Displays [REPORTER] (name of the reporter),  
[PURPOSE] (purpose of shooting), and  
[OBJECT] (object of shooting).  
Displays [NO.] (the number of the text memo),  
[OFFSET] (location of the frame with added  
text memo in relation to the beginning of the  
clip), [PERSON] (person who recorded the  
text memo added to the clip), and [TEXT]  
(contents of the text memo).  
2
MEMO* :  
* Press the cursor button (Z) to display the full name of the  
file, up to 100 characters, at the cursor position. Press the  
cursor button (Y) to return to the original state.  
THUMBNAIL:  
Displays the location of the frame (frame  
offset) and the size (height and width) of the  
image selected as the thumbnail image.  
Clip Meta Data items  
Clip Meta Data includes the following items: Underlined  
items can be set by reading the metadata upload file on the  
SD memory card. Other items are set automatically during  
shooting. Using the latest update version of P2 Viewer,  
metadata upload files can be written to SD memory cards  
using a PC. Download the latest update version of P2  
Viewer from the following URL and install it to your PC:  
*1 The USER CLIP NAME recording method is selectable. For  
details, refer to [Selecting the USER CLIP NAME recording  
method] (page 133).  
*2 Be sure to enter [TEXT] when entering MEMO. It is not possible  
to record only [PERSON] or [OFFSET].  
Note  
This unit only displays printable ASCII characters.  
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/  
Regarding SD memory cards to be used, see <Cautions in  
using SD memory cards> (page 22).  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Setting of Clip Meta Data  
131  
 
4
While viewing the settings for the metadata, use the  
cursor buttons to move the pointer to the desired option.  
Then, press the SET button. A soft keyboard screen is  
displayed, allowing you to modify the setting.  
Checking and modifying read metadata  
The unit allows you to check details of metadata read from  
SD memory cards.  
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select META  
DATA PROPERTY from the thumbnail menu. Then,  
the screen like this is displayed:  
To set whether or not the uploaded metadata is  
recorded  
Set “ON”/“OFF” in META DATA RECORD from the  
thumbnail menu. The factory setting is “OFF”.  
3
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer to the item  
you wish to check, then press the SET button.  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Setting of Clip Meta Data  
132  
 
Selecting the USER CLIP NAME recording  
method  
Note  
When a P2 card with a memory capacity of 8 GB or more is  
used in unit and a one-time continuous recording exceeds  
the prescribed duration (DVCPRO HD and the AVC-  
Intra100: about 5 minutes; AVC-Intra50: about 10 minutes)  
or when a one-time recording extends over more than one  
P2 card, the recording concerned will automatically be  
undertaken as a separate clip. At this time, each clip will be  
provided with its own COUNT value.  
Select META DATA USER CLIP NAME from the  
thumbnail menu to select the recording method. Two options  
are available: TYPE1 and TYPE2.  
TYPE1 (Factory setting)  
USER CLIP NAME to be  
recorded  
If clip metadata has been read in Uploaded data  
Example of recording (DVCPRO HD) a clip on one P2 card:  
If no clip metadata has been read  
Same as GLOBAL CLIP ID  
in or if the setting for recording  
(UMID data)  
Recording pause  
Recording start  
clip metadata has been turned off  
Recording duration = Approx. 7 min  
Clip 1  
TYPE2  
Clip 2  
COUNT value = 0002  
COUNT value = 0001  
USER CLIP NAME to be  
recorded  
Uploaded data + COUNT  
value*  
If clip metadata has been read in  
Approx. 5 min  
Approx. 2 min  
Example of recording a clip on two P2 cards:  
If no clip metadata has been read  
in or if the setting for recording  
clip metadata has been turned off  
Same as CLIP NAME  
Recording pause  
Recording start  
* The COUNT value is indicated as a four-digit number.  
The COUNT value is incremented each time a new clip is  
captured if clip metadata has been read in and TYPE2 has  
been selected as the recording method.  
Clip 1  
COUNT value = 0003  
Clip 2  
COUNT value = 0004  
The COUNT value can be reset using the following  
procedure.  
1st card  
2nd card  
Select META DATA PROPERTY from the thumbnail  
menu, then select USER CLIP NAME to display the menu  
shown below. Select “COUNT RESET” with the cursor and  
press the SET button to reset the COUNT value to 1.  
If the clip thumbnails are displayed as shown in the example  
above or their properties are indicated using a P2 device,  
the thumbnail and COUNT value of clip 1 will be displayed.  
Clear the uploaded metadata  
Select META DATA INITIALIZE from the thumbnail menu,  
and press the SET button. Select YES when the  
confirmation screen is displayed.  
Notes  
Japanese or Chinese characters indicated in English or  
other characters that cannot be indicated in English will  
not display properly; they will be indicated as .  
The letters which can be input with the unit are only the  
alphanumeric. The unit cannot input Japanese and  
Chinese.  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Setting of Clip Meta Data  
133  
 
Setting of Proxy (optional)  
By attaching the video encoder card (AJ-YAX800G, optional)  
either to the optional slot or slot 5, it is possible to specify the  
proxy recording setting.  
When “PROXY CARD ERROR” is indicated in the  
viewfinder, either check the video encoder card or set the  
unit so that proxy recording is not performed.  
The video encoder card is not recognized when inserted if  
the power for the unit is turned on. Insert the video encoder  
card after turning off the power for the unit.  
Select OPERATION DEVICE SETUP PROXY from the  
thumbnail menu to specify the setting.  
For the method of installation and the settings of the video  
encoder card.  
Notes  
To use the proxy function in 24PN (Native) mode, the  
FPGA version of the video encoder card firmware must be  
updated to [B102] or higher. For the method to confirm the  
FPGA version of the video encoder card firmware, refer to  
[Video Encoder Card Status Display (optional)]  
(page 140). For instructions on updating, refer to the P2  
support page on the following website.  
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/  
Formatting a P2 Card  
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
3
The following screen appears. Use the cursor buttons  
and the SET button to select YES.  
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select  
OPERATION FORMAT from the thumbnail menu.  
The following screen appears. Select the slot number  
for the P2 card you want to format, then press the SET  
button.  
Select EXIT if formatting is not required.  
4
The selected P2 card is formatted.  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Setting of Proxy (optional)  
134  
   
Formatting SD memory cards  
SD memory cards can also be formatted from the thumbnail  
screen. With an SD memory card inserted into the unit,  
perform the following operation:  
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select  
OPERATION FORMAT from the thumbnail menu.  
The following screen appears. Select “SD CARD”, then  
press the SET button.  
Select “EXIT” if formatting is not required.  
3
The following screen appears. Use the cursor buttons  
and the SET button to select YES.  
4
The SD memory card is formatted.  
Note  
SD memory cards can also be formatted from the menu  
screen. For more information, see [Handling SD memory  
cards] (page 90).  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Formatting SD memory cards  
135  
   
Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode  
The thumbnail display mode can be customized to suit your  
preferences.  
DATE FORMAT:  
You can specify the display order for the  
shooting date as either Year/Month/Day (Y-M-  
D), Month/Day/Year (M-D-Y) or Day/Month/  
Year (D-M-Y).  
The factory setting is Month/Day/Year.  
This setting is reflected in the recording date  
shown in the clip property and the shooting  
date shown when DATE is selected under the  
item DATA DISPLAY.  
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select  
THUMBNAIL SETUP from the thumbnail menu.  
The following screen appears.  
THUMBNAIL SIZE:  
For the size of thumbnails displayed on one  
screen, either LARGE (32 thumbnails  
displayed) or NORMAL (43 thumbnails  
displayed) can be selected. The factory  
default value is NORMAL.  
PLAYBACK RESUME:  
Selecting a position to restart playback after  
stopping playback on the thumbnails screen  
using the STOP button.  
ON:  
OFF:  
Playback starts from the stop position.  
Playback starts from the beginning of the clip  
indicated by the pointer.  
Note that if the pointer is moved after stopping  
playback, the playback will restart from the  
beginning of the clip indicated by the pointer  
regardless of this setting. Also, attempting to  
playback from the end of all the available clips  
will cause the screen to flash momentarily,  
indicating that the there are no more clips  
which can be played back.  
ALL HIDE:  
ON:  
OFF:  
All indicators are not displayed.  
Indication/No indication will be set depending  
on the following menu. The factory settings  
are as follows.  
MARKER IND.:  
Switches the shot mark marker between  
indication and no indication (ON/OFF). The  
factory setting is ON (indication).  
TEXT MEMO IND.:  
THUMBNAIL INIT:  
Return the above thumbnail display settings to  
default. Move the cursor to this option, and  
press the SET button. Select YES when the  
confirmation screen is displayed.  
Switches the text memo marker between  
indication and no indication (ON/OFF). The  
factory setting is ON (indication).  
EXIT:  
WIDE IND.:  
Returns to the previous menu.  
Switches the wide marker between indication  
and no indication (ON/OFF). The factory  
setting is ON (indication).  
PROXY IND.:  
Switches the proxy marker between indication  
and no indication (ON/OFF). The factory  
setting is ON (indication).  
DATA DISPLAY:  
The time display field of the clip offers a  
choice of Time Code (TC), User Bits (UB),  
Shooting Time (TIME), Shooting Date (DATE),  
Shooting Date and Time (DATE/TIME) or  
USER CLIP NAME. The factory setting is  
Time Code.  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode  
136  
   
Properties  
The clip’s properties and the P2 card’s status are displayed.  
It is possible to edit and rewrite recorded clip metadata while clip properties are displayed.  
Clip Property  
From the thumbnail menu, select PROPERTY CLIP  
PROPERTY. The following screen appears.  
4. Clip Information  
Displays detailed information about the clip.  
CLIP NAME:  
Display clip names.  
START TC:  
The time code value at the start of the  
recording.  
START UB:  
The user bit value at the start of the recording.  
DATE: The date of the recording.  
TIME: The time at the start of the recording.  
DURATION:  
The time length of the clip.  
V_FORMAT:  
The recording format for the clip.  
FRAME RATE:  
The frame rate for the playback.  
REC RATE:  
The recording frame rate is displayed. (Only  
3
1
2
5
4
1. Clip Number  
2. Thumbnail  
displayed for clips recorded using native  
recording with the VFR function.)  
3. Clip Information  
5. Clip Meta Data  
Indicates the indicators added to the clip and the  
Displays more detailed data about the clip. Use the  
cursor buttons to move the pointer, and press the SET  
button to check the detailed content. For more  
information on displayed metadata, see [Setting of Clip  
Meta Data] (page 131).  
number of text and voice memos added to the clip.  
The  
mark appears if the clip is recorded on a write-  
protected P2 card.  
Note  
The unit is not capable of recording or playing back  
voice memos.  
Modification of recorded clip metadata  
1
Display the window for detailed clip metadata that you  
intend to modify in the clip properties window.  
2
Place the cursor on the item to be modified using the  
cursor button. The metadata that can be modified are  
shown like [CREATOR] in the following figure.  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Properties  
137  
 
3
Press the SET button.  
4
Press OK on the keyboard to write the modified  
metadata on the clip and return to the metadata window.  
The input window (soft keyboard) for modifying  
metadata is displayed. Use the keyboard to modify the  
metadata.  
Notes  
Deleting only the respective items of LOCATION  
(recording location data) in SHOOT is not possible. By  
setting ALTITUDE to empty, other LONGITUDE/  
LATITUDE items are collectively deleted.  
The metadata for a clip with the  
incomplete clip  
indicator cannot be modified. For the clips recorded on  
multiple P2 cards, modify the metadata while all P2 cards  
are inserted.  
Any MEMO with 100 characters or more cannot be  
modified.  
The keyboard operation is the same as [Checking and  
modifying read metadata] (page 132).  
P2 Card Status Display  
P2 Card Status Display Settings  
Select PROPERTY CARD STATUS from the thumbnail  
menu to set the desired indication mode (remaining free  
space or used memory capacity) for the P2 card status  
display.  
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select  
PROPERTY PROPERTY SETUP P2 CARD CAP  
from the thumbnail menu.  
The following screen appears. Select the P2 card status  
display settings from the P2 CARD CAP menu option.  
REMAIN:  
Show remaining free space on the P2 card as  
the P2 card status display. (Factory setting)  
USED:  
Show used memory capacity on the P2 card  
as the P2 card status display.  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Properties  
138  
Contents of P2 Card Status Display Settings  
From the thumbnail menu, select PROPERTY CARD STATUS. The following screen appears.  
When “REMAIN” is selected:  
When “USED” is selected:  
2
2
1
1
3
3
5
4
5
4
1. Write-protect Mark  
The mark appears if the P2 card is write-protected.  
1. Write-protect Mark  
The mark appears if the P2 card is write-protected.  
2. P2 Card Status (remaining free space)  
The remaining memory capacity of the P2 card is  
indicated by a bar graph and percentage. The bar graph  
indicator moves to the left as the remaining free space  
decreases.  
2. P2 Card Status (used memory capacity)  
The used memory capacity of the P2 card is indicated  
by a bar graph and a percentage figure. The bar graph  
indicator moves to the right as the used memory  
capacity increases.  
The following indications may appear, depending on the  
card status:  
The following indications may appear, depending on the  
card status:  
FORMAT ERROR!:  
FORMAT ERROR!:  
An unformatted P2 card is inserted.  
NOT SUPPORTED!:  
An unformatted P2 card is inserted.  
NOT SUPPORTED!:  
An unsupported card is inserted in the camera.  
NO CARD!:  
An unsupported card is inserted in the camera.  
NO CARD!:  
P2 cards are not inserted.  
P2 cards are not inserted.  
Use the cursor button to place the cursor on the P2 card  
for data you want to access and press the SET button to  
display detailed information about the P2 card to check  
individual information such as the serial number and the  
user ID.  
Use the cursor button to place the cursor on the P2 card  
for data you want to access and press the SET button to  
display detailed information about the P2 card to check  
individual information such as the serial number and the  
user ID.  
3. P2 Card Remaining Capacity/Total Capacity  
Displays the P2 card remaining capacity and total  
capacity in minutes. The total of the remaining memory  
capacity for each P2 card that is displayed may not  
match the actual total remaining memory capacity for  
the P2 cards because only the figure in minute is  
displayed.  
3. P2 Card used memory capacity/Total Capacity  
Displays the used memory capacity on a P2 card and  
the total capacity, in minutes. Because fractions are  
truncated, the figure shown for used memory capacity  
on a P2 card may differ from the figure for total capacity.  
The used memory capacity of a write-protected P2 card  
is displayed as 100%.  
Note that the indicated capacity will vary according to  
the frame rate in native recording with VFR operation.  
Note that the indicated capacity will vary according to  
the frame rate in native recording with VFR operation.  
4. Total remaining free space for the slot  
Displays the total remaining free space for all 5 slots.  
Please note that the remaining capacity of a write-  
protected P2 card is not included in the total remaining  
capacity.  
4. Total used memory capacity for all slots  
Displays the total used memory capacity for all 5 slots.  
5. Warning symbol  
When the following P2 card is detected, the  
is displayed.  
5. Warning symbol  
RUN DOWN CARD:  
When the following P2 card is detected, the  
is displayed.  
The maximum number of overwrites on the P2 card has  
been exceeded.  
RUN DOWN CARD:  
DIR ENTRY NG CARD:  
The maximum number of overwrites on the P2 card has  
been exceeded.  
DIR ENTRY NG CARD:  
The directory structure on the P2 card is not supported.  
The warning can be confirmed on the P2 card detailed  
information indication in [2. P2 Card Status (used  
memory capacity)].  
The directory structure on the P2 card is not supported.  
The warning can be confirmed on the P2 card detailed  
information indication in [2. P2 Card Status (remaining  
free space)].  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Properties  
139  
   
SD memory card Status Display  
The status display enables a confirmation of the SD memory  
card formatted condition, available memory capacity etc.  
From the thumbnail menu, select PROPERTY DEVICES  
SD CARD.  
If the format is compatible with SD standards, the message  
“SD STANDARD: SUPPORTED” is displayed.  
If the format is not compatible with SD standards, the  
message “SD STANDARD: NOT SUPPORTED” is  
displayed. If this is the case, writing or reading will not be  
successful. Format the card with the unit. For more  
information on formatting SD memory cards, see [Formatting  
SD memory cards] (page 135).  
Note  
The indicated remaining memory capacity on the SD  
memory card (PROXY REM) can be an index of remaining  
memory capacity for the Proxy but may differ from the actual  
remaining capacity. For SD or SDHC cards with Class  
indications, the recording time may be reduced significantly  
compared with the actual capacity when images of short  
recording time are recorded repeatedly. If the remaining  
memory capacity exceeds 999 min, “999 min” is displayed.  
The remaining capacity is displayed only when set to record  
the Proxy record on the SD memory card. For the setting  
method, refer to the operation manual of the video encoder  
card (AJ-YAX800G, optional).  
Video Encoder Card Status Display (optional)  
Attaching the video encoder card (AJ-YAX800G, optional),  
select PROPERTY DEVICES PROXY from the  
thumbnail menu.  
The slot in which the video encoder card is inserted, and  
version information is displayed.  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Properties  
140  
 
Connection with external device  
Connection through the DVCPRO connector  
This unit cannot receive input via the DVCPRO connector. The DVCPRO connector is output only.  
External device control through DVCPRO connection  
The DVCPRO connector can be connected to an external  
Notes  
device for backup recording to control the start and stop of  
recording.  
When the Fire Store FS-100, manufactured by Focus, is  
used as external storage, the VITC UB MODE menu  
option on the <TC/UB> screen on the MAIN OPERATION  
page can be set to “FRM RATE” to allow the FS-100 to  
indicate the shooting frame rate of the unit on its display. It  
is also possible to add the same USER CLIP NAME of the  
unit to the record clip of the FS-100.  
1
When connecting the 1394 (DV) cable, see  
[30. DVCPRO connector] (page 22).  
Set the 1394 CONTROL menu option on the <1394  
SETTING> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page to  
“BOTH”.  
Note that when recording a backup with an external  
device connected to the unit during Rec run mode and  
there is insufficient storage space on the P2 card inserted  
into the unit, the time code output from the DVCPRO  
connector will not advance from that point.  
When the AVC-Intra format, DVCPRO HD Native mode or  
INTERVAL REC mode is selected, it is impossible to  
control any external devices through the 1394 connection.  
2
3
Through the 1394 CMD SEL menu option, select the  
type of stop recording command to be received by the  
external device.  
Through the REC TALLY menu option on the <OPTION  
MODE> screen, select how the recording status of the  
unit should be indicated. Note that the recording status  
of the external device is indicated with a red tally LED.  
Directions for using the DVCPRO connection  
When connecting the 1394 (DV) cable, see [30. DVCPRO  
connector] (page 22).  
The AV signals may be disrupted by turning the power of  
the connected devices on and off or by disconnecting and  
re-connecting the I/F cables.  
It may take several seconds for the system to operate  
stably when the operation is transferred from one mode to  
another.  
Perform recording operation after the system operation  
has stabilized.  
For signals output from the IEEE1394 interface, the  
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control on the side panel is  
disabled.  
When the unit is controlled through PC application  
software, etc., take note of the following.  
– Software must be used under the condition where the  
unit thumbnail screen is closed. The application  
software may not be able to apply control when the  
thumbnail screen is open.  
During special playback, video and audio signals which  
have not been processed as the output signals of the  
IEEE1394 interface will be output. When these video and  
audio signals are monitored on another device, they may  
be at variance from the video and audio signals which are  
played back by unit.  
When there is a problem with the connection of the  
DVCPRO connector, “1394 E-92” will be displayed in the  
display window. For more details, refer to [8. 1394 Error]  
(page 156).  
Connection with external device: Connection through the DVCPRO connector  
141  
   
Connection with external devices using the  
USB 2.0 port  
Connection with a PC in the USB DEVICE mode  
By connecting the unit with an external PC using USB 2.0, the P2 card inserted to the unit can be used as a mass storage  
device.  
Procedures for establishing a connection with a  
PC  
Notes  
A USB driver must be installed on the PC.  
The unit is only applicable to USB 2.0. Use a PC that  
supports USB 2.0.  
1
Connect the USB cable to the USB 2.0 port.  
Only one unit at a time must be connected to the PC  
via USB.  
The P2 card must not be removed when it is  
connected via USB.  
While a USB connection is established, the P2 card’s  
access LED should not be lit except when access is  
being carried out.  
Notes  
The USB 2.0 cable is not included with the unit.  
Please use a commercially available USB 2.0 cable  
(shield with a ferrite core).  
Although the unit supports USB cables up to 5 meters  
long, cables up to 3-meters long are recommended.  
When a USB device is active, recording, playback, or  
navigation through clip thumbnails is disabled.  
During a USB connection, the USB LED on the side  
panel stays illuminated. Also, “USB DEVICE” is  
displayed in the system information/warning area in the  
viewfinder.  
When the connection is not correctly established, both  
of these indications blink.  
a
a. USB 2.0 port (DEVICE)  
2
Navigate the menu to open the <SYSTEM MODE>  
screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page. Then, set the  
PC MODE SELECT menu option to “USB DEV.” and the  
PC MODE option to “ON”.  
b
  
  
  
  
   
   
   
  
  
  
b. USB LED  
                   
                      
                                    
Note  
The function of the menu option PC MODE may be  
assigned to a desired user button by using any one of  
the menu options USER MAIN SW, USER1 SW,  
USER2 SW, MARKER SEL or TEXT MEMO SW.  
These options can be found in the <USER SW> screen  
on the CAM OPERATION page.  
3
There are two ways to terminate the USB mode, as  
follows:  
Turn the POWER switch of the unit [OFF].  
Set the PC MODE item to “OFF” from the menu  
operations.  
When you establish the USB connection for the first time,  
install the supplied P2 software on the PC. Refer to the  
Installation Manual for the details.  
Connection with external device: Connection with external devices using the USB 2.0 port  
142  
   
USB HOST mode  
The unit can be connected to a hard disk drive that supports  
USB 2.0 to store data from cards on it, view thumbnails for  
stored clips, and write data back to P2 cards.  
Switching to the USB HOST mode  
1
By navigating the menu, set the PC MODE SELECT  
menu option on the <SYSTEM MODE> screen on the  
SYSTEM SETTING page to “USB HOST”, then the PC  
MODE option to “ON”. This will place the unit in USB  
HOST mode.  
For information about the HDD indication, see  
[Thumbnail Screen] (page 121).  
When the unit is in USB HOST mode, the viewfinder  
indicates “USB HOST” and the USB LED on the side  
panel stays illuminated. If the hard disk drive is not  
properly connected, then the LED blinks.  
When a user button is assigned the PC MODE on/off  
switching capability, you can press that user button to  
switch between the normal and USB HOST modes.  
For information about how to assign functions to the  
user buttons, see [Assigning Functions to User  
Buttons] (page 56).  
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button to go to the thumbnail  
screen. Check to see that the screen indicates “USB  
HOST” in the lower right corner. When a hard disk drive  
is connected, the HDD indication in the upper right  
corner stays illuminated. However, if this indicator  
illuminates red, it means that the hard disk drive cannot  
be copied. Confirm the hard disk drive type.  
a
a. USB HOST display  
Note  
In USB HOST mode, clips on P2 cards can be played back  
but video from the camera or an external device cannot be  
recorded.  
Clips written to a hard disk must be written back to a P2 card  
before it can be played back. For information about how to  
write clips back to P2 cards, see [Writing data back to P2  
cards] (page 146).  
To return to the normal mode from the USB HOST mode, set  
PC MODE to “OFF” or press a user button which has been  
assigned the PC MODE on/off function while the thumbnail  
screen is closed.  
Using the USB HOST mode  
Usable hard disk drives  
Hard disk drives connectable via USB 2.0  
P2 STORE (AJ-PCS060G, optional)  
Notes  
While the USB HOST mode supports USB bus power  
(5 V, 0.5 A), some hard disk drives may not activate. If this  
is the case, power must be supplied in a different way.  
Do not connect multiple hard disk drives through a hub  
even if the power is turned off. Also, avoid connecting  
other devices together with a hard disk drive through a  
hub.  
The unit does not support a hard disk drive of 2 TB or  
more.  
Connection with external device: Connection with external devices using the USB 2.0 port  
143  
 
1. PARTITION  
Viewing hard disk drive information  
This section indicates the type of the hard disk drive.  
The available functions depend on the type of hard disk  
drive.  
You can view the information on the hard disk drive  
connected via USB 2.0 with the following steps.  
HDD type  
Feature  
Available functions  
1
Switch the mode to USB HOST. For more information,  
see [Switching to the USB HOST mode] (page 143).  
TYPE S  
A special format that  
allows high-speed  
Thumbnail viewing,  
writing and writing back  
writing and writing back on a card basis, writing  
on a card-by-card basis. back on a clip basis, and  
2
3
Connect the hard disk drive to the unit via USB 2.0.  
A drive formatted with  
formatting  
the unit uses this format.  
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail  
screen.  
P2STORE  
FAT  
P2 STORE (AJ-  
PCS060G). No writing  
can be performed.  
Thumbnail viewing,  
writing back on a card  
basis, and writing back  
on a clip basis  
4
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select HDD  
EXPLORE from the thumbnail menu. The screen  
provides the information about the hard disk drive.  
For a hard disk drive  
with the first primary  
partition formatted in  
FAT16 or FAT32, as  
seen on PC, etc., which  
requires a CONTENTS  
directory at its root.  
Thumbnail viewing,  
reading on a clip basis,  
and formatting  
* Once formatted, the  
hard disk drive can be  
treated as a TYPE S  
HDD.  
For TYPE S or P2 STORE  
7
8
9
OTHER  
Hard disk drives not  
described above.  
* They are hard disk  
drives that have no  
CONTENTS directory  
or use the NTFS and  
any other file system  
instead of FAT16 or  
FAT32.  
Formatting  
* Once formatted, they  
can be treated as a  
TYPE S HDD.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
2. VENDOR  
This section indicates the vendor for the hard disk drive.  
3. MODEL  
This section indicates the model of the hard disk drive.  
EXIT button   
Press the SET button.  
4. SIZE  
This section indicates the total storage on the hard disk  
drive.  
5. USED  
This section indicates the used space on the hard disk  
drive (in GB) and the number of P2 cards in use.  
10  
6. REMAIN  
11  
12  
This section indicates the remaining free space on the  
hard disk drive in GB.  
7. NO.  
For the FAT  
This section indicates the partition number (one P2 card  
is used as a unit) on the hard disk drive.  
Note  
The screen indicates up to 10 partitions. When the  
number of partitions exceeds 10, scroll down the  
indication with the cursor button (V) to view the hidden  
partitions.  
1
2
3
4
Connection with external device: Connection with external devices using the USB 2.0 port  
144  
8. MODEL  
This section indicates the model of the P2 card that  
11. VERIFY  
This section indicates the verification setting and results  
originally contained data on the partition.  
at the time the data on the partition was recorded.  
ON/FINISHED:  
Verification was performed and the results agreed.  
ON/FAILED:  
Verification was performed and the results did not  
Note  
Press the cursor button (Z) to switch to the PARTITION  
NAME. Press the [Y] button to return to the original  
model name display.  
agree.  
OFF:  
No verification was performed.  
- - -:  
No verification information is available.  
Notes  
Even for a FAT-type hard disk drive, the 1001st or  
later clips are not shown.  
For a FAT-formatted hard disk drive, the information  
about only the first partition is shown.  
For a P2 STORE (AJ-PCS060G) that has an invalid  
partition, that partition information is shown in gray.  
12. NAME  
This section indicates the PARTITION NAME.  
Enter the PARTITION NAME from the soft keyboard by  
selecting CHANGE PARTITION NAME in the  
OPERATION menu while the thumbnail of the hard disk  
drive is displayed. (Max. 20 characters)  
Formatting a hard disk drive  
1
Switch the mode to USB HOST.  
For more information, see [Switching to the USB HOST  
mode] (page 143).  
2
3
Connect the hard disk drive via USB.  
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail  
screen.  
4
5
6
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select HDD  
EXPLORE from the thumbnail menu. The display  
provides a screen that shows the information about the  
hard disk drive.  
From the menu, select OPERATION FORMAT (HDD)  
and select YES using the cursor buttons and SET  
button. Then, the confirmation message is displayed  
again. Select YES.  
The unit starts formatting the hard disk drive. Once  
formatted, the hard disk drive can be treated as a  
TYPE S HDD.  
Note  
Formatting a hard disk drive erases all contents of it.  
Note that you cannot erase the contents of certain  
partitions by specifying them.  
9. DATE/TIME  
This section indicates the date and time the data on the  
partition was recorded.  
10. SERIAL  
This section indicates the serial number of the P2 card  
that originally contained the data on the partition.  
Connection with external device: Connection with external devices using the USB 2.0 port  
145  
 
Writing data back to P2 cards  
You can select clips on the hard disk drive to be written back  
to P2 cards.  
1
2
Switch the mode to USB HOST. For more information,  
see [Switching to the USB HOST mode] (page 143).  
1
Switch the mode to USB HOST. For more information,  
see [Switching to the USB HOST mode] (page 143).  
Connect a hard disk drive via USB.  
A hard disk drive that has not been formatted with the  
unit must be formatted as directed in [Formatting a hard  
disk drive] (page 145).  
2
3
4
Connect a hard disk drive via USB.  
Insert the target P2 card in a slot.  
3
4
Insert a P2 card.  
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select HDD  
EXPLORE from the thumbnail menu. Move to the  
appropriate partition and select it with the SET button.  
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail  
screen.  
5
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select HDD  
EXPORT from the thumbnail menu. Then, specify the  
slot that contains the P2 card bearing the data to be  
written to the hard disk drive.  
5
6
From among the thumbnails, select the clips to be  
written to the P2 card.  
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select  
OPERATION IMPORT SELECTED CLIPS. Then,  
specify the slot that contains the target P2 card.  
6
Select YES to start writing.  
When the data is being written, a progress bar is  
displayed. To discontinue writing, press the SET button  
and select YES on the cancel confirmation screen.  
7
8
Select YES to start writing data back to the P2 card.  
When the writing is completed, the message “COPY  
COMPLETED!” is displayed.  
Notes  
To disable verification at the time of writing, select  
HDD SETUP from the thumbnail menu and set the  
option VERIFY to OFF. This speeds up writing without  
verifying data writing.  
Select ALL SLOT to write data collectively onto all P2  
cards currently inserted in the unit to the hard disk  
drive.  
Notes  
When only selected files are written, no verification is  
performed.  
Import data in clip units from cards with a different model  
number as data cannot be imported by the partition  
between such cards.  
7
When the writing is completed, the message “COPY  
COMPLETED!” is displayed.  
For a TYPE S or P2 STORE hard disk drive, you can write  
data back to a P2 card with the same model number on a  
card basis.  
Notes  
The target P2 cards must be preformatted.  
For a TYPE S hard disk drive, data can be written on a  
card basis. The data on up to 23 P2 cards can be stored  
on the hard disk drive. The data set on each P2 card is  
recognized as a separate drive by the PC.  
1
Switch the mode to USB HOST. For more information,  
see [Switching to the USB HOST mode] (page 143).  
If data on a P2 card that contains a defective clip must be  
written to a hard disk drive, then we recommend restoring  
that clip before copying the data.  
When the process is discontinued during verification, the  
data on the P2 card has been written to the hard disk  
drive.  
2
3
4
Connect a hard disk drive via USB.  
Insert the target P2 cards in slots.  
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select HDD  
EXPLORE. Then, move to the appropriate partition  
and select it with the SET button.  
5
From the thumbnail menu, select OPERATION ꢀ  
IMPORT ALL. Then, specify the slots that contain the  
empty target P2 cards.  
Connection with external device: Connection with external devices using the USB 2.0 port  
146  
 
6
7
Select YES to start writing data to the cards.  
<For your information>  
To disable verification during writing, select HDD ꢀ  
SETUP from the thumbnail menu and set the option  
VERIFY to OFF. This speeds up writing without verifying  
data writing.  
When the writing is completed, the message “COPY  
COMPLETED!” is displayed.  
Note  
If a clip is written back to a P2 card different from the original  
card that contained that clip, then the clip may be  
incomplete. If this is the case, reconnect the clip. For more  
information, see [Reconnection of Incomplete Clips]  
(page 129).  
Direction for using a hard disk drive  
A hard disk drive (including the P2 STORE (AJ-  
PCS060G)) must be used under the following conditions:  
– It must meet the operating requirements (e.g.  
temperature).  
– It must not be placed in an instable place or a place  
exposed to vibrations.  
Some hard disk drives do not operate properly.  
Some hard disk drives with the SATA (Serial ATA)  
interface or the PATA (Parallel ATA) interface connected  
by a USB conversion cable may not be recognized.  
When copying data, a hard disk drive must have sufficient  
free space.  
Do not remove the cable or the target P2 card or turn off  
the unit or hard disk drive during formatting or copying.  
Doing so requires the unit and the hard disk drive to be  
restarted.  
Since hard disk drives are high precision devices, there is  
a high possibility that they may become incapable of  
reading/writing data depending on the conditions of use.  
Take note that we will not be liable for loss of data  
caused by failed hard disk drives or any other  
problem as well as direct or indirect damages  
resulting from the loss of data.  
We do not guarantee that hard disk drives will operate  
properly with the unit or that the data on them will be  
properly retained if data copied to them from the unit has  
been replaced with other data using a PC.  
By using the drive mount converter distributed on the  
following URL, the hard disk drive can be mounted in the  
designated folder when connected.  
When the drive letter used to denote the hard disc drive is  
the same as one already assigned to a network drive, the  
partition may not be displayed. When this problem occurs,  
use the drive mount converter to mount the hard disk drive  
in a designated folder. The partition will then be displayed.  
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/  
Connection with external device: Connection with external devices using the USB 2.0 port  
147  
Maintenance and Inspections  
Inspections Before Shooting  
Make sure you check that the system is operating normally before embarking on a shoot. We recommend using a color video  
monitor to check the image.  
Preparing for Inspections  
1
2
Mount a charged battery pack.  
3
Insert a P2 card into the card slot and close the slide  
cover.  
Turn the POWER switch [ON] and check that 5 or more  
“BATT” indication marks appear.  
Confirm that the P2 card access LED for the inserted  
card slot lights up in orange. If P2 cards are inserted into  
multiple card slots, only the P2 card access LED for the  
first-inserted P2 card lights up in orange. Then, the other  
P2 card access LEDs light up in green when P2 cards  
are inserted.  
If the access LED for the P2 card slot in which a P2 card  
is inserted keeps blinking in green, or if there is no  
display, recording is not possible on that particular P2  
card.  
If fewer than 5 “BATT” indication marks appear,  
replace the battery with a fully-charged battery.  
1
3
2
Inspecting the Camera Unit  
1
2
3
4
Set the zoom to electric zoom mode and check the  
zoom operation.  
Check that the image changes to telephoto and wide  
angle.  
5
6
While holding down the instant iris automatic adjustment  
button, aim the lens at objects with different degrees of  
brightness, to check that the instant iris automatic  
adjustment operates properly.  
Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and check the  
zoom operation.  
Turn the manual zoom lever to check that the image  
changes to telephoto and wide angle.  
Return the iris to automatic adjustment mode and  
change the GAIN switch setting to [L], [M], and [H], to  
check the following items:  
The iris is adjusted for objects with the same  
brightness according to the switch setting.  
The gain value displayed on the viewfinder screen  
changes according to the switch setting.  
Set the iris to automatic adjustment mode and aim the  
lens at objects with different degrees of brightness, to  
check that the automatic iris adjustment operates  
normally.  
7
When a lens with an extender is mounted, set the  
extender to the operating position to check that the  
extender operates properly.  
Set the iris to manual adjustment mode and turn the iris  
ring, to check the manual iris adjustment.  
Maintenance and Inspections: Inspections Before Shooting  
148  
     
Inspecting the Memory Recording Functions  
Make sure you successively carry out the inspections from  
[1. Inspecting the P2 Card Recording] to [4. Inspecting the  
Earphone and Speaker].  
2. Inspecting the Audio Level Automatic  
Adjustment  
1
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1 and CH2 switches to  
[AUTO].  
1. Inspecting the P2 Card Recording  
1
Check on the display inside the viewfinder that the  
remaining P2 card recording capacity is sufficient.  
Please refer to [P2 Card Remaining Free Space/  
capacity Indication] (page 82) for information about P2  
card remaining recording capacity.  
2
3
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to [FRONT].  
Aim the microphone connected to the MIC IN jack at an  
appropriate sound source. Then, check that the level  
displays for both CH1 and CH2 change according to the  
sound level.  
2
3
4
Set the TCG switch to [R-RUN].  
Set the DISPLAY switch to [TC].  
3. Inspecting the Audio Level Manual Adjustment  
1
2
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to [FRONT].  
Press the camera’s REC START/STOP button to check  
the following items:  
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1 and CH2 switches to  
[MAN].  
The P2 access LED blinks in orange.  
The REC lamp inside the viewfinder lights up.  
System warnings do not appear inside the viewfinder.  
3
Turn the AUDIO LEVEL CH1 and CH2 controls.  
Check that the level display increases when the controls  
are turned to the right.  
5
Press the camera’s REC START/STOP button again.  
This step confirms that the P2 access LED is on and  
showing orange, and the REC lamp in the viewfinder is  
turned off.  
4. Inspecting the Earphone and Speaker  
1
2
Turn the MONITOR control to check that the speaker  
volume changes.  
6
7
Press the LIGHT button to check that the screen  
brightness in the display window increases.  
Connect an earphone to the PHONES jack.  
Check that the speaker is turned off and the microphone  
sound can be heard from the earphone.  
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to check that the clip that  
has just been shot is played back from the beginning.  
Check that recording and playback operate properly.  
3
Turn the MONITOR control to check that the earphone  
volume changes.  
8
When multiple P2 cards are inserted into the P2 card  
slots, press the user button to which the SLOT SEL  
function has been assigned in order to select the P2  
card used for recording.  
5. Inspection for Using an External Microphone  
1
Connect an external microphone to the AUDIO IN CH1  
and CH2 connectors.  
Repeat the operations in steps 4 to 5 and 7 to check that  
recording and playback operate properly.  
2
3
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to [REAR].  
Set the LINE/MIC/+48V selector switches on the rear  
panel to [MIC] or [+48V], depending on the power  
supply type of the external microphone.  
MIC:  
+48V:  
For a microphone with internal power supply.  
For a microphone with external power supply.  
4
Aim the microphone at a sound source. Then check that  
the audio level meter in the display window and the  
audio level display inside the viewfinder change  
according to the sound level.  
The channels can also be checked separately by  
connecting a single microphone to each channel.  
Maintenance and Inspections: Inspections Before Shooting  
149  
   
7
Set the TCG switch to [F-RUN].  
Check that the counter display number changes  
regardless of recording status.  
6. Inspection of the clock, time code, and user  
bits  
1
2
Set the user bits as required.  
Please refer to [Setting of the user bits] (page 62) for the  
setting procedures.  
Set the DISPLAY switch to [UB].  
Each time the HOLD button is pressed, make sure that  
the displayed value changes in the following sequence:  
VTCG DATE TIME No display (time zone) ꢀ  
TCG; and also verify that the displayed value is correct.  
If DATE, TIME, or time zone is not correct, refer to  
[Setting the Internal Clock’s Date and Time] (page 65)  
for guidance on setting the correct values.  
Set the time code.  
Please refer to [Setting the Time Code] (page 66) for the  
setting procedures.  
3
4
Set the TCG switch to [R-RUN].  
Note  
Press the REC START/STOP button.  
Check that the counter display number changes as  
recording progresses.  
Note that date and time data set for DATE, TIME, and  
time zone is recorded in clips, and affects the playback  
sequence, etc. at the time of thumbnail manipulations.  
5
Press the REC START/STOP button again.  
Check that recording stops and the counter display  
number stops changing.  
Maintenance  
Cleaning Inside the Viewfinder  
Do not use thinner or other solvents to remove dirt.  
Wipe the lens with a commercially available lens cleaner.  
Do not wipe the mirror. If dirt or rubbish is sticking on the  
mirror, remove it with a commercially available air blower.  
Phenomenon Inherent to CCD Cameras  
Smears  
White defects  
Smears may appear when shooting an object with very high  
brightness.  
This phenomenon becomes more obvious as the electronic  
shutter speed becomes faster.  
When the frame rate is set low during operation under VFR,  
tiny defects may be seen in the video. White defects become  
more noticeable in high-temperature operating conditions.  
Replacing the Backup Battery  
The camera is shipped from the factory with a backup  
battery already mounted.  
When the battery runs out, the “BACKUP BATT EMPTY”  
display appears on the viewfinder screen for 5 seconds after  
the POWER switch is turned [ON].  
The internal clock stops operating when the battery runs out.  
Also, the TCG time code value returns to “00:00:00:00”, and  
the time code backup is disabled. The battery must be  
replaced.  
Please consult your distributor for replacement with a new  
battery (CR2032).  
The backup battery is visible when the panel on the LCD  
monitor side is removed (right side when viewed from the  
front).  
Note  
Please contact the store where you purchased the camera  
when replacing the battery.  
Maintenance and Inspections: Maintenance  
150  
   
Connector Signals  
Panasonic part number K1AA104H0038  
Panasonic part number K1AY104J0001  
DC IN  
DC OUT  
Maker part number  
HA16RX-4P (SW1)  
(Hirose Denki)  
Maker part number  
HR10A-7R-4SC(73)  
(Hirose Denki)  
1
2
3
4
GND  
NC  
1
2
GND  
R TALLY  
(Open collector)  
NC  
Connector at the cable side  
Maker part number HR10A-7P-4P(73)  
3
4
REC START SW  
+12 V  
+12 V OUT  
(Max. 1.5 A)  
(Hirose Denki)  
4
1
2
3
1
2
4
3
Note  
Ensure that the polarities are used correctly for a power  
supply from an external source.  
Panasonic part number K1AB105B0002  
FRONT MIC IN  
Maker part number  
NC5FBH  
(NEUTRIK)  
1
2
3
4
5
GND  
L CH IN (H)  
L CH IN (C)  
R CH IN (H)  
R CH IN (C)  
PUSH  
5
1
2
4
3
Panasonic part number K1AB103A0011  
AUDIO IN  
Maker part number  
HA16PRM-3SG  
(Hirose Denki)  
1
2
3
GND  
AUDIO IN (H)  
AUDIO IN (C)  
PUSH  
2
1
3
Panasonic part number K1AA105H0016  
AUDIO OUT  
Maker part number  
HA16RD-5P(76)  
(Hirose Denki)  
1
2
3
4
5
GND  
L CH OUT (H)  
L CH OUT (C)  
R CH OUT (H)  
R CH OUT (C)  
1
5
4
2
3
Maintenance and Inspections: Maintenance  
151  
Panasonic part number K1AY110JA001  
Maker part number HR10A-10R-10SC(71)  
REMOTE  
1
2
3
4
5
CAM DATA (H)  
Data from the camera to the remote control (H)  
(Hirose Denki)  
CAM DATA (C)  
CAM CONT (H)  
CAM CONT (C)  
Data from the camera to the remote control (C)  
Control signals from the remote control to the camera (H)  
Control signals from the remote control to the camera (C)  
Connector at the cable side  
Maker part number HR10A-10P-10P(73)  
Identification signals of the remote control  
Low: ON  
RC-ON  
(Hirose Denki)  
6
7
8
9
RC VIDEO OUT  
RC VIDEO GND  
NC  
Video signals output to the remote control  
GND of the video signals to the remote control  
Not used  
8
5
1
2
7
10  
9
UNREG 12 V  
DC +12 V power supply (AJ-RC10G: Max. 0.75 A)  
GND  
3
6
10 GND  
4
Panasonic part number K1AB120H0001  
VF  
Maker part number  
HR12-14RA-20SC  
(Hirose Denki)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
UNREG-12 V  
DC +12 V power supply (AJ-HVF21G: About 0.35 A)  
DC +12 V power supply  
UNREG-12 V  
A9.0 V  
DC +9 V power supply (not used)  
GND for the viewfinder PB signals  
GND for the viewfinder PR signals  
Viewfinder Y signals output  
VF-PB-GND  
VF-PR-GND  
VF-Y  
1
2
7
12  
17  
3
8
13  
18  
4
9
14  
19  
5
10  
15  
20  
6
11  
16  
VF-Y-GND  
VF-CLK  
GND for the viewfinder Y signals  
Serial data clock pulse signals  
Pulse signals for reading serial-parallel conversion data  
Serial data signals for serial-parallel conversion  
GND  
VF-WR  
10 VF-DATA  
11 UNREG-GND  
12 ZEBRA-SW  
13 PEAKING  
14 SPARE  
On/off of the zebra signals  
Control of the peaking (not used)  
Standby (not used)  
15 VF-PR  
Viewfinder PR signal output  
16 VF-PB  
Viewfinder PB signal output  
17 MARKER-SW  
18 FRONT-VR  
19 VR-GND  
On/off of the marker (not used)  
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL adjustment (not used)  
GND for the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL (not used)  
GND  
20 UNREG-GND  
Caution  
Total amount of current from the respective connectors for DC OUT, REMOTE, VF,  
and LENS should not exceed 2.5 A.  
Maintenance and Inspections: Maintenance  
152  
Panasonic part number K1AY112JA001  
Maker part number HR10A-10R-12SC(71)  
LENS  
1
RET-SW  
On/off of the return video  
(Hirose Denki)  
RETURN ON:  
RETURN OFF:  
GND  
OPEN  
2
REC-START/  
STOP  
Control for recording start/stop  
+5 V  
9
1
10  
8
2
0 V  
11  
12  
7
3
6
START STOP START  
4
5
3
4
GND  
GND  
IRIS-AUTO  
On/off of the forced iris servo  
SERVO ON:  
SERVO OFF:  
+5 V±0.5 V  
OPEN  
5
IRIS-CONT  
Control output for the lens iris  
F2.8: –6.2 V, F16: +3.4 V, CLOSE: +2.5 V  
6
7
UNREG-12 V  
IRIS-POSI  
+12 V power supply for the lens (Max. 1.5 A)  
Iris position signals  
+3.4 V (F16) to +6.2 V (F2.8)  
8
9
IRIS-G-MAX  
EXT-POSI  
IRIS REMOTE/LOCAL (AUTO) signals  
REMOTE:  
LOCAL (AUTO):  
+5 V±0.5 V  
GND  
On/off of the built-in extender  
EXTENDER ON: GND  
EXTENDER OFF: OPEN  
10 ZOOM-POSI  
11 FOCUS-POSI  
12 SPARE  
Zoom position signals  
Focus position signal  
Standby (not used)  
Panasonic part number K1AY106J0001  
GPS  
Maker part number  
HR10A-7R-6SC(73)  
(Hirose Denki)  
1
2
3
GPS TXA  
GPS RXA  
GPS VBAT  
Transmission data from the GPS unit to the camera  
Transmission data from the camera to the GPS unit  
Backup power supply connector for the GPS unit  
(DC +3.3 V)  
6
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
REC START SW Control signals of recording start/stop  
GPS VCC  
GPS GND  
Power supply connector for the GPS unit (DC +3.3 V)  
GND  
5
Maintenance and Inspections: Maintenance  
153  
Panasonic part number K1GB25A00010  
Unislot Interface  
Maker part number  
HDBB-25S(05)  
(Hirose Denki)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CH-1 SHIELD  
CH-1 HOT  
CH-1 COLD  
GND  
GND  
Audio input from the wireless receiver: CH1 HOT  
Audio input from the wireless receiver: CH1 COLD  
13  
25  
1
GND  
14  
+12 V UNREG  
RX ON  
Power supply to the wireless receiver  
Power supply remote output to the wireless receiver  
RF WARN  
RM5  
RF warning input from the wireless receiver  
Not used  
RM4  
Not used  
10 SPARE 1  
Not used  
11 SPARE 2  
Not used  
12 EXT CLK  
Not used  
13 CLK SHIELD  
14 CH-2 SHIELD  
15 CH-2 HOT  
16 CH-2 COLD  
17 +5.6 V  
Not used  
GND  
Audio input from the wireless receiver: CH2 HOT  
Audio input from the wireless receiver: CH2 COLD  
Power supply to the wireless receiver  
18 VIDEO OUT  
19 VIDEO RET  
20 VIDEO EN  
21 RM 1 (RM CLK)  
22 RM 2 (RM DATA)  
23 RM 3 (RM WR)  
24 RM +5 V  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
25 RM GND  
Maintenance and Inspections: Maintenance  
154  
Warning System  
Warning Description Tables  
If a problem is detected immediately after the power is turned on, or during operation, this will be indicated by the WARNING  
lamp, lamps inside the viewfinder and a warning tone.  
Note  
The WARNING lamp has the highest priority, followed by the tally lamp, and then the warning tone. When multiple errors  
occur simultaneously a higher priority indication will be triggered. The [WIRELESS-RF], however, may not be indicated,  
depending on the menu setting.  
1. System Errors  
4. P2 Card Fully Recorded  
Display window  
indication  
Display window  
indication  
All 7 bar indicators for remaining MEDIA  
capacity start blinking.  
The error code lights up.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Blinks 4 times per second.  
Blinks 4 times per second.  
This lamp will illuminate continuously until  
an operation is made after recording.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
This lamp will flash 4 times every second  
until an operation is made after recording.  
The “SYSTEM ERROR” indication and  
the error code light up.  
Viewfinder  
The “END” indicator blinks.  
When a write protected P2 card has been  
inserted, the “WP” indicator lights up.  
Warning tone  
Beeps continuously.  
Viewfinder  
An error in the reference signal or the  
communication.  
Warning description  
This tone will sound continuously until an  
operation is made after recording.  
Warning tone  
Recording/playback  
operation  
The operation stops.  
The P2 cards are recorded to maximum  
capacity.  
Warning description  
Please confirm [Error Codes] (page 158)  
and consult your distributor.  
Countermeasures  
Recording/playback  
operation  
The recording stops.  
2. Card removal error  
Display window  
Delete the clips in the P2 card or insert a  
new P2 card.  
Countermeasures  
Error code “E-30” blinks.  
indication  
5. Image Sequence Error (24P, 30P, 25P)  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Blinks 4 times per second.  
Blinks 4 times per second.  
Display window  
indication  
“E-40” appears in the time code display  
field.  
The “TURN POWER OFF” indicator lights  
up.  
Viewfinder  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Blinks 4 times per second.  
Blinks 4 times per second while recording  
continues.  
Warning tone  
Continues to beep.  
The P2 card being accessed has been  
Warning description removed, resulting in an error in the  
Viewfinder  
The “REC WARNING” indicator lights up.  
internal memory of the unit.  
Beeps 4 times per second while recording  
continues.  
Warning tone  
Recording/playback  
Cannot be performed.  
operation  
There are abnormal conditions in the  
Warning description image sequence of the 24P, 30P, or 25P  
Turn off the power to the unit. If there is  
an error in a clip on the removed P2 card,  
repair the clip.  
mode.  
Countermeasures  
Images can be recorded and played  
Recording/playback  
back, but some frames may be dropped  
operation  
or the sequences of TC and UB may shift.  
3. Battery Empty  
Confirm the recording/playback operation  
after turning off the power supply once  
and then turning it on again. If the error is  
not corrected after executing this  
procedure, contact the dealer.  
Display window  
indication  
All 7 bar indicators for battery remaining  
capacity start blinking.  
Countermeasures  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Lights up.  
Blinks once per second.  
The BATT LED lights up.  
Beeps continuously.  
Viewfinder  
Warning tone  
Warning description The battery has run out.  
Recording/playback  
The operation stops.  
operation  
Countermeasures  
Replace the battery.  
Maintenance and Inspections: Warning System  
155  
           
6. Recording Error  
8. 1394 Error  
“00:00:00:11” appears in the time code  
display field. Even after recording is  
stopped, this display continues to blink  
until the next operation is performed.  
Display window  
indication  
The “1394 E-92” indicator in the display  
window blinks.  
Display window  
indication  
Blinks 4 times per second while recording  
continues.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Blinks 4 times per second while recording  
continues.  
Blinks 4 times per second while recording  
continues.  
WARNING lamp  
Blinks 4 times per second while recording  
continues.  
“1394 INITIAL ERROR” indicator lights up  
(during pause and recording).  
Tally lamp  
Viewfinder  
Viewfinder  
Warning tone  
The “REC WARNING” indicator lights up.  
Beeps 4 times per second while recording  
continues.  
Warning tone  
Warning description  
Beeps 4 times per second while recording  
continues.  
This indicates a failure of the DVCPRO  
connector.  
This indicates a failure either in the P2  
card recording or the recording circuit.  
This is displayed when attempting to  
record clips where the total quantity  
exceeds the upper limit (1000 pieces) for  
a single P2 card.  
Signals cannot be controlled or supplied  
Recording/playback to the device connected to the DVCPRO  
Warning description  
operation  
connector. However, recording and  
playback can be performed on the unit.  
Check the connection between the  
IEEE1394 cable and the DVCPRO  
connector, settings of any external device  
and menus, and the turn on the power  
again.  
Recording/playback  
operation  
The recording may stop or continue.  
Confirm the recording/playback operation  
after turning off the power supply once  
and then turning it on again.  
If the recording cannot be performed  
normally, change the P2 card.  
Countermeasures  
Countermeasures  
If the warning indication is still  
illuminated, consult your distributor.  
9. Battery Nearly Empty  
7. Low Wireless Signal Reception  
One of the bars in the battery remaining  
Display window  
indication  
Display window  
No display.  
indicator starts blinking.  
Blinks once per second.  
Blinks once per second.  
The “BATT” LED blinks.  
Beeps 4 times per second.  
indication  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Blinks 4 times per second (during pause  
and recording).  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Viewfinder  
Blinks 4 times per second while recording  
continues.  
Warning tone  
Warning description The battery is about to run out.  
The “WIRELESS-RF” indicator lights up  
while recording continues.  
Viewfinder  
Recording/playback  
Continues to operate.  
operation  
Beeps 4 times per second while recording  
continues.  
Warning tone  
Warning description  
Countermeasures  
Replace the battery as required.  
This error indicates poor wireless audio  
reception conditions.  
10. P2 Card Nearly Full  
Recording/playback Continues to operate without receiving  
One of the bars for remaining MEDIA  
capacity starts blinking.  
Display window  
indication  
operation  
the wireless microphone signal.  
Check the microphone power supply and  
the reception status of the wireless  
receiver.  
Blinks once per second while recording  
continues.  
Countermeasures  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Blinks once per second while recording  
continues.  
The P2 card remaining capacity indicator  
blinks.  
Viewfinder  
Beeps once per second while recording  
continues.  
Warning tone  
Warning description  
The total remaining capacity of all the P2  
cards is 2 minutes or less.  
Recording/playback  
operation  
Continues to operate.  
Replace the cards. If there is an empty  
card slot, insert a new card.  
Countermeasures  
Maintenance and Inspections: Warning System  
156  
   
11. P2 Card Error  
13. PROXY CARD ERROR  
Display window  
If the error occurs during recording,  
“00:00:00:11” appears in the time code  
display field. The indication continues to  
flash after recording is stopped and until  
the next operation is performed. There is  
no indication if the error occurs during  
playback.  
No display.  
indication  
Flashes 4 times per second for a period  
of about 3 seconds.  
Display window  
indication  
WARNING lamp  
Flashes 4 times per second for a period  
of about 5 seconds.  
Tally lamp  
The “PROXY CARD ERROR” indicator  
light up.  
If the error occurs during recording, the  
lamp flashes 4 times per second for a  
period of about 3 seconds after recording  
stops. The lamp does not light if the error  
occurs during playback.  
Viewfinder  
WARNING lamp  
Warning tone  
It does not sound.  
Proxy recording stops because of failure  
Warning description on either the video encoder card or the  
If the error occurs during recording, the  
lamp flashes 4 times per second for a  
period of about 3 seconds after recording  
stops. The lamp does not light if the error  
occurs during playback.  
stream.  
Recording/playback  
The unit continues to operate.  
operation  
Tally lamp  
Viewfinder  
Check the video encoder card or avoid  
Countermeasures  
use of proxy recording.  
A flashing “CARD ERR ” appears. In  
the actual indication the is replaced by  
the slot number of the P2 card that  
triggered the error.  
If the error occurs during recording, the  
tone sounds 4 times per second for a  
period of about 3 seconds after recording  
stops. The tone does not sound if the  
error occurs during playback.  
Warning tone  
An error has occurred while recording  
data to or playing data from a P2 card.  
Warning description  
Recording/playback  
operation  
Stop recording or playback.  
Replace the affected P2 card.  
Countermeasures  
12. FAN STOP  
Display window  
indication  
No display.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Blinks 4 times per second.  
No display.  
The “FAN STOP” indicator blinks while  
recording continues.  
Viewfinder  
Warning tone  
It does not sound.  
The fan is at rest because something is  
wrong with it.  
Warning description  
The unit continues to operate. However,  
when the unit operates with the fan  
Recording/playback stopped, then the temperature inside  
operation  
rises. While the unit continues to operate,  
clips may not be recorded or played back  
properly.  
Immediately stop using the unit and  
consult your distributor.  
Countermeasures  
Maintenance and Inspections: Warning System  
157  
 
Error Codes  
The following error codes are displayed in the display window if an error occurs in the camera:  
Confirm the type of warning and refer to the details in the [Warning Description Tables] (page 155) for countermeasures.  
Code No.  
E-11  
Description  
1. System Errors  
Video initialization error  
Recording control error  
P2 card removal error  
LCD microcontroller error  
E-27  
E-30  
E-34  
E-38  
E-39  
E-3F  
E-40  
E-63  
E-6F  
1. System Errors  
2. Card removal error  
1. System Errors  
P2 streaming microcontroller error  
1. System Errors  
Abnormal initialization of the AVC-Intra codec  
Microprocessor error in the camera control circuit  
Image sequence error (in case of 24P, 30P and 25P), GENLOCK error  
Something is wrong with the system control microprocessor.  
Reference signal error.  
1. System Errors  
1. System Errors  
5. Image Sequence Error (24P, 30P, 25P)  
1. System Errors  
1. System Errors  
00:00:00:11 Recording error on a P2 card  
6. Recording Error/11. P2 Card Error  
Card Warning Code  
Indication in display  
window  
Code No.  
Description  
Recording  
The directory structure on the P2 card is not  
supported. ([DIR NG CARD (Slot No.)] is  
indicated on the viewfinder.)  
Operation continues. However, back up data  
on the P2 card as soon as possible, and  
format the card before using it again.  
E-70  
A warning code blinks once  
every 2 seconds on the time  
code display section of the  
display window.  
The maximum number of overwrites on the P2 Operation continues. However, recording or  
card has been exceeded. ([RUN DOWN  
CARD (Slot No.)] is indicated on the  
viewfinder.)  
playback may not operate correctly. It is  
recommended that you replace the P2 card  
with another one.  
E-71  
Maintenance and Inspections: Warning System  
158  
   
Warning and Error Display for Thumbnail Operation and USB HOST MODE  
Item  
Message  
Description  
Measure  
CANNOT ACCESS!  
Data cannot be accessed because it is corrupted Restore media and clips to normal state before  
or for other reasons.  
access.  
WRITE  
The P2 or SD card is write protected.  
Insert write-enabled media.  
PROTECTED!  
CARD FULL!  
NO CARD!  
The P2 or SD card is full.  
Insert media with sufficient capacity.  
Insert compatible media.  
No P2 or SD card is inserted.  
The designated file is not found.  
Images cannot be copied.  
NO FILE!  
Check the file.  
CANNOT COPY!  
CANNOT DELETE !  
Check the conditions for copying.  
Match devices and contents version.  
Match devices and contents version.  
Contents version mismatch prevents deletion.  
UNKNOWN  
CONTENTS  
FORMAT!  
Warning displayed to indicate contents version  
mismatch.  
CANNOT FORMAT!  
CANNOT REPAIR!  
P2 card problem prevents formatting.  
Check P2 card.  
Data cannot be repaired since content that  
cannot be repaired is selected.  
Check selected content.  
CANNOT RE-  
CONNECT!  
A clip that does not span multiple P2 cards  
cannot be reconnected.  
Check selected content.  
INVALID VALUE!  
Entered data was invalid.  
Enter data in a valid range.  
UNKNOWN DATA!  
The metadata character code is invalid.  
Use UTF-8 for the metadata character code. Use  
the viewer to enter correct characters.  
Thumbnails  
CANNOT REPAIR IN Some of the selected clip could not be repaired.  
SELECTION!  
NO SD CARD!  
No SD card is inserted.  
Insert an SD card.  
NO COPY TO SAME A clip cannot be copied to the card storing the  
Copy the selected clip to a card that does not  
contain the original clip.  
CARD!  
original clip.  
SAME CLIP IS  
SELECTED!  
The clip cannot be copied because a clip that has Confirm the selected clip and release either the  
already been copied and the original clip have  
been selected.  
source clip or the destination clip and then  
execute the copy operation.  
USER CLIP NAME  
MODIFIED!  
Characters in the clip name had to be deleted in The user clip name plus the counter value can  
adding the counter value.  
only contain up to 100 bytes. Characters in the  
clip name are automatically deleted when the  
total exceeds 100 bytes.  
TOO MANY CLIPS!  
Too many clips are selected.  
Reduce the number of selected clips.  
LACK OF REC  
CAPACITY!  
There is not enough recording capacity left on the Insert a card with sufficient recording capacity.  
card.  
CANNOT CHANGE!  
Any thumbnails that cannot be produced on the  
AVC-Intra100 or AVC-Intra50 and displayed in  
gray cannot be changed at the text memo  
position.  
Set SYSTEM MODE according to the clips.  
MISSING CLIP!  
A shot mark will be added to the clips recorded  
on multiple P2 cards when all P2 cards are not  
inserted yet.  
Insert all P2 cards with recorded clips, and  
confirm that the  
incomplete clip indicators  
disappear, and then add shot marks.  
CANNOT CHANGE!  
[PERSON] will be entered while the text memo is Enter [TEXT] before entering [PERSON].  
not available.  
Soft  
keyboard  
CANNOT SET!  
The entered value is incorrect.  
Change the value.  
INVALID VALUE!  
Maintenance and Inspections: Warning System  
159  
Item  
Message  
Description  
Measure  
HDD CAPACITY  
FULL!  
Not enough space left on the hard disk.  
There is not enough space on the connected  
hard disk. Use a new hard disk or formatted hard  
disk.  
TOO MANY  
PARTITIONS!  
There are too many partitions.  
Hard disks can handle up to 23 partitions. Use a  
new hard disk or formatted hard disk.  
HDD  
DISCONNECTED!  
The unit is not connected to a hard disk.  
Reconnect the USB cable. If the hard disk does  
not operate normally, turn it off and turn it back on  
again.  
CANNOT FORMAT!  
The hard disk cannot be initialized.  
Multiple devices are connected.  
Connect another hard disk drive.  
TOO MANY  
TARGETS!  
Disconnect devices, turn off the unit and turn it  
back on again.  
UNKNOWN DEVICE The connected DVD drive is not compatible.  
CONNECTED!  
Disconnect devices, turn off the unit and turn it  
back on again.  
CANNOT ACCESS  
TARGET!  
An error occurred during hard disk access.  
Check hard disk status and connection.  
HDD  
(USB HOST  
mode)  
CANNOT  
RECOGNIZE HDD!  
The destination target cannot be properly  
recognized.  
Reboot the hard disk or connect a different hard  
disk.  
CANNOT ACCESS  
CARD!  
An error occurred during P2 card access.  
Check P2 card.  
MISMATCH  
COMPONENT!  
Copying is not possible since the model number Use a P2 card with the same model number or  
of the destination card does not match that of the import video in clip units.  
source card.  
P2 CARD IS  
The P2 card is not formatted.  
Use a formatted P2 card.  
UNFORMATTED!  
CARD IS EMPTY!  
CANNOT COPY!  
The P2 card selected for copying is empty.  
The compare check after copying failed.  
Copying is not performed since the card is empty.  
Copy the data again.  
VERIFICATION  
FAILED!  
PLEASE FORMAT P2 This warning indicates that data could not be  
You cannot copy to a P2 card that contains data.  
CARD!  
imported from a hard disk to a P2 card because Format the card on a P2 device and copy again.  
the P2 card contained recorded data.  
Maintenance and Inspections: Warning System  
160  
Menu  
Menu Configuration  
MENU  
USER MENU  
MAIN MENU  
SYSTEM SETTING  
SYSTEM MODE  
OPTION MODE  
REC FUNCTION  
OUTPUT SEL  
PAINT  
RB GAIN CONTROL  
RGB BLACK CONTROL  
MATRIX  
OPTION MENU  
HD SDI AB OUT MARKER  
MONI OUT MARKER  
LCD MONITOR  
GENLOCK  
OPTION  
COLOR CORRECTION  
LOW SETTING  
MID SETTING  
HIGH SETTING  
ADDITIONAL DTL  
SKIN TONE DTL  
KNEE/LEVEL  
1394 SETTING  
GAMMA  
CAMERA SETTING  
VF  
VF DISPLAY  
VF MARKER  
CAM OPERATION  
CAMERA ID  
VF USER BOX  
VF INDICATOR1  
VF INDICATOR2  
VF INDICATOR3  
MODE CHECK IND  
! LED  
SHUTTER SPEED  
SHUTTER SELECT  
USER SW  
SW MODE  
WHITE BALANCE MODE  
LENS/IRIS  
Opening the Menus  
BATTERY/P2CARD  
BATTERY SETTING1  
BATTERY SETTING2  
MIC/AUDIO 1  
MAIN OPERATION  
FILE  
USER MENU:  
Displayed when the MENU button is  
pressed.  
SD CARD READ/WRITE  
SD CARD R/W SELECT  
CAC FILE CARD READ  
MIC/AUDIO 2  
MAIN MENU:  
TC/UB  
LENS FILE  
LENS FILE CARD R/W  
UMID SET/INFO  
Displayed when the MENU button is  
pressed for at least 3 seconds.  
OPTION MENU:  
SCENE  
INITIALIZE  
Displayed when the MENU button is  
pressed while pressing the LIGHT  
button.  
MAINTENANCE  
LENS ADJ  
BLACK SHADING  
WHITE SHADING  
LENS FILE ADJ  
CAC ADJ  
[SELECT MODE]  
SYSTEM SETTING  
PAINT  
USER MENU SELECT  
VF  
DIAGNOSTIC1  
DIAGNOSTIC2  
HOURS METER  
CAM OPE  
MAIN OPE  
FILE  
MAINTENANCE  
Notes  
The items highlighted in grey cannot be selected by <USER MENU SELECT>.  
The underlined items can only be selected by <USER MENU SELECT> as one whole page (with all sub-items). Individual  
sub-items cannot be selected separately.  
About Menu Description Tables  
a. The following letters indicate whether the modified menu data is  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
saved to or read out from the memory.  
The – indicates that the data cannot be saved or read.  
S = Can be saved and read as scene file data.  
C = Can be saved or read using SD CARD READ/WRITE.  
U = Can be saved and read as user data.  
Please refer to [SCENE] (page 197) and [INITIALIZE]  
(page 197).  
Remarks  
SCAN REVERSE OFF  
ON  
This setting is for correcting an image  
which has been inverted by a film-use  
lens or anamorphic lens attached to  
the unit.  
S C U F R  
F = Can be read using READ FACTORY DATA.  
Please refer to [INITIALIZE] (page 197).  
R = Can set whether or not to store changes using the RC DATA  
SAVE menu option.  
a
b
c
Please refer to [Connection of the remote control unit (AJ-  
RC10G)] (page 117).  
b. This section shows the adjustable range of the set value, and  
available options for this item.  
c. About the settings available for this item.  
Menu: Menu Configuration  
161  
       
USER MENU:USER MENU is factory-set. The menu can be  
configured to suit your preferences by  
specifying each option according to your  
purposes and frequency of use, through the  
<USER MENU SELECT> screen, which is  
accessible from the MAIN MENU page.  
For more information, see [Selecting Options  
for USER MENU] (page 164).  
a
To display USER MENU, press the MENU  
button.  
MAIN MENU: Allows you to set all options on the settings  
menu.  
This menu has a category-by-category  
structure, layered according to purposes and  
frequency of use.  
To display MAIN MENU, press the MENU  
button for 3 seconds or longer.  
d
c
SYSTEM SETTING:  
b
This option is used to specify recording signal,  
recording system, etc.  
a. LIGHT button  
b. Jog dial button  
c. MENU button  
PAINT: This option is used to fine-adjust images while  
monitoring the output waveform of the  
camera, using the waveform monitor.  
Normally, this adjustment requires assistance  
from a video engineer.  
d. SHOT MARKER/MENU CANCEL button  
This option may be performed by an external  
remote control. However, it is valid when the  
unit is used as a stand-alone device.  
VF:  
Used to select the information items to be  
displayed in the viewfinder screen.  
CAM OPERATION:  
Used to change settings according to the  
conditions for the subject.  
MAIN OPERATION:  
Used to specify recording-related items, such  
as audio settings, time code, battery and P2  
card remaining amounts.  
FILE:  
Used to specify file-related items such as SD  
memory card reading/writing and lens file  
settings.  
MAINTENANCE:  
Used to specify maintenance-related items.  
USER MENU SELECT:  
Used to edit USER MENU.  
OPTION MENU:  
Provides options which may be needed if  
functions are added in the future.  
To display OPTION MENU, hold down the  
LIGHT button and press the MENU button.  
For more information, contact your distributor.  
Menu: Menu Configuration  
162  
Setting Menu Options  
The menu options are set with the MENU and jog dial  
buttons.  
The menu comprises main menu, sub-menus and options  
menus.  
The data specified through menu options are written and  
saved in the internal memory of the unit.  
This section describes how to set options in MAIN MENU.  
The other menus can be configured in the same manner (the  
method of displaying the menu screen depends on the  
particular menu).  
4
5
Turn the jog dial button to move the mark () to a  
desired option. Then, press the jog dial button. The  
value starts blinking.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
Note  
When the unit is in thumbnail mode, the viewfinder displays  
“THUMBNAIL OPEN”, disabling navigation through the  
menu.  
Turn the jog dial button to change the value.  
1
2
3
Press the MENU button for 3 seconds or longer.  
The MAIN MENU screen appears, together with its  
options.  
To increase the value:  
Turn the jog dial button clockwise, as seen from the front  
of the camera.  
  
To decrease the value:  
Turn the jog dial button anti-clockwise, as seen from the  
front of the camera.  
Each turn of the dial switches the value by one step. A  
quick turn changes the value rapidly; a slow turn makes  
a fine adjustment.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
To turn an option on or off:  
To select “ON”, turn the jog dial button clockwise, as  
seen from the front of the camera.  
To select “OFF”, turn the jog dial button anti-clockwise,  
as seen from the front of the camera.  
Turn the jog dial button to move the mark () to a  
desired menu option. Then, press the jog dial button to  
display the sub-menu screen.  
To return the changed set value to the previous one:  
To return the changed value to the previous one, press  
the SHOT MARKER/MENU CANCEL button once while  
the changed value is flashing and “PUSH CANCEL  
BACK TO PREV” will appear. Press the SHOT  
MARKER/MENU CANCEL button again to return the set  
value to the value before the change.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
Notes  
  
The following menu items cannot be canceled using  
the SHOT MARKER/MENU CANCEL button.  
– Pages on the USER MENU SELECT screen  
– Pages on the FILE screen  
– CAMERA ID  
– Part of the WHITE BALANCE MODE pages  
– BATTERY SETTING1, 2  
Turn the jog dial button to move the mark () to a  
desired menu option. Then, press the jog dial button to  
display the options screen.  
– UMID SET/INFO  
In the 1080-23.98P and 1080-24P modes, the menu  
displayed on the LCD monitor may blink. This is  
normal, and does not indicate that a fault has  
occurred.  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
Menu: Menu Configuration  
163  
   
6
7
8
Press the jog dial button.  
The value stops blinking and is accepted.  
To change the settings for other options on the same  
page, repeat steps 4 - 6.  
When the settings are finalized, press the MENU button.  
This terminates the menu option setting mode and  
returns the unit to normal operation mode.  
Go to the USER MENU SELECT page from MAIN MENU.  
Then, open relevant menu screens to select options to add  
to USER MENU.  
Only the selected options are displayed as options in USER  
MENU.  
For information about how to navigate this menu, see  
[Setting Menu Options] (page 163).  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
Note  
Options with [] are effective. The number of options that  
can be added to USER MENU is 143=42 (3 pages of  
options) for camera-related options, and 14 (1 page of  
options) for memory-related options. Note, however, that the  
number of options that can be added is reduced if menu  
options not normally displayed in the selected mode are  
added.  
Menu: Menu Configuration  
164  
 
Menu Description Tables  
SYSTEM SETTING  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.  
SYSTEM MODE  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
SYSTEM MODE 1080-59.94i  
1080-23.98PsF  
1080-24PsF  
CAMERA MODE (DVCPROHD/  
For setting the system frequency.  
When this item is switched, turn off the  
POWER switch on the unit and then  
turn it on again.  
When using the DVCPRO HD recording  
format in the 1080-60i or 1080-50i  
modes, the pull-down method  
(conventional camera mode) will be set.  
Note  
60i of 1080-  
59.94i)  
60i  
30P  
24P  
1080-50i  
720-59.94P  
720-60P  
Notes  
720-50P  
24PA  
When USB DEVICE mode is  
selected, no change can be made to  
this option.  
When the remote control unit (AJ-  
RC10G) is connected, this item is  
not displayed.  
This option is not displayed when 720P  
has been selected.  
(DVCPROHD/  
50i of 1080-50i)  
50i  
25P  
(Modes other  
than the above)  
24P  
S C U F R  
25P  
REC FORMAT  
Used to set the codec mode and the  
recording/shooting mode.  
DVCPROHD:  
Recording is performed using  
DVCPRO HD codec.  
AVC-I 100:  
S C U F R  
VFR  
ON  
OFF  
This is for setting the variable frame rate.  
This option is only displayed when 720P  
has been selected.  
ON:  
Operates with a variable frame  
rate. Operates with a frame rate  
set using FRAME RATE.  
Recording is performed using  
AVC-Intra100 codec.  
AVC-I 50:  
OFF: Operates with a fixed frame  
number. Operates with a frame  
rate set using REC FORMAT.  
Note  
When INTERVAL REC or LOOP REC is  
set, this setting is set to “OFF”.  
Recording is performed using  
AVC-Intra50 codec.  
DVCPROHD/60i  
AVC-I 100/60i  
AVC-I 100/30PN  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
AVC-I 50/60i  
Used when SYSTEM MODE is set to  
1080-59.94i.  
When DVCPROHD/60i is selected, it is  
possible to refine the shooting mode  
selection by setting CAMERA MODE.  
S C U F R  
FRAME RATE  
(720-59.94P,  
720-60P)  
1FRAME  
:
24FRAME  
:
60FRAME  
(720-50P)  
1FRAME  
:
25FRAME  
:
This is for setting the shooting frame  
number during VFR operation.  
This setting is only displayed when 720P  
has been selected.  
When the mode has been changed  
using other settings and the frame rate  
value set here exceeds the maximum  
frame rate allowed by the set mode, the  
maximum frame rate is changed to the  
maximum frame rate of the set mode.  
AVC-I 50/30PN  
AVC-I 50/24PN  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
AVC-I 50/24PN  
Used when SYSTEM MODE is set to  
1080-23.98PsF or 1080-24PsF.  
DVCPROHD/50i  
AVC-I 100/50i  
AVC-I 100/25PN  
AVC-I 50/50i  
Used when SYSTEM MODE is set to  
1080-50i.  
When DVCPROHD/50i is selected, it is  
possible to refine the shooting mode  
selection by setting CAMERA MODE.  
AVC-I 50/25PN  
DVCPROHD/60P  
DVCPROHD/30PN  
DVCPROHD/24PN  
AVC-I 100/60P  
AVC-I 100/30PN  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
AVC-I 50/60P  
Used when SYSTEM MODE is set to  
720-59.94P.  
When shooting using VFR, the  
shooting frame number is set in  
accordance with the FRAME RATE  
setting.  
50FRAME  
S C U F R  
AVC-I 50/30PN  
AVC-I 50/24PN  
DVCPROHD/24PN  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
AVC-I 50/24PN  
Used when SYSTEM MODE is set to  
720-60P.  
When shooting using VFR, the  
shooting frame number is set in  
accordance with the FRAME RATE  
setting.  
DVCPROHD/50P  
DVCPROHD/25PN  
AVC-I 100/50P  
AVC-I 100/25PN  
AVC-I 50/50P  
Used when SYSTEM MODE is set to  
720-50P.  
When shooting using VFR, the  
shooting frame number is set in  
accordance with the FRAME RATE  
setting.  
AVC-I 50/25PN  
S C U F R  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
165  
   
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
OPTION MODE  
Remarks  
USR SW F.RATE (720-59.94P,  
When the FRATE function has been  
assigned to a user button, the starting  
frame rate under VFR operation is set.  
This setting is only displayed when 720P  
has been selected.  
When the mode has been changed  
using other settings and the frame rate  
value set here exceeds the maximum  
frame rate allowed by the set mode, the  
maximum frame rate is changed to the  
maximum frame rate of the set mode.  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
720-60P)  
1FRAME  
:
24FRAME  
:
60FRAME  
(720-50P)  
1FRAME  
:
25FRAME  
:
Remarks  
REC TALLY  
RED  
GREEN  
CHAR  
Select the method for displaying the  
recording status of unit when controlling  
an external VTR by setting 1394  
CONTROL items to “BOTH”.  
Select the 1394 CONTROL item on the  
<1394 SETTING> screen on the  
SYSTEM SETTING page.  
RED: The red tally lamp lights up.  
GREEN: The green tally lamp lights up.  
CHAR: The viewfinder displays “REC” in  
characters.  
50FRAME  
S C U F R  
SCAN REVERSE ON  
OFF  
This setting is for correcting an image  
which has been inverted by a film-use  
lens or anamorphic lens attached to the  
unit.  
– C U F –  
ACCESS LED  
OFF  
Specify whether or not to enable the P2  
card access LEDs.  
OFF: Disables both LEDs above the  
slots and on the side panel.  
SLOT SIDE:  
SLOT SIDE  
LCD SIDE  
BOTH  
S C U F R  
PC MODE SEL  
USB HOST  
USB DEV.  
This is for setting the operations mode of  
this unit when PC MODE is set to “ON”  
and an external device is connected to  
the USB connector.  
Enables the LED above the slots  
and disables the LED on the side  
panel.  
USB HOST:  
Allows data transfer from the unit  
to the USB-connected device.  
USB DEV.:  
LCD SIDE:  
Enables the LED on the side  
panel and disables the LED  
above the slots.  
Allows data transfer from the  
USB-connected device to the  
unit.  
BOTH: Enables both LEDs above the  
slots and on the side panel.  
Note  
– C U F –  
When the PC MODE menu option is set  
to “ON”, no change can be made to this  
option.  
P.OFF GPS  
DATA  
HOLD  
CLEAR  
Select whether or not to hold the UMID  
GPS position information while the  
power is turned off, thereby keeping this  
information as status data holding the  
previous value until the power is turned  
on again, which enables a new  
measurement to start.  
HOLD: Hold and save the data.  
CLEAR: Clear the data when the power is  
turned off, and save zero (No-  
Info) from the next power-on  
– – – F –  
PC MODE  
ON  
OFF  
Used to enable or disable the mode that  
allows the unit to be connected to a PC  
or an external hard disk drive via  
USB 2.0.  
ON:  
Sets the unit to the mode  
selected through the PC MODE  
SELECT menu option.  
OFF: Disables the PC MODE for  
normal operation.  
Note  
Once the power is turned off, the option  
is always set to “OFF” when the power is  
turned on next time.  
until a new measurement is  
completed.  
– C U F –  
SDI METADATA ON  
OFF  
Used to specify whether or not to output  
metadata (UMID) to HD SDI.  
– C U F –  
– – – F –  
SAVE SW (AUD ON  
Select whether or not to forcibly disable  
the audio output when the SAVE ON/  
OFF switch is set to [ON].  
OUT)  
OFF  
ON:  
Disable audio output.  
OFF: Enable audio output.  
– C U F –  
SAVE SW (LCD) ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to automatically  
turn off the LCD monitor when the SAVE  
ON/OFF switch is set to [ON].  
ON:  
Turn off LCD monitor.  
OFF: Do not turn off LCD monitor.  
– C U F –  
COMPRESSION NORMAL  
Select a compression mode for the 720P  
mode (Only for recording DVCPRO HD  
for 720-59.94P, 720-60P and 720-50P).  
NORMAL:  
MODE  
DARK  
The normal shooting mode is  
selected.  
DARK: Compressed video distortion  
that occurs in dark areas is  
lowered, which may increase  
distortion in other areas.  
– C U F –  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
166  
   
REC FUNCTION  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
INTERVAL REC OFF  
Sets INTERVAL REC function.  
OFF: INTERVAL REC is not  
performed.  
PRE REC MODE ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to enable PRE  
RECORDING.  
MODE  
ON  
ONE SHOT  
ON:  
PRE RECORDING enabled.  
ON:  
Uses internal memory to perform  
interval recording.  
ONE SHOT:  
Performs “one-shot” recording  
OFF: PRE RECORDING disabled.  
Note  
Specify the PRE RECORDING time by  
using the menu option PRE REC TIME.  
for the duration specified under  
REC TIME, and then stops.  
– C U F –  
PRE REC TIME 1SEC  
Set PRE RECORDING.  
1-8SEC:  
Note  
:
This item cannot be changed when “ON”  
is selected in LOOP REC MODE.  
8SEC  
Set the length of time that can be  
retrospectively recorded before  
the REC START/STOP button is  
pressed.  
– C U F –  
INTERVAL REC ON  
Selects whether INTERVAL REC MODE  
settings are retained or not when the  
power is turned off once.  
HOLD  
OFF  
– C U F –  
LOOP REC  
MODE  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to enable LOOP  
REC.  
This setting can be used with PRE  
RECORDING features.  
ON:  
Retain  
OFF: Do not retain. The INTERVAL  
REC MODE is “OFF” whenever  
the power is turned on again.  
ON:  
Enable LOOP REC.  
– C U F –  
OFF: Disable LOOP REC.  
Notes  
After the power is turned off, this item  
will default to “OFF” the next time the  
power is turned on.  
This item cannot be changed when  
“ON” or “ONE SHOT” is selected in  
INTERVAL REC MODE.  
REC TIME*  
00s01f  
:
59s29f  
Set recording time for INTERVAL REC  
(1 cut).  
Note  
However the settings can be made  
frame by frame, and the numbers of the  
cut-off unit frames for the shortest time  
period and the set time on the actual  
operation may vary with the recording  
method. For details, refer to [Interval  
Recording] (page 41).  
– – – F –  
ALL  
NORMAL  
Select operating modes that allow  
recording to start.  
ALL: Allow recording to start during  
stop, recording pause, and  
playback.  
– C U F –  
PAUSE TIME*  
00h00m00s01f  
:
00h04m59s29f  
:
Specify pause time for INTERVAL REC.  
Note  
However the settings can be made  
frame by frame, and the numbers of the  
cut-off unit frames for the shortest time  
period and the set time on the actual  
operation may vary with the recording  
method. For details, refer to [Interval  
Recording] (page 41).  
NORMAL:  
23h59m59s29f  
Allow recording to start during  
stop and recording pause.  
Note  
Even if this is set to “ALL”, the operation  
is “NORMAL”, when “ON” or “ONE  
SHOT” is selected in INTERVAL REC  
MODE.  
– C U F –  
TAKE TOTAL  
TIME  
NONE  
:
5day  
Specify the time needed for INTERVAL  
REC.  
Select from “NONE” (continue until  
operation is manually stopped) to  
5 days.  
– C U F –  
P.ON REC SLOT HOLD  
SEL  
Select the recording order of the slot  
when the power is turned on.  
HOLD: The recording order starts with  
the card previously selected  
when the power was turned off.  
SLOT1: The recording order starts with  
the card that is inserted in slot 1  
when the power is turned on.  
SLOT1  
– C U F –  
TOTAL REC  
TIME*  
NONE  
00m00s01f  
:
99m59s29f  
OVER100min  
Display total recorded time for  
INTERVAL REC. The setting cannot be  
changed using this option. Displays the  
recording time (recording time needed  
for the P2 card) calculated using REC  
TIME, PAUSE TIME, and TAKE TOTAL  
TIME.  
– C U F –  
Note  
Note  
Displayed REC TIME, PAUSE TIME and TOTAL REC TIME  
are translated into either drop-frame or non-drop-frame  
according to the mode of operation.  
A value based on actual processing is  
displayed.  
– – – – –  
TAKE TOTAL TIME is actual time. Therefore, TOTAL REC  
TIME may incorporate fractions, depending on the settings.  
AUDIO REC  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not sound will be  
recorded during INTERVAL REC.  
– C U F –  
Example of drop-frame  
START DELAY  
0SEC  
:
10SEC  
Set the delay after pressing REC  
START/STOP to start recording in  
INTERVAL REC.  
REC TIME  
02s00f  
PAUSE TIME  
02s00f  
TAKE TOTAL TIME  
TOTAL REC TIME  
40min  
– C U F –  
19m59s06f  
* This variable range is the numerical values for 59.94 Hz. For  
50 Hz, the frame rate is up to 24f. The frame rate is up to 23f in  
24PN (Native) mode.  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
167  
OUTPUT SEL  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
OUTPUT ITEM  
MENU ONLY  
TC  
STATUS  
Set the character contents  
superimposed onto the output signals for  
the HD SDI A · B connector and MON  
OUT connector.  
VFR/LCD CHAR VF-OFF  
This sets whether to superimpose  
characters on the video shown on the  
LCD monitor and in the viewfinder.  
Note, however, that the characters are  
output to one of the MON OUT, VF OUT  
and LCD OUT signals.  
LCD-OFF  
ON  
MENU ONLY:  
Displays only when the menu  
characters are superimposed.  
No display appears when other  
characters are superimposed.  
– C U F –  
VF MODE  
MEM  
CAM  
Select the image to display in the  
viewfinder.  
TC:  
Display the time code. (Displays  
the menu when menu characters  
are superimposed.)  
MEM: Display the playback image in  
the playback mode. Display the  
camera image at other times.  
CAM: Always display the camera  
image.  
Note that when “1080-23.98PsF”  
or “1080-24PsF” has been  
selected in the SYSTEM MODE  
menu option, the frame digits will  
not be updated correctly.  
– C U F –  
VF SEL  
MONO  
Select the video signal that is output to  
the viewfinder connector.  
MONO:Output the Y signal alone to the  
viewfinder connector.  
COLOR: Output the Y, PB, and PR signals  
to the viewfinder connector.  
COLOR  
STATUS: Display the same characters  
superimposed on the viewfinder  
signal. (Displays the menu when  
menu characters are  
superimposed.)  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
HD SDI A · B  
CHAR  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether to superimpose  
characters on the HD SDI A · B  
connector. (The character content output  
from the HD SDI A · B and MON OUT  
connectors is the same.)  
THUMBNAIL  
OUT  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to output clip  
thumbnails displayed on the LCD  
monitor to the MON OUT (VBS) signal  
and the REMOTE connector.  
ON:  
Enable output.  
ON:  
The characters are  
superimposed.  
OFF: Disable output.  
Note  
Even when the MON OUT OUTPUT SEL  
switch is in the [CAM] position,  
thumbnails are output when this option is  
set to “ON”.  
OFF: The characters are not  
superimposed.  
– C U F –  
MONITOR OUT VBS  
HD SDI  
Select the output signal on the MON  
OUT connector.  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
DOWNCON  
MODE  
LT-BOX  
SQUEEZE  
For setting the mode of the down  
converter output signals.  
MONITOR  
GAMMA  
ON  
OFF  
This sets whether to perform telecine  
conversion correction on the MON OUT,  
RC OUT, and LCD OUT signals when  
GAMMA MODE SEL is set to “FILM-  
REC”.  
– C U F –  
ON:  
Correction is performed.  
OFF: Correction is not performed.  
– C U F –  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
168  
HD SDI A · B OUT MARKER  
MONI OUT MARKER  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
MARKER SW  
ON  
OFF  
CENTER MARK OFF  
Switches the marker on and off.  
Switch the center mark.  
OFF: Do not display center mark.  
1
2
3
4
– C U F R  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
+ (large)  
Hollow (large)  
+ (small)  
CENTER MARK OFF  
Switch the center mark.  
OFF: Do not display center mark.  
1
2
3
4
Hollow (small)  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
+ (large)  
Hollow (large)  
+ (small)  
– C U F R  
SAFETY MARK OFF  
Select the frame type for the safety zone.  
OFF: Do not display frame.  
Hollow (small)  
1
2
– C U F R  
1:  
Box  
SAFETY MARK OFF  
Select the frame type for the safety zone.  
OFF: Do not display frame.  
1
2
1:  
Box  
2:  
Corner frame  
2:  
Corner frame  
– C U F R  
SAFETY AREA 80%  
For setting the size of the safety marker.  
It is possible to set the size by units of  
1% with a fixed ratio between of width  
and height.  
:
90%  
:
100%  
– C U F R  
SAFETY AREA 80%  
For setting the size of the safety marker.  
It is possible to set the size by units of  
1% with a fixed ratio between of width  
and height.  
:
– C U F R  
90%  
:
100%  
FRAME MARK  
ON  
OFF  
Set the frame marker to “ON” or “OFF”.  
– C U F R  
– C U F R  
FRAME MARK  
ON  
OFF  
FRAME SIG  
4:3  
13:9  
14:9  
VISTA  
CNSCO  
Set the frame marker to “ON” or “OFF”.  
Set the frame marker.  
The VISTA ratio is 16:8.65.  
The CNSCO ratio is 16:6.81.  
– C U F R  
FRAME SIG  
4:3  
13:9  
14:9  
VISTA  
CNSCO  
Set the frame marker.  
The VISTA ratio is 16:8.65.  
The CNSCO ratio is 16:6.81.  
– C U F R  
USER BOX  
ON  
OFF  
For setting whether to include the user  
box in the signal from the MON OUT  
connector.  
– C U F R  
USER BOX  
ON  
OFF  
– C U F R  
For setting whether to include the user  
box in the signal from the HD SDI A · B  
connector.  
USER BOX  
WIDTH  
1
:
For setting the width of the user box.  
13  
:
100  
– C U F R  
USER BOX  
WIDTH  
1
:
13  
:
100  
For setting the width of the user box.  
– C U F R  
USER BOX  
HEIGHT  
1
:
For setting the height of the user box.  
13  
:
100  
– C U F R  
USER BOX  
HEIGHT  
1
:
13  
:
100  
For setting the height of the user box.  
– C U F R  
USER BOX H  
POS  
–50  
:
For setting the horizontal position of the  
user box center.  
+00  
:
+50  
– C U F R  
USER BOX H  
POS  
–50  
:
+00  
:
For setting the horizontal position of the  
user box center.  
– C U F R  
USER BOX V  
POS  
–50  
:
+00  
:
For setting the vertical position of the  
user box center.  
+50  
– C U F R  
USER BOX V  
POS  
–50  
:
+00  
:
For setting the vertical position of the  
user box center.  
+50  
– C U F R  
+50  
– C U F R  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
169  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
LCD MONITOR  
H PHASE FINE –100  
Perform fine phase adjustment for  
horizontal hold when configuring a  
system.  
:
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
+000  
:
BRIGHTNESS  
–7  
:
+0  
:
Adjust the LCD monitor brightness.  
+100  
– – – – –  
+7  
1394 SETTING  
– C U F –  
COLOR LEVEL –7  
Adjust the LCD monitor chroma level.  
Adjust the LCD monitor contrast.  
:
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
+0  
:
+7  
Remarks  
1394 SPEED  
S100  
S200  
S400  
For setting the transfer rate of signals  
output from the DVCPRO connector.  
S100: 100 Mbps  
– C U F –  
CONTRAST  
–7  
:
S200: 200 Mbps  
S400: 400 Mbps  
+0  
:
+7  
– C U F –  
1394 IN CH  
0
:
For setting the input channel of signals  
input to the DVCPRO connector.  
0 - 63: To fix to the designated value  
AUTO: To follow the settings of the  
externally connected devices  
– C U F –  
BACKLIGHT  
NORMAL  
HIGH  
Adjust the backlight.  
NORMAL:  
Mode normally used  
HIGH: This is brighter than NORMAL.  
63  
AUTO  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
1394 OUT CH  
0
:
For setting the output channel of signals  
output from the DVCPRO connector.  
0 - 63: To fix to the designated value  
AUTO: To follow the settings of the  
externally connected devices  
SELF SHOOT  
NORMAL  
MIRROR  
Select whether or not to change the LCD  
monitor to mirror image.  
NORMAL:  
Do not change to mirror image.  
MIRROR:  
63  
AUTO  
– C U F –  
Change to mirror image.  
1394 CONTROL OFF  
BOTH  
For setting the control for recording start/  
stop operations of external devices that  
are connected to the DVCPRO  
connector.  
OFF: Do not control the externally  
connected devices.  
– C U F –  
GENLOCK  
BOTH: To control both the unit and the  
externally connected devices  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
GENLOCK  
INT  
EXT  
– C U F –  
Switch the camera synchronizing signal.  
INT:  
Synchronize with the internal  
reference signal regardless of  
the reference signal input to the  
GENLOCK IN connector.  
1394 CMD SEL REC_P  
STOP  
For setting the control of recording stop  
operations of the external devices that  
are connected to the DVCPRO  
connector.  
REC_P: Operation to pause recording  
STOP: Stopping operation  
EXT: Synchronize with the reference  
signal input to the GENLOCK IN  
connector.  
– C U F –  
– C U F R  
GL PHASE  
HD SDI  
COMPOSIT  
For selecting the output signals that lock  
phases to the signals that are input in the  
GENLOCK IN connector. Note, however,  
that in 1080-23.98PsF mode and 1080-  
24PsF mode, the phase is locked to HD  
SDI even if “COMPOSIT” has been  
selected.  
HD SDI:  
For locking the HD SDI output  
signals to the GENLOCK input.  
For the down converter output  
signals, the start position of the  
video delays by about 90 lines.  
COMPOSIT:  
For locking the down converter  
output signals to the GENLOCK  
input.  
For the HD SDI output signals,  
the start position of the video  
gains by about 90 lines.  
– C U F R  
H PHASE  
COARSE  
–100  
:
+000  
:
Perform coarse phase adjustment for  
horizontal hold when configuring a  
system.  
+100  
– – – – –  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
170  
PAINT  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.  
RB GAIN CONTROL  
RGB BLACK CONTROL  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
R GAIN AWB  
PRE*  
–200  
:
+000  
:
MASTER PED* –200  
For setting the Rch gain when the  
WHITE BAL switch is in the [PRST]  
position.  
For setting the level of the master  
pedestal.  
:
+000  
:
+200  
+200  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
B GAIN AWB  
PRE*  
–200  
:
+000  
:
+200  
R PEDESTAL*  
–100  
:
+000  
:
+100  
For setting the Bch gain when the  
WHITE BAL switch is in the [PRST]  
position.  
For setting the pedestal level of the Rch.  
For setting the pedestal level of the Gch.  
For setting the pedestal level of the Bch.  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
R GAIN AWB A* –200  
G PEDESTAL*  
–100  
:
+000  
:
+100  
For setting the Rch gain when the  
WHITE BAL switch is in the [A] position.  
:
+000  
:
+200  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
B GAIN AWB A* –200  
B PEDESTAL*  
–100  
:
+000  
:
For setting the Bch gain when the  
WHITE BAL switch is in the [A] position.  
:
+000  
:
+200  
+100  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
R GAIN AWB B* –200  
PEDESTAL  
OFFSET*  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the Rch gain when the  
WHITE BAL switch is in the [B] position.  
For setting the pedestal levels of the  
Rch, the Gch and the Bch when the auto  
black balance is adjusted.  
:
+000  
:
+200  
ON:  
To retain the values set in the  
respective items of R  
S C U F R  
PEDESTAL, G PEDESTAL, and  
B PEDESTAL  
OFF: The pedestal levels of the Rch,  
the Gch and the Bch are set to  
“0”.  
B GAIN AWB B* –200  
For setting the Bch gain when the  
WHITE BAL switch is in the [B] position.  
:
+000  
:
+200  
S C U F R  
S C U F –  
AWB A GAIN  
OFFSET*  
ON  
OFF  
R FLARE*  
–100  
:
+000  
:
+100  
For setting the values of the Rch gain  
and the Bch gain when the auto white  
balance is executed as the WHITE BAL  
switch is in the [A] position.  
For adjusting the flare level of the Rch.  
Adjustment values in this item are added  
to the flare adjustment value that is  
adjusted on <LENS FILE ADJ> screen.  
ON:  
To retain the values set in the  
items of R GAIN AWB A and B  
GAIN AWB A  
S C U F R  
G FLARE*  
–100  
:
+000  
:
+100  
For adjusting the flare level of the Gch.  
Adjustment values in this item are added  
to the flare adjustment value that is  
adjusted on <LENS FILE ADJ> screen.  
OFF: The values of the Rch gain and  
the Bch gain is set to “0”.  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
AWB B GAIN  
OFFSET*  
ON  
OFF  
For setting the values of the Rch gain  
and the Bch gain when the auto white  
balance is executed as the WHITE BAL  
switch is in the [B] position.  
B FLARE*  
–100  
:
+000  
:
+100  
For adjusting the flare level of the Bch.  
Adjustment values in this item are added  
to the flare adjustment value that is  
adjusted on <LENS FILE ADJ> screen.  
ON:  
To retain the values set in the  
items of R GAIN AWB B and B  
GAIN AWB B  
S C U F R  
* If the remote control unit is connected, settings made from the  
menu are disabled. (The set value is displayed.)  
OFF: The values of the Rch gain and  
the Bch gain is set to “0”.  
S C U F R  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
171  
MATRIX  
COLOR CORRECTION  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
TABLE  
MATRIX  
A
B
R
(SAT)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
For selecting the color correction table  
for the linear matrix.  
For performing the color saturation  
correction of red.  
S C U F R  
+63  
MATRIX R-G  
–63  
:
+14  
:
For performing the linear matrix  
adjustment. (red/green)  
S C U F R  
R-Mg  
(SAT)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
For performing the color saturation  
correction between red and magenta.  
+63  
S C U F R  
+63  
MATRIX R-B  
–63  
:
+02  
:
For performing the linear matrix  
adjustment. (red/blue)  
S C U F R  
Mg  
(SAT)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
For performing the color saturation  
correction of magenta.  
+63  
S C U F R  
+63  
MATRIX G-R  
–63  
:
–01  
:
For performing the linear matrix  
adjustment. (green/red)  
S C U F R  
Mg-B  
(SAT)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
For performing the color saturation  
correction between magenta and blue.  
+63  
S C U F R  
+63  
MATRIX G-B  
–63  
:
+04  
:
For performing the linear matrix  
adjustment. (green/blue)  
S C U F R  
B
(SAT)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
For performing the color saturation  
correction of blue.  
+63  
S C U F R  
+63  
MATRIX B-R  
–63  
:
+02  
:
For performing the linear matrix  
adjustment. (blue/red)  
S C U F R  
B-Cy  
(SAT)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
For performing the color saturation  
correction between blue and cyan.  
+63  
S C U F R  
+63  
MATRIX B-G  
–63  
:
–06  
:
For performing the linear matrix  
adjustment. (blue/green)  
S C U F R  
Cy  
(SAT)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
For performing the color saturation  
correction of cyan.  
+63  
S C U F R  
+63  
TABLE  
L MATRIX  
OFF  
A
B
For selecting the color correction table  
when the GAIN switch is in the [L]  
position.  
S C U F R  
Cy-G  
(SAT)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
For performing the color saturation  
correction between cyan and green.  
S C U F R  
TABLE  
M MATRIX  
OFF  
A
B
For selecting the color correction table  
when the GAIN switch is in the [M]  
position.  
+63  
S C U F R  
S C U F –  
G
(SAT)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
For performing the color saturation  
correction of green.  
H MATRIX  
OFF  
A
B
For selecting the color correction table  
when the GAIN switch is in the [H]  
position.  
TABLE  
+63  
S C U F –  
S C U F R  
G-Yl  
(SAT)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
For performing the color saturation  
correction between green and yellow.  
Notes  
The items indicated by are the setting items for PAINT  
MENU SW() R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT>  
screen. The items without are the setting items for  
PAINT MENU LEVEL R/W.  
Please refer to [SD CARD R/W SELECT] (page 195) for  
more information.  
+63  
S C U F R  
Yl  
(SAT)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
For performing the color saturation  
correction of yellow.  
+63  
In the preset mode, the linear matrix data of MATRIX  
TABLE B are all set to “+00”.  
S C U F R  
Yl-R  
(SAT)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
For performing the color saturation  
correction between yellow and red.  
+63  
S C U F R  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
172  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
LOW SETTING  
Remarks  
R
–63  
:
+00  
:
For performing the hue correction for  
red.  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
(PHASE)  
Remarks  
MASTER GAIN –3dB  
Select the master gain from –3, 0, 3, 6,  
9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, or 30 dB.  
+63  
:
0dB  
:
30dB  
S C U F R  
R-Mg  
(PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
For performing the hue correction  
between red and magenta.  
S C U F R  
H.DTL LEVEL  
00  
:
05  
:
For performing the horizontal detail  
correction level setting.  
+63  
S C U F R  
Mg  
(PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
For performing the hue correction for  
magenta.  
63  
S C U F R  
V.DTL LEVEL  
00  
:
07  
:
For performing the vertical detail  
correction level setting.  
+63  
S C U F R  
Mg-B  
(PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
For performing the hue correction  
between magenta and blue.  
31  
S C U F R  
DTL CORING  
00  
:
04  
:
For performing the noise elimination  
level setting for detail.  
+63  
S C U F R  
B
–63  
:
+00  
:
60  
For performing the hue correction for  
blue.  
(PHASE)  
S C U F R  
H.DTL FREQ.  
00  
:
18  
:
For performing the horizontal detail  
frequency selection.  
+63  
S C U F R  
31  
B-Cy  
(PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
For performing the hue correction  
between blue and cyan.  
S C U F R  
LEVEL DEPEND. 0  
For setting the LEVEL DEPEND.  
When the Y-detail is emphasized, details  
of dark sections are compressed.  
1
:
5
+63  
S C U F R  
If the numerical value is larger, details of  
bright sections are also compressed.  
Cy  
(PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
For performing the hue correction for  
cyan.  
S C U F R  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
0.30  
:
0.45  
:
0.75  
For setting the master gamma. (0.01  
step)  
+63  
S C U F R  
Cy-G  
(PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
For performing the hue correction  
between cyan and green.  
S C U F R  
BLACK GAMMA –8  
:
For setting the gamma curve for the dark  
portion.  
–8 to –1: The dark portion is compressed.  
OFF: Standard state  
+63  
OFF  
:
+8  
S C U F R  
G
–63  
:
+00  
:
For performing the hue correction for  
green.  
(PHASE)  
+1 to +8: The dark portion is extended.  
S C U F R  
B.GAMMA  
RANGE  
1
2
3
+63  
For setting the upper limit of  
compression/expansion.  
S C U F R  
1:  
2:  
3:  
Approximately 20%  
Approximately 30%  
Approximately 40%  
G-Yl  
(PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
For performing the hue correction  
between green and yellow.  
S C U F R  
+63  
MATRIX  
OFF  
A
B
For selecting the color correction table  
for the linear matrix.  
S C U F R  
TABLE  
Yl  
–63  
:
+00  
:
For performing the hue correction for  
yellow.  
(PHASE)  
S C U F R  
COLOR  
ON  
OFF  
For switching on/off of the 12-axis  
CORRECT  
+63  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
Yl-R  
(PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
For performing the hue correction  
between yellow and red.  
Notes  
The items indicated by are the setting items for PAINT  
MENU SW() R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT>  
screen. The items without are the setting items for  
PAINT MENU LEVEL R/W.  
Please refer to [SD CARD R/W SELECT] (page 195) for  
more information.  
+63  
S C U F R  
COLOR  
ON  
OFF  
For switching on/off of the 12-axis  
independent color correction of the  
position selected with the GAIN switch  
([L], [M], [H]).  
CORRECT  
S C U F R  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
173  
When shooting with the MASTER GAIN set to “–3dB”,  
coloring phenomena may occur in portions of the video  
with high brightness.  
The coloring phenomena can be reduced by switching the  
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch to [CAM/AUTO KNEE  
OFF], setting the MANUAL KNEE menu option of the  
<KNEE/LEVEL> screen to “ON”, and then changing the  
following menu options.  
MID SETTING  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
MASTER GAIN –3dB  
Select the master gain from –3, 0, 3, 6,  
9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, or 30 dB.  
:
3dB  
:
30dB  
– When “HD”, “SD”, “FILMLIKE1”, “FILMLIKE2” or  
“FILMLIKE3” has been selected in the GAMMA MODE  
SEL menu option of the <GAMMA> screen, reduce the  
value in the KNEE MASTER SLOPE menu option of the  
<KNEE/LEVEL> screen.  
S C U F –  
H.DTL LEVEL  
00  
:
05  
:
For performing the horizontal detail  
correction level setting.  
63  
– When “FILM-REC” has been selected in the GAMMA  
MODE SEL menu option of the <GAMMA> screen,  
reduce the value in the F-REC DYNAMIC LVL menu  
option of the <GAMMA> screen.  
– When “VIDEO-REC” has been selected in the GAMMA  
MODE SEL menu option of the <GAMMA> screen,  
reduce the value in the V-REC KNEE SLOPE menu  
option of the <GAMMA> screen.  
S C U F –  
V.DTL LEVEL  
00  
:
07  
:
For performing the vertical detail  
correction level setting.  
31  
S C U F –  
DTL CORING  
00  
:
08  
:
For performing the noise elimination  
level setting for detail.  
60  
S C U F –  
H.DTL FREQ.  
00  
:
18  
:
For performing the horizontal detail  
frequency selection.  
31  
S C U F –  
LEVEL DEPEND. 0  
For setting the LEVEL DEPEND.  
When the Y-detail is emphasized, details  
of dark sections are compressed.  
If the numerical value is larger, details of  
bright sections are also compressed.  
1
:
5
S C U F –  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
0.30  
:
0.45  
:
For setting the master gamma. (0.01  
step)  
0.75  
S C U F –  
BLACK GAMMA –8  
:
For setting the gamma curve for the dark  
portion.  
–8 to –1:  
The dark portion is compressed.  
OFF: Standard state  
+1 to +8:  
OFF  
:
+8  
The dark portion is extended.  
S C U F –  
B.GAMMA  
RANGE  
1
2
3
For setting the upper limit of  
compression/expansion.  
1:  
2:  
3:  
Approximately 20%  
Approximately 30%  
Approximately 40%  
S C U F R  
TABLE  
MATRIX  
OFF  
A
B
For selecting the color correction table  
for the linear matrix.  
S C U F –  
COLOR  
ON  
OFF  
For switching on/off of the 12-axis  
independent color correction.  
CORRECT  
S C U F –  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
174  
HIGH SETTING  
ADDITIONAL DTL  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
MASTER GAIN –3dB  
KNEE APE LVL OFF  
Select the master gain from –3, 0, 3, 6,  
9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, or 30 dB.  
For changing the detail level of the high  
brightness portion.  
:
1
:
5
6dB  
:
30dB  
S C U F R  
S C U F –  
DTL GAIN(+)  
–31  
:
+00  
:
Adjust the detail level toward +  
(upwards).  
H.DTL LEVEL  
00  
:
05  
:
For performing the horizontal detail  
correction level setting.  
+31  
63  
S C U F R  
S C U F –  
DTL GAIN(–)  
–31  
:
+00  
:
Adjust the detail level toward the –  
(downwards).  
V.DTL LEVEL  
00  
:
07  
:
For performing the vertical detail  
correction level setting.  
+31  
31  
S C U F R  
S C U F –  
DTL CLIP  
00  
:
54  
:
For setting the level for clipping the detail  
signals.  
DTL CORING  
00  
:
12  
:
For performing the noise elimination  
level setting for detail.  
63  
60  
S C U F R  
S C U F –  
DTL SOURCE  
(R+G)/2  
(G+B)/2  
2G+R+B /4  
(3G+R)/4  
R
For setting the proportion of the RGB  
signal components that provide the  
detail.  
H.DTL FREQ.  
00  
:
18  
:
For performing the horizontal detail  
frequency selection.  
31  
G
S C U F –  
S C U F R  
LEVEL DEPEND. 0  
V DTL FREQ  
360TV  
450TV  
540TV  
630TV  
720TV  
For setting the LEVEL DEPEND.  
When the Y-detail is emphasized, details  
of dark sections are compressed.  
If the numerical value is larger, details of  
bright sections are also compressed.  
For selecting the vertical detail  
frequency.  
The frequency notation is the value  
converted in 720P.  
:
3
:
5
S C U F R  
S C U F –  
H.DTL LINE MIX 0H  
For setting the number of scanning lines  
to be added to the video signals in order  
to generate the horizontal detail signals.  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
0.30  
:
For setting the master gamma. (0.01  
step)  
1H  
2H  
0.45  
:
0.75  
S C U F R  
MASTER DTL  
–31  
:
For revising the master detail level.  
S C U F –  
+00  
:
+31  
BLACK GAMMA –8  
:
For setting the gamma curve for the dark  
portion.  
–8 to –1:  
The dark portion is compressed.  
OFF: Standard state  
+1 to +8:  
OFF  
:
+8  
S C U F R  
The dark portion is extended.  
S C U F –  
B.GAMMA  
RANGE  
1
2
3
For setting the upper limit of  
compression/expansion.  
1:  
2:  
3:  
Approximately 20%  
Approximately 30%  
Approximately 40%  
S C U F R  
TABLE  
MATRIX  
OFF  
A
B
For selecting the color correction table  
for the linear matrix.  
S C U F –  
COLOR  
ON  
OFF  
For switching on/off of the 12-axis  
CORRECT  
S C U F –  
Note  
The items indicated by are the setting items for PAINT  
MENU SW() R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT>  
screen. The items without are the setting items for PAINT  
MENU LEVEL R/W.  
Please refer to [SD CARD R/W SELECT] (page 195) for  
more information.  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
175  
SKIN TONE DTL  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
DTL  
SKIN TONE  
OFF  
A
B
Y MAX  
000  
:
190  
:
For selecting the skin color table for  
enabling the skin tone detail.  
The skin color table is provided in the  
DETECT TABLE item.  
For setting the maximum value of  
brightness for enabling the skin tone.  
AB  
255  
By enabling the skin tone detail, it is  
possible to shoot human skin more  
accurately.  
S C U F R  
Y MIN  
000  
:
010  
:
For setting the minimum value of  
brightness for enabling the skin tone.  
S C U F R  
ZEBRA VF  
ON  
For the setting to display the zebra  
pattern in the skin tone area displayed in  
the viewfinder screen.  
255  
OFF  
S C U F R  
I CENTER  
000  
:
035  
:
The zebra pattern is displayed when this  
item is turned “ON” and the <SKIN  
TONE DTL> screen is opened.  
The zebra pattern indicates the area  
which is selected in the SKIN TONE DTL  
item.  
For setting the center position on the I-  
axis (for setting an area that enables skin  
tone).  
255  
S C U F R  
I WIDTH  
000  
:
055  
:
For setting the area width for enabling  
the skin tone on the I-axis of which the  
center is the I CENTER.  
S C U F R  
ZEBRA HD  
ON  
For setting to include the skin tone zebra  
in the HD SDI A · B signal.  
SDI A · B  
OFF  
255  
The zebra pattern is displayed when this  
item is turned “ON” and the <SKIN  
TONE DTL> screen is opened.  
The zebra pattern indicates the area  
which is selected in the SKIN TONE DTL  
item.  
S C U F R  
Q WIDTH  
00  
:
10  
:
For setting the area width for enabling  
the skin tone on the Q-axis of which the  
center is the I CENTER.  
90  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
ZEBRA MONI ON  
For setting to include the skin tone zebra  
in the MON OUT signal.  
Q PHASE  
–180  
:
+000  
:
+179  
For setting phases of the area for  
enabling skin tone as setting the  
standard to the Q-axis.  
OFF  
The zebra pattern is displayed when this  
item is turned “ON” and the <SKIN  
TONE DTL> screen is opened.  
The zebra pattern indicates the area  
which is selected in the SKIN TONE DTL  
item.  
S C U F R  
Y
R-Y  
S C U F R  
Q-WIDTH  
DETECT TABLE  
A
B
For selecting the skin color table for  
subjects to which the skin tone table  
applies.  
I-WIDTH  
Y-MAX  
+ direction  
I-CENTER  
S C U F R  
– direction  
SKIN TONE GET  
For fetching the color information of “A”  
or “B”, which is selected in the DETECT  
TABLE item, near the center marker.  
When this function is executed, data  
from I CENTER to Q PHASE are fetched  
automatically.  
Q-PHASE  
B-Y  
Y-MIN  
= SKIN TONE AREA  
The fetched data will be the table data of  
“A” or “B”, which is selected in the  
DETECT TABLE item.  
It is impossible to obtain color  
information of both “A” and “B” at the  
same time.  
Note  
The items indicated by are the setting items for PAINT  
MENU SW() R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT>  
screen. The items without are the setting items for PAINT  
MENU LEVEL R/W.  
– – – – –  
Please refer to [SD CARD R/W SELECT] (page 195) for  
more information.  
SKIN DTL  
EFFECT  
0
:
16  
:
For setting the effect level of the skin  
tone detail.  
31  
S C U F R  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
176  
KNEE/LEVEL  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Notes  
Remarks  
The items indicated by are the setting items for PAINT  
MENU SW() R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT>  
screen. The items without are the setting items for  
PAINT MENU LEVEL R/W.  
Please refer to [SD CARD R/W SELECT] (page 195) for  
more information.  
When “FILM-REC” or “VIDEO-REC” is selected in the  
GAMMA MODE SEL menu option on the <GAMMA>  
screen, the KNEE MASTER SLOPE and KNEE MASTER  
POINT menu option settings are disabled.  
MASTER PED  
–200  
:
+000  
:
+200  
Set the master pedestal.  
S C U F R  
MANUAL  
ON  
OFF  
Set the mode when the AUTO KNEE  
switch is [OFF]. The KNEE MASTER  
POINT/KNEE MASTER SLOPE set  
value is enabled when this setting is  
“ON”.  
KNEE  
S C U F R  
KNEE MASTER 70.0%  
For setting the knee point position in  
increments of 0.5% steps.  
POINT  
:
93.0%  
:
107.0%  
S C U F R  
KNEE MASTER 00  
For setting the inclination of the knee.  
SLOPE  
:
85  
:
99  
S C U F R  
WHITE CLIP  
ON  
OFF  
Set the WHITE CLIP feature to “ON” or  
“OFF”. The WHITE CLIP LVL set value is  
enabled when this setting is “ON”.  
S C U F R  
WHITE CLIP LVL 90%  
Set WHITE CLIP level.  
:
109%  
S C U F R  
A.KNEE POINT 80%  
Set the AUTO KNEE point position in 1%  
steps. This setting is enabled when the  
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector switch is  
set to [CAM/AUTO KNEE ON].  
:
93%  
:
107%  
S C U F R  
A.KNEE LVL  
100  
:
Set the AUTO KNEE level.  
107  
:
109  
S C U F R  
A.KNEE  
RESPONSE  
1
:
4
:
Set the AUTO KNEE response speed.  
The smaller the setting value, the faster  
the response speed.  
8
S C U F R  
CHROMA LEVEL OFF  
For setting the chroma level of the PR  
signals and the PB signals.  
If this is set to “OFF”, the color elements  
of video signals are eliminated.  
–99%  
:
+00%  
:
+40%  
S C U F R  
DRS EFFECT  
DEPTH  
1
2
3
Set the compression level of the high-  
brightness component of DRS. If the  
numerical value is larger, the  
compression level of the high-brightness  
component increases.  
S C U F R  
HI-COLOR SW ON  
For switching the mode on/off which  
enables the dynamic color range to be  
expanded.  
OFF  
S C U F R  
HI-COLOR  
LEVEL  
1
:
32  
For selecting the level of the dynamic  
color range when in the mode which  
allows expansion of the dynamic color  
range.  
S C U F R  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
177  
AUTO KNEE is not performed when AJ-RC10G is  
connected, but the LED of the AJ-RC10G button is lit by  
pressing the A.KNEE ON button.  
GAMMA  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
0.30  
:
0.45  
:
Set the master gamma in 0.01 steps.  
F-REC  
DYNAMIC LVL  
200%  
300%  
400%  
500%  
600%  
For setting the dynamic range when  
GAMMA MODE SEL has been set to  
“FILM-REC”.  
When GAMMA MODE SEL has not been  
set to “FILM-REC”, this setting cannot be  
changed.  
0.75  
S C U F R  
R GAMMA  
–15  
:
Set the Rch gamma.  
+00  
:
+15  
S C U F R  
F-REC BLACK  
STR LVL  
00%  
:
30%  
For setting the amount of black stretch  
when GAMMA MODE SEL has been set  
to “FILM-REC”.  
When GAMMA MODE SEL has not been  
set to “FILM-REC”, this setting cannot be  
changed.  
S C U F R  
B GAMMA  
–15  
:
+00  
:
Set the Bch gamma.  
+15  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
V-REC KNEE  
SLOPE  
150%  
200%  
250%  
300%  
350%  
400%  
450%  
500%  
550%  
600%  
For setting the amount of knee-slope  
when GAMMA MODE SEL has been set  
to “VIDEO-REC”.  
When GAMMA MODE SEL has not been  
set to “VIDEO-REC”, this setting cannot  
be changed.  
GAMMA MODE HD  
SEL  
For selecting the gamma mode.  
SD  
HD:  
Video gamma characteristics for  
HD (High Definition)  
FILMLIKE1  
FILMLIKE2  
FILMLIKE3  
FILM-REC  
VIDEO-REC  
SD:  
The gain in the dark section is  
higher than the HD gamma.  
FILMLIKE1:  
In this setting gradations in  
highlit areas can be expressed  
better than the HD gamma.  
S C U F R  
V-REC KNEE  
POINT  
30%  
:
107%  
FILMLIKE2:  
For setting knee point when GAMMA  
MODE SEL has been set to “VIDEO-  
REC”.  
When GAMMA MODE SEL has not been  
set to “VIDEO-REC”, this setting cannot  
be changed.  
In this setting gradations in  
highlit areas can be expressed  
better than when FILMLIKE1 is  
selected.  
FILMLIKE3:  
In this setting gradations in  
highlit areas can be expressed  
better than when FILMLIKE2 is  
selected.  
S C U F R  
CAMERA SETTING  
FILM-REC:  
The cinema gamma  
characteristics for film  
applications.  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
VIDEO-REC:  
DETAIL  
ON  
OFF  
For switching on/off of the detail signals.  
The cinema gamma  
characteristics for video  
applications.  
S C U F R  
GAMMA  
ON  
OFF  
For switching on/off of the gamma  
correction.  
S C U F R  
S C U F R  
TEST SAW  
ON  
OFF  
Switch the test signal on or off.  
FILMLIKE1  
S C U F R  
FLARE  
ON  
OFF  
Set the flare correction to on or off.  
FILM-REC  
S C U F R  
FILMLIKE3  
FILMLIKE2  
SD  
H-F COMPE.  
ON  
OFF  
For switching on/off of the aperture  
correction.  
VIDEO-REC  
S C U F R  
HD  
Note  
All items in CAMERA SETTING are setting targets of the  
item PAINT MENU SW() R/W in the <SD CARD R/W  
SELECT> screen.  
Luminance  
When the GAMMA MODE SEL item is used for  
FILMLIKE3, the following settings are recommended.  
MANUAL KNEE:  
“ON”  
KNEE MASTER POINT: “85.0%”  
KNEE MASTER SLOPE: “50”  
AUTO KNEE is not performed when the GAMMA MODE  
SEL menu option is set to “FILM-REC” or “VIDEO-REC”.  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
178  
 
VF  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.  
VF DISPLAY  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
STATUS MODE NORMAL  
FILM REC  
ZEBRA2  
DETECT  
0%  
:
85%  
:
109%  
For selecting the status display mode of  
the viewfinder.  
NORMAL:  
Normal status display  
FILM REC:  
Status display for FILM REC  
Note  
Setting STATUS MODE to “FILM REC”  
disables the DISP CONDITION and  
DISP MODE settings.  
Set the ZEBRA2 detection level (IRE  
value).  
– C U F R  
ZEBRA2  
OFF  
SPOT  
ON  
Set the ZEBRA2 to “ON”, “OFF”, or  
“SPOT”.  
– C U F R  
Set the camera incoming light volume at  
which to display “LOW LIGHT”.  
– C U F R  
10%  
15%  
20%  
25%  
30%  
35%  
DISP  
CONDITION  
NORMAL  
HOLD  
NORMAL:  
HOLD: Display status only when the  
MODE CHECK switch is  
pressed.  
– C U F R  
– C U F R  
RC MENU DISP. ON  
OFF  
For the setting to display the menu in the  
viewfinder screen when the remote  
control unit is connected to the unit.  
DISP MODE  
1
2
3
Set the DISP MODE.  
Switch the camera’s Warning/Message  
indication. Please refer to [Display  
Modes and Setting Changes/adjustment  
Result Messages] (page 84) for more  
information.  
– C U F R  
MARKER/CHAR 50%  
LVL  
Adjust the brightness of markers and  
characters displayed on the viewfinder.  
60%  
70%  
80%  
90%  
100%  
– C U F R  
VF OUT  
Y
For selecting the video signals to display  
in the viewfinder screen.  
NAM  
R
G
– C U F R  
Y:  
Brightness signal  
SYNCHRO  
SCAN DISP.  
sec  
deg  
Set the units for the SYNCHRO SCAN  
mode display.  
NAM: Output signal with the highest  
B
level among R, G, and B signals.  
sec:  
Display using time.  
R:  
G:  
B:  
Rch signal  
Gch signal  
Bch signal  
deg: Display using opening angle of  
the shutter.  
– C U F R  
– C U F R  
VF DTL  
00  
:
05  
:
For setting the detail level of the  
viewfinder screen.  
The details of the signals for the  
viewfinder are further enhanced. If “0” is  
selected, then the detail is the same as  
that for the main line.  
ZEBRA Pattern Display  
ZEBRA 2  
10  
Video Level  
ON  
OFF  
SPOT  
109%  
– C U F R  
VF DTL CORING 00  
For setting the noise elimination level for  
detail in the viewfinder signal.  
:
15  
– C U F R  
VF H.DTL FREQ.  
1
:
4
:
For selecting the horizontal detail  
frequency in the viewfinder signal.  
ZEBRA 2  
DETECT  
6
S C U F R  
ZEBRA 1  
DETECT  
ZEBRA1  
DETECT  
0%  
:
70%  
:
Set the ZEBRA1 detection level (IRE  
value).  
109%  
– C U F R  
0%  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
179  
 
VF MARKER  
VF USER BOX  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
TABLE  
A
B
USER BOX  
ON  
OFF  
Select the VF MARKER setting table.  
First, select table “A” or “B”, then set the  
items below for each table.  
For setting whether the user box is  
displayed in the viewfinder or not.  
– C U F R  
– C U F R  
USER BOX  
WIDTH  
1
:
13  
:
100  
For setting the width of the user box.  
For setting the height of the user box.  
CENTER MARK OFF  
Switch the center mark.  
OFF: Do not display center mark.  
1
2
3
4
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
+ (large)  
Hollow (large)  
+ (small)  
– C U F R  
USER BOX  
HEIGHT  
1
:
13  
:
100  
Hollow (small)  
– C U F R  
SAFETY MARK OFF  
Select the frame type for the safety zone.  
OFF: Do not display frame.  
1
2
– C U F R  
1:  
Box  
USER BOX H  
POS  
–50  
:
+00  
:
For setting the horizontal position of the  
user box center.  
2:  
Corner frame  
+50  
– C U F R  
USER BOX V  
POS  
–50  
:
+00  
:
For setting the vertical position of the  
user box center.  
– C U F R  
SAFETY AREA 80%  
For setting the size of the safety marker.  
It is possible to set the size by units of  
1% with a fixed ratio between of width  
and height.  
+50  
:
– C U F R  
90%  
:
100%  
The user box can be displayed in any position as a  
boxtype cursor.  
– C U F R  
FRAME MARK  
ON  
OFF  
Set the frame marker to “ON” or “OFF”.  
Note  
– C U F R  
The user box is not displayed on the LCD monitor if “LT-  
BOX” is selected in DOWNCON MODE.  
FRAME SIG  
4:3  
13:9  
14:9  
VISTA  
CNSCO  
Set the frame marker.  
The VISTA ratio is 16:8.65. (1.85:1)  
The CNSCO ratio is 16:6.81 (2.35:1).  
– C U F R  
FRAME LVL  
0
:
15  
Set the level outside the frame marker.  
Note that the level does not change on  
the LCD monitor.  
0:  
Equivalent to signal off.  
(Blanking status)  
15:  
Same brightness as center area.  
– C U F R  
Note  
The safety zone marker, the safety zone area, and the frame  
marker are not displayed on the LCD monitor if “LT-BOX” is  
selected in DOWNCON MODE.  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
180  
VF INDICATOR1  
VF INDICATOR2  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
EXTENDER  
ON  
OFF  
CAC  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting “ON” or “OFF” for the  
extender display.  
For selecting “ON” or “OFF” for the CAC  
function display.  
– C U F R  
– C U F R  
SHUTTER  
ON  
OFF  
GAMMA MODE ON  
OFF  
Set the shutter speed indication to “ON”  
or “OFF”.  
Select whether the gamma mode is to be  
displayed or not.  
– C U F R  
– C U F R  
FILTER  
ON  
OFF  
DRS  
ON  
OFF  
Set the filter No. indication to “ON” or  
“OFF”.  
For selecting “ON” or “OFF” for the  
dynamic range stretcher function display.  
– C U F R  
– C U F R  
WHITE  
ON  
OFF  
VF GAMMA  
ON  
OFF  
Set the AWB PRST/A/B indication to  
“ON” or “OFF”.  
For selecting “ON” or “OFF” for the  
viewfinder gamma display.  
– C U F R  
– C U F R  
GAIN  
ON  
OFF  
MONITOR  
GAMMA  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting “ON” or “OFF” for the  
indication of the currently selected gain.  
For selecting “ON” or “OFF” for the  
monitor gamma display.  
– C U F R  
– C U F R  
IRIS  
OFF  
IRIS  
OFF: Disable the iris value indication.  
IRIS: Enable the iris value indication.  
The display of the iris value and the  
display of the iris override are  
interlinked. When the iris override is  
changed, it is forcibly displayed for  
3 seconds.  
– C U F R  
CAMERA ID  
OFF  
BAR  
For setting to record the camera ID.  
OFF: The camera ID is not recorded.  
BAR: The camera ID is recorded when  
the color bar signals are  
recorded.  
– C U F R  
ID POSITION  
UPPER R  
UPPER L  
LOWER R  
LOWER L  
For setting the position to display the  
camera ID.  
UPPER R:  
Upper right.  
UPPER L:  
Upper left.  
LOWER R:  
Lower right.  
LOWER L:  
Lower left.  
– C U F R  
DATE/TIME  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting an option to display year/  
month/day and hour/minute/second  
simultaneously when the camera ID is  
displayed.  
– C U F R  
ZOOM LVL  
ON  
OFF  
Set the zoom position indication to “ON”  
or “OFF”.  
– C U F R  
COLOR TEMP  
ON  
OFF  
Set the color temperature indication to  
“ON” or “OFF”.  
– C U F R  
SYSTEM MODE ON  
OFF  
For selecting “ON” or “OFF” for the  
system mode and REC mode display.  
– C U F R  
REC FORMAT  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting “ON” or “OFF” for the  
recording format display.  
– C U F R  
FRAME RATE  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting “ON” or “OFF” for the frame  
rate display.  
– C U F R  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
181  
VF INDICATOR3  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
P2CARD  
REMAIN  
OFF  
ONE-CARD  
TOTAL  
SAVE LED  
SAVE  
P2CARD  
Select the indication mode for the P2  
card’s remaining capacity.  
OFF: Disable the remaining capacity  
indication.  
Set the SAVE lamp function.  
SAVE: The lamp lights up when the  
SAVE ON/OFF switch is set to  
[ON] and the output system  
assigned in [OPTION MODE]  
(page 166) is in the save mode.  
P2CARD:  
ONE-CARD:  
Display the remaining capacity  
of the P2 card currently used for  
recording.  
The lamp blinks in synch with the  
warning message when the P2  
card’s remaining recording  
capacity is getting low.  
TOTAL: Display the total remaining  
capacity of all P2 cards in slots.  
– C U F R  
– C U F R  
BATTERY  
ON  
OFF  
Set the battery voltage indication to “ON”  
or “OFF”.  
REC STATUS  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to enable “REC”  
indication in the viewfinder and on the  
LCD monitor during recording.  
– C U F R  
AUDIO LVL  
ON  
OFF  
Set the audio lever meter indication to  
“ON” or “OFF”.  
ON:  
REC indication enabled.  
OFF: REC indication not enabled.  
Note  
– C U F R  
TC ON COLOR ON  
BAR  
Select whether the time code is to be  
displayed or not on the color bar.  
This option is useful when unit is used  
independently. When the 1394  
CONTROL menu option on the <1394  
SETTING> screen is set to “BOTH”, then  
the setting of the REC TALLY menu  
option on the <OPTION MODE> screen  
is used.  
OFF  
– C U F R  
TC  
OFF  
TCG  
TCR  
TCG/TCR  
Select the time code to display.  
OFF: Disable the time code display.  
TCG: Display the time code generator  
value in recording mode.  
TCR: Display the time code reader  
value in playback mode.  
– C U F R  
PROXY REC  
ON  
OFF  
When a video encoder card (AJ-  
YAX800G, optional) is attached, proxy  
recording information is displayed when  
recording starts.  
TCG/TCR:  
Display the time code generator  
value in recording mode, and the  
time code reader value in  
ON:  
Display indicating whether proxy  
recording is to be performed on  
the P2 card only, or on both the  
P2 card and the SD memory  
card.  
playback mode.  
– C U F R  
SYSTEM INFO  
OFF  
ALWAYS  
NORMAL  
Select the method of displaying system  
information and warnings.  
OFF: Display no warnings other than  
“TURN POWER OFF” and  
“SYSTEM ERROR”.  
OFF: Proxy recording information is  
not displayed.  
– C U F R  
ALWAYS:  
Always display warnings.  
NORMAL:  
Display warnings for 3 seconds  
only when problems occur.  
– C U F R  
COMPRESSION ON  
OFF  
Specify whether to enable or disable the  
compression indication when the unit is  
in compression mode. (Only for  
DVCPRO HD in 720P)  
ON:  
When the COMPRESSION  
MODE menu option on the  
<OPTION MODE> screen is set  
to “DARK”, “COMP” is indicated.  
OFF: No indication is given.  
– C U F R  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
182  
MODE CHECK IND  
!LED  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
STATUS  
ON  
OFF  
GAIN (0dB)  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to display the status  
screen when the MODE CHECK button  
is pressed.  
For the setting to turn the  
viewfinder on when the GAIN is set to a  
value other than “0 dB”.  
lamp on the  
– C U F R  
– C U F R  
!LED  
ON  
OFF  
SHUTTER  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to indicate causes for  
For the setting to turn the  
viewfinder on when the electronic shutter  
is activated.  
lamp on the  
turning on the  
lamp on the viewfinder  
is displayed when the MODE CHECK  
button is pressed.  
– C U F R  
The causes for turning on the  
are displayed with  
lamp  
WHITE PRESET ON  
OFF  
For the setting to turn the  
viewfinder on when the WHITE BAL  
switch is set to the [PRST] position.  
lamp on the  
.
– C U F R  
FUNCTION  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to display the FUNCTION  
screen when the MODE CHECK button  
is pressed.  
– C U F R  
EXTENDER  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to turn the  
viewfinder on when the lens extender is  
activated.  
lamp on the  
– C U F R  
AUDIO  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to display the AUDIO  
screen when the MODE CHECK button  
is pressed.  
– C U F R  
B.GAMMA  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to turn the  
viewfinder on when the BLACK GAMMA  
is activated.  
lamp on the  
– C U F R  
CAC  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to display the CAC screen  
when the MODE CHECK button is  
pressed.  
– C U F R  
MATRIX  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to turn the  
viewfinder on when the color correction  
table for the linear matrix is selected.  
lamp on the  
– C U F R  
USER SW  
STATUS  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to display the functions  
assigned to the user buttons when the  
MODE CHECK button is pressed.  
– C U F R  
COLOR  
CORRECTION  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to turn the  
viewfinder on when the 12-axis  
independent color correction is selected.  
lamp on the  
– C U F R  
P.ON IND  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to display the status  
screen immediately after turning on the  
power of the unit.  
– C U F R  
FILTER  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to turn the  
lamp on the  
viewfinder on when the filter combination  
is anyone other than 3200 K and  
CLEAR.  
Note  
Even if it is set to “ON” in this item, the  
status screen is not displayed  
immediately after turning on the power of  
the unit when the STATUS item is set to  
“OFF”.  
– C U F R  
– C U F R  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
183  
 
CAM OPERATION  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.  
CAMERA ID  
SHUTTER SPEED  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
ID1  
ꢅꢅꢅꢅꢅꢅ  
ꢅꢅꢅꢅ  
SYNCHRO  
SCAN  
ON  
OFF  
Setting 1 for the CAMERA ID recorded  
on color bars. Up to 10 characters are  
allowed for this setting.  
Allocate SYNCHRO SCAN as a shutter  
speed selectable by the shutter switch.  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
SYNCHRO  
SCAN2  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate SYNCHRO SCAN2 as a shutter  
speed selectable by the shutter switch.  
When SYNCHRO SCAN2 has been  
allocated, the speed will only be  
displayed in seconds.  
ID2  
ꢅꢅꢅꢅꢅꢅ  
ꢅꢅꢅꢅ  
Setting 2 for the CAMERA ID recorded  
on color bars. Up to 10 characters are  
allowed for this setting.  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
ID3  
ꢅꢅꢅꢅꢅꢅ  
ꢅꢅꢅꢅ  
Setting 3 for the CAMERA ID recorded  
on color bars. Up to 10 characters are  
allowed for this setting.  
POSITION1  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate the shutter speed set by  
POSITION1 SEL in the <SHUTTER  
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed  
selectable by the shutter switch.  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
Note  
POSITION2  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate the shutter speed set by  
POSITION2 SEL in the <SHUTTER  
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed  
selectable by the shutter switch.  
This setting is canceled when READ FACTORY DATA is  
selected.  
– C U F –  
POSITION3  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate the shutter speed set by  
POSITION3 SEL in the <SHUTTER  
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed  
selectable by the shutter switch.  
– C U F –  
POSITION4  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate the shutter speed set by  
POSITION4 SEL in the <SHUTTER  
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed  
selectable by the shutter switch.  
– C U F –  
POSITION5  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate the shutter speed set by  
POSITION5 SEL in the <SHUTTER  
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed  
selectable by the shutter switch.  
– C U F –  
POSITION6  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate the shutter speed set by  
POSITION6 SEL in the <SHUTTER  
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed  
selectable by the shutter switch.  
– C U F –  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
184  
SHUTTER SELECT  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
POSITION1 SEL  
POSITION3 SEL  
For setting the shutter speed for  
POSITION1.  
For setting the shutter speed for  
POSITION3.  
For 59.94 Hz 1/60  
1/100  
For 59.94 Hz 1/60  
1/100  
1/120  
1/120  
1/250  
1/250  
1/500  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/1000  
1/2000  
1/2000  
HALF  
HALF  
180.0deg  
180.0deg  
172.8deg  
144.0deg  
120.0deg  
90.0deg  
45.0deg  
172.8deg  
144.0deg  
120.0deg  
90.0deg  
45.0deg  
For 50 Hz  
1/50  
For 50 Hz  
1/50  
1/60  
1/60  
1/120  
1/120  
1/250  
1/250  
1/500  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
HALF  
1/1000  
1/2000  
HALF  
180.0deg  
172.8deg  
144.0deg  
120.0deg  
90.0deg  
45.0deg  
180.0deg  
172.8deg  
144.0deg  
120.0deg  
90.0deg  
45.0deg  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
POSITION2 SEL  
POSITION4 SEL  
For setting the shutter speed for  
POSITION2.  
For setting the shutter speed for  
POSITION4.  
For 59.94 Hz 1/60  
1/100  
For 59.94 Hz 1/60  
1/100  
1/120  
1/120  
1/250  
1/250  
1/500  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/1000  
1/2000  
1/2000  
HALF  
HALF  
180.0deg  
180.0deg  
172.8deg  
144.0deg  
120.0deg  
90.0deg  
45.0deg  
172.8deg  
144.0deg  
120.0deg  
90.0deg  
45.0deg  
For 50 Hz  
1/50  
For 50 Hz  
1/50  
1/60  
1/60  
1/120  
1/120  
1/250  
1/250  
1/500  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
HALF  
1/1000  
1/2000  
HALF  
180.0deg  
172.8deg  
144.0deg  
120.0deg  
90.0deg  
45.0deg  
180.0deg  
172.8deg  
144.0deg  
120.0deg  
90.0deg  
45.0deg  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
185  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
USER SW  
Remarks  
POSITION5 SEL  
For setting the shutter speed for  
POSITION5.  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
For 59.94 Hz 1/60  
1/100  
Remarks  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
USER MAIN SW INH  
I.OVR  
Allocate the USER MAIN button. For  
descriptions of the functions, see  
[Assigning Functions to User Buttons]  
(page 56).  
S.BLK  
B.GAMMA  
Y GET  
1/2000  
HALF  
DRS  
180.0deg  
ASSIST  
C.TEMP  
VFR  
172.8deg  
144.0deg  
120.0deg  
90.0deg  
45.0deg  
FRATE  
VF GAM  
AUDIO CH1  
AUDIO CH2  
REC SW  
RET SW  
PRE REC  
SLOT SEL  
PC MODE  
For 50 Hz  
1/50  
1/60  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
HALF  
180.0deg  
172.8deg  
144.0deg  
120.0deg  
90.0deg  
45.0deg  
– C U F R  
USER1 SW  
INH  
I.OVR  
S.BLK  
B.GAMMA  
Y GET  
Allocate the USER 1 button. For  
descriptions of the functions, see  
[Assigning Functions to User Buttons]  
(page 56).  
DRS  
ASSIST  
C.TEMP  
VFR  
– C U F –  
POSITION6 SEL  
For setting the shutter speed for  
POSITION6.  
FRATE  
For 59.94 Hz 1/60  
1/100  
VF GAM  
AUDIO CH1  
AUDIO CH2  
REC SW  
RET SW  
PRE REC  
SLOT SEL  
PC MODE  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
HALF  
180.0deg  
172.8deg  
144.0deg  
120.0deg  
90.0deg  
45.0deg  
– C U F R  
USER2 SW  
INH  
I.OVR  
S.BLK  
B.GAMMA  
Y GET  
Allocate the USER 2 button. For  
descriptions of the functions, see  
[Assigning Functions to User Buttons]  
(page 56).  
For 50 Hz  
1/50  
1/60  
1/120  
1/250  
DRS  
ASSIST  
C.TEMP  
VFR  
1/500  
FRATE  
1/1000  
1/2000  
HALF  
180.0deg  
172.8deg  
144.0deg  
120.0deg  
90.0deg  
45.0deg  
VF GAM  
AUDIO CH1  
AUDIO CH2  
REC SW  
RET SW  
PRE REC  
SLOT SEL  
PC MODE  
– C U F R  
– C U F –  
MARKER SEL  
(USER3 SW)  
INH  
Y GET  
Allocate the MARKER SELECT button.  
For descriptions of the functions, see  
[Assigning Functions to User Buttons]  
(page 56).  
Note  
ASSIST  
VF GAM  
VF MARK  
REC SW  
RET SW  
PRE REC  
SLOT SEL  
PC MODE  
By setting the shutter speed on the time axis (1/60, 1/100, 1/  
120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000), the frame rate can be  
varied while keeping the exposure constant.  
This is equivalent to Ramping (compensating for changes in  
frame rate using shutter angle) in a conventional film  
camera.  
– C U F R  
TEXT MEMO SW INH  
Allocate the TEXT MEMO button. For  
descriptions of the functions, see  
[Assigning Functions to User Buttons]  
(page 56).  
(USER4 SW)  
Y GET  
ASSIST  
VF GAM  
REC SW  
RET SW  
PRE REC  
SLOT SEL  
PC MODE  
TEXT MEMO  
– C U F R  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
186  
 
SW MODE  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
RET SW  
R.REVIEW  
CAM RET  
COLOR BARS  
SMPTE  
FULL BARS  
SPLIT  
For setting the function when the user  
button on the unit, to which the RET  
button of the lens or the RET SW  
function is allocated, is pressed.  
R.REVIEW:  
For selecting the color bar to be used.  
SMPTE: Color bar complied with the  
SMPTE standards  
ARIB  
FULL BARS:  
Full color bar  
Rec review function  
SPLIT: SPLIT color bar for SNG  
(Satellite News Gathering)  
ARIB: Color bar complied with the  
ARIB standards  
It is possible to check a last few  
seconds of the records taken.  
CAM RET:  
Return video function  
– C U F R  
It is possible to confirm the  
return video signals (analog  
HD Y signals) supplied to the  
GENLOCK IN connector on the  
unit by using the viewfinder.  
Notes  
When video signals in a format  
different from that for the video mode  
of the unit, return video is not properly  
displayed.  
When the GENLOCK item (the  
<GENLOCK> screen on the SYSTEM  
SETTING page) is set to “INT”, the  
return video image may be displayed  
as slightly shaking horizontally.  
RC CHECK SW R.REVIEW  
PLAY  
For specifying what the unit does when  
the REC check button on the remote  
control unit is pressed.  
R.REVIEW:  
The unit performs rec review.  
PLAY: The unit performs playback.  
– C U F R  
SIDE SW LOCK ON  
OFF  
For selecting whether to disable the  
switches (GAIN, OUTPUT and AWB  
switches) on the side of the unit.  
When this setting is changed from “OFF”  
to “ON”, the set states of the switches  
are preserved. While this setting is “ON”,  
the switches remain disabled.  
ON:  
Switches are disabled.  
– C U F R  
OFF: Switches are not disabled.  
S.BLK LVL  
OFF  
–10  
–20  
–30  
For setting the super black level.  
– C U F R  
– C U F R  
AUTO KNEE SW OFF  
For selecting on/off of the AUTO KNEE  
function and DRS function.  
When it is set to “OFF”, the AUTO KNEE  
may not function even if the AUTO  
KNEE switch is turned on.  
ON  
DRS  
When the DRS is selected and the  
AUTO KNEE switch is positioned to  
[ON], the DRS function turns on.  
S C U F R  
SHD.ABB SW  
CTL  
ON  
OFF  
For the setting to adjust the black  
shading automatically when the AUTO  
W/B BAL switch is held to the [ABB] side  
for 8 seconds or more.  
– C U F R  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
187  
     
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
WHITE BALANCE MODE  
AWB B TEMP  
2300K  
:
3200K  
:
For setting the color temperature when  
the WHITE BAL switch is set to the [B]  
position.  
If the automatic adjustment of white  
balance is executed in the [B] position,  
the color temperature at that time is  
memorized in the position of the WHITE  
BAL switch [B].  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
FILTER INH  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting independently whether  
memory data for white balance (Ach,  
Bch) is retained or not for the respective  
CC filters.  
9900Kꢂ  
ON:  
Regardless of the CC filter, data  
for the memories (2 memories)  
for Ach and Bch is retained.  
– – – F –  
OFF: The memory data (8 memories)  
for Ach and Bch is retained for  
the respective CC filters.  
LENS/IRIS  
– C U F R  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
SHOCKLESS  
AWB  
OFF  
FAST  
NORMAL  
SLOW1  
SLOW2  
SLOW3  
For setting the length of time for  
transiting to the switched position of  
white balance, when the position of the  
WHITE BAL switch is changed.  
OFF: To transit instantly  
FAST: About 1 second  
NORMAL:  
About 2 seconds  
SLOW1:  
About 3 seconds  
SLOW2:  
Remarks  
A.IRIS LEVEL  
000  
:
045  
:
Set the target value for auto iris.  
100  
– C U F R  
A.IRIS PEAK/  
AVE  
000  
:
030  
:
Determine the peak-to-standard ratio for  
the auto iris.  
A larger value sets the auto iris to  
respond to the peak in the iris detection  
window, while a smaller value sets it to  
respond to the average value in the  
window.  
100  
About 10 seconds  
SLOW3:  
About 20 seconds  
– C U F R  
– C U F R  
AWB AREA  
25%  
50%  
90%  
For switching the detection area for  
executing the automatic adjustment of  
white balance.  
25%: An area near the screen center  
equivalent to 25% of the screen  
is detected.  
50%: An area near the screen center  
equivalent to 50% of the screen  
is detected.  
90%: An area equivalent to 90% of the  
screen is detected.  
A.IRIS WINDOW NORM1  
NORM2  
Select the auto iris detection window.  
NORM1:  
The window closer to the center  
of the screen.  
NORM2:  
The window closer to bottom of  
the screen.  
CENTR:  
CENTR  
The spot window in the center of  
the screen.  
– C U F R  
– C U F R  
IRIS GAIN  
CAM  
LENS  
Select which unit controls IRIS GAIN.  
Note  
TEMP PRE SEL VAR  
SW  
For changing the detection area on  
which automatic white balance  
adjustment is performed.  
VAR:  
From 2300Kto 9900Kis  
selectable.  
3.2K/5.6K:  
3.2K/5.6K  
Lenses with an extender, such as 2,  
0.8 sold before FUJINON DIGI  
POWER, perform iris compensation  
while enabling the extender. Therefore, if  
this setting is switched to “CAM”, the  
camera’s iris control will not operate  
properly.  
The detection area is fixed to  
3200K or 5600K.  
– C U F R  
– – – F –  
IRIS GAIN  
VALUE  
01  
:
10  
:
Set the adjustable value for IRIS GAIN.  
This setting is effective when “CAM” is  
selected for IRIS GAIN.  
COLOR TEMP  
PRE  
2300K  
:
3200K  
:
9900K  
For setting the color temperature when  
the WHITE BAL switch is set to the  
[PRST] position.  
Since the range of color temperatures  
that can be set will vary with the CC  
filter position, a numerical value  
cannot be changed even if the color  
temperature is changed when a high  
color temperature is set.  
20  
– C U F R  
– – – F –  
AWB A TEMP  
2300K  
:
3200K  
:
For setting the color temperature when  
the WHITE BAL switch is set to the [A]  
position.  
If the automatic adjustment of white  
balance is executed in the [A] position,  
the color temperature at that time is  
memorized in the position of the WHITE  
BAL switch [A].  
9900Kꢂ  
– – – F –  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
188  
MAIN OPERATION  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.  
BATTERY/P2CARD  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
BATTERY  
SELECT  
PROPAC14  
TRIMPAC14  
HYTRON50  
HYTRON140  
DIONIC90  
DIONIC160  
NP-L7  
ENDURA7  
ENDURA10  
ENDURA-D  
PAG L95  
CARD NEAR  
END ALARM  
ON  
OFF  
Select the battery to use. Remaining  
capacity detection is also performed  
according to the selected battery.  
The variable range is changed by the  
item settings selected on the [BATTERY  
SETTING1] (page 190) and [BATTERY  
SETTING2] (page 191) menus.  
The initial value for “TYPE A” is set to  
“DIONIC90” while the same for “TYPE B”  
is set to “HYTRON140”.  
Select whether or not to set the alarm to  
beep when the space remaining on the  
P2 card is small.  
– C U F –  
CARD NEAR  
END TIME  
2min  
3min  
Set the time at which to indicate that  
there is little space remaining on the P2  
card.  
– C U F –  
CARD END  
ALARM  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to set the alarm to  
beep when the P2 card is full.  
BP-L65/95  
NiCd14  
TYPE A  
When BP-GL65 or BP-GL95, a battery  
made of Sony, is used, set this to “BP-  
L65/95”.  
– C U F –  
TYPE B  
CARD REMAIN/ 3min/  
Set the length of time for one segment  
() of the P2 card’s remaining capacity  
indicator bars.  
– C U F –  
5min/  
EXT DC IN  
SELECT  
AC_ADPT  
PROPAC14  
TRIMPAC14  
HYTRON50  
HYTRON140  
DIONIC90  
DIONIC160  
NP-L7  
ENDURA7  
ENDURA10  
ENDURA-D  
PAG L95  
Set the remaining capacity detection  
type when a battery is connected to the  
DC IN connector. Remaining capacity  
detection is also performed according to  
the selected battery type.  
The variable range is changed by the  
item settings selected on the [BATTERY  
SETTING1] (page 190) and [BATTERY  
SETTING2] (page 191) menus.  
Analog voltage is displayed on the  
viewfinder screen.  
3min/„  
:
One segment represents  
3 minutes.  
5min/„  
:
One segment represents  
5 minutes.  
– C U F –  
BP-L65/95  
NiCd14  
TYPE A  
When BP-GL65 or BP-GL95, a battery  
made of Sony, is used, set this to “BP-  
L65/95”.  
TYPE B  
– C U F –  
BATT NEAR  
END ALARM  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to set the alarm to  
beep when the battery level is low.  
– C U F –  
BATT NEAR  
END CANCEL  
ON  
OFF  
If set to “ON”, the warning tone and  
indication can be canceled by pressing  
the MODE CHECK button when BATT  
NEAR END ALARM is triggered.  
– C U F –  
BATT END  
ALARM  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to set the alarm to  
beep when the battery is empty.  
– C U F –  
BATT REMAIN  
FULL  
70%  
100%  
Set the display of the remaining battery  
level indicator bar in the display window  
when a battery with this function is used.  
70%:  
Indicate FULL at 70% capacity.  
100%: Indicate FULL at 100% capacity.  
– C U F –  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
189  
 
BATTERY SETTING1  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
PROPAC14  
DIONIC90  
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
:  
:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
:  
:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:  
Set voltage manually.  
Set voltage manually.  
11.0  
:
13.8  
:
11.0  
:
13.6  
:
When “MANUAL” is selected in the  
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage  
in 0.1 V steps.  
When “MANUAL” is selected in the  
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage  
in 0.1 V steps.  
15.0  
15.0  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
TRIMPAC14  
DIONIC160  
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
:  
:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
:  
:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:  
Set voltage manually.  
Set voltage manually.  
11.0  
:
13.6  
:
11.0  
:
13.2  
:
When “MANUAL” is selected in the  
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage  
in 0.1 V steps.  
When “MANUAL” is selected in the  
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage  
in 0.1 V steps.  
15.0  
15.0  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
HYTRON50  
NP-L7  
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
:  
:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
:  
:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:  
Set voltage manually.  
Set voltage manually.  
11.0  
:
13.5  
:
11.0  
:
13.2  
:
When “MANUAL” is selected in the  
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage  
in 0.1 V steps.  
When “MANUAL” is selected in the  
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage  
in 0.1 V steps.  
15.0  
15.0  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
HYTRON140  
ENDURA7  
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
:  
:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
:  
:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:  
Set voltage manually.  
Set voltage manually.  
11.0  
:
13.5  
:
11.0  
:
13.2  
:
When “MANUAL” is selected in the  
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage  
in 0.1 V steps.  
When “MANUAL” is selected in the  
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage  
in 0.1 V steps.  
15.0  
15.0  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
190  
 
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
BATTERY SETTING2  
Remarks  
ENDURA10  
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
:  
:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
NiCd14  
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
:  
:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:  
NEAR END 11.0  
Set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
:
Set voltage manually.  
13.8  
:
15.0  
11.0  
:
13.2  
:
When “MANUAL” is selected in the  
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage  
in 0.1 V steps.  
END  
11.0  
:
Set the END voltage in 0.1 V steps.  
15.0  
13.4  
:
– C U F –  
15.0  
ENDURA-D  
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
– C U F –  
:  
:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
TYPE A  
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
:  
:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:  
FULL  
12.0  
:
15.1  
:
Set the voltage to display the FULL  
indication in 0.1 V steps.  
Set voltage manually.  
11.0  
:
13.2  
:
When “MANUAL” is selected in the  
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage  
in 0.1 V steps.  
17.0  
NEAR END 11.0  
Set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
:
13.6  
:
15.0  
– C U F –  
15.0  
PAG L95  
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
END  
11.0  
:
12.9  
:
Set the END voltage in 0.1 V steps.  
:  
:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
15.0  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:  
– C U F –  
TYPE B  
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
:  
:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
Set voltage manually.  
11.0  
:
13.5  
:
When “MANUAL” is selected in the  
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage  
in 0.1 V steps.  
FULL  
12.0  
:
15.5  
:
Set the voltage to display the FULL  
indication in 0.1 V steps.  
15.0  
17.0  
– C U F –  
NEAR END 11.0  
Set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
BP-GL65/95  
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
:
13.5  
:
15.0  
:  
:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
END  
11.0  
:
13.1  
:
Set the END voltage in 0.1 V steps.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:  
15.0  
Set voltage manually.  
– C U F –  
11.0  
:
13.5  
:
When “MANUAL” is selected in the  
menu above, set the NEAR END voltage  
in 0.1 V steps.  
The remaining battery level is indicated in percentage  
when a battery with this function is installed on the unit.  
15.0  
– C U F –  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
191  
 
MIC/AUDIO1  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
FRONT VR CH1 OFF  
FRONT  
MIC LOWCUT  
CH4  
OFF  
FRONT  
W.L.  
Select whether or not to enable the  
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control for the  
signal selected as the input signal to  
AUDIO IN CH1.  
OFF: Disabled for any input selected.  
Recording level does not change  
by turning the volume control.  
FRONT: Only enabled when [FRONT] is  
selected.  
W.L.: Only enabled when [W.L.]  
(wireless) is selected.  
REAR: Only enabled when [REAR] is  
selected.  
Select the microphone low cut filter for  
input CH4.  
OFF: The microphone low cut filter is  
disabled for any input.  
FRONT: The microphone low cut filter is  
enabled when the front  
W.L.  
REAR  
ALL  
REAR  
microphone is selected.  
W.L.: The microphone low cut filter is  
enabled only when the wireless  
microphone is selected.  
REAR: The microphone low cut filter is  
enabled only when the rear  
microphone is selected.  
ALL: Enabled for any input selected.  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
LIMITER CH1  
ON  
OFF  
Select the limiter.  
SELECT CH1 switch is set to [MAN].  
FRONT VR CH2 OFF  
FRONT  
Select whether or not to enable the  
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control for the  
signal selected as an input signal to  
AUDIO IN CH2.  
OFF: Disabled for any input selected.  
Recording level does not change  
by turning the volume control.  
FRONT: Only enabled when [FRONT] is  
selected.  
W.L.: Only enabled when [W.L.]  
(wireless) is selected.  
REAR: Only enabled when [REAR] is  
selected.  
W.L.  
REAR  
ALL  
– C U F –  
LIMITER CH2  
ON  
OFF  
Select the limiter.  
SELECT CH2 switch is set to [MAN].  
– C U F –  
AUTO LEVEL  
CH3  
ON  
OFF  
Select the level setting method.  
For more information, see [CH3 and  
CH4 Recording Levels] (page 59)  
– C U F –  
AUTO LEVEL  
CH4  
ON  
OFF  
Select the level setting method.  
For more information, see [CH3 and  
CH4 Recording Levels] (page 59)  
ALL: Enabled for any input selected.  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
MIC LOWCUT  
CH1  
OFF  
FRONT  
W.L.  
Select the microphone low cut filter for  
input CH1.  
OFF: The microphone low cut filter is  
disabled for any input.  
TEST TONE  
OFF  
Select the test signal.  
OFF: Disable test tone output.  
NORMAL:  
NORMAL  
ALWAYS  
CHSEL  
REAR  
FRONT: The microphone low cut filter is  
enabled when the front  
Test tone signals are output to all  
of CH1 - CH4 when the  
microphone is selected.  
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector  
switch has been switched to  
[BARS] and CH1 of the AUDIO  
IN switch has been switched to  
[FRONT].  
W.L.: The microphone low cut filter is  
enabled only when the wireless  
microphone is selected.  
REAR: The microphone low cut filter is  
enabled only when the rear  
microphone is selected.  
ALWAYS:  
Test tone signals are always  
output to all of CH1 - CH4 when  
the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE  
selector switch has been  
switched to [BARS].  
– C U F –  
MIC LOWCUT  
CH2  
OFF  
FRONT  
W.L.  
Select the microphone low cut filter for  
input CH2.  
OFF: The microphone low cut filter is  
disabled for any input.  
FRONT: The microphone low cut filter is  
enabled when the front  
REAR  
CHSEL: Output test tone to the channels  
where the AUDIO IN switch CH1  
or CH2 is set to [FRONT] when  
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector  
switch is set to [BARS]. The test  
tone is not output to CH3 and  
CH4.  
microphone is selected.  
W.L.: The microphone low cut filter is  
enabled only when the wireless  
microphone is selected.  
REAR: The microphone low cut filter is  
enabled only when the rear  
microphone is selected.  
– C U F –  
Note  
– C U F –  
The frequency characteristics when the microphone low cut  
filter is applied are 200 Hz to 10 kHz.  
MIC LOWCUT  
CH3  
OFF  
FRONT  
W.L.  
Select the microphone low cut filter for  
input CH3.  
OFF: The microphone low cut filter is  
disabled for any input.  
REAR  
FRONT: The microphone low cut filter is  
enabled when the front  
microphone is selected.  
W.L.: The microphone low cut filter is  
enabled only when the wireless  
microphone is selected.  
REAR: The microphone low cut filter is  
enabled only when the rear  
microphone is selected.  
– C U F –  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
192  
MIC/AUDIO2  
TC/UB  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
FRONT MIC  
POWER  
ON  
OFF  
TC MODE  
DF  
NDF  
Select the phantom power supply for the  
front microphone.  
Set the time code mode.  
DF:  
Drop frame.  
NDF: Non drop frame.  
Note  
When the unit operates at 50 Hz or in  
24P or 24PA mode, the non-drop frame  
is always used.  
– C U F –  
REAR MIC  
POWER  
ON  
OFF  
Select the phantom power supply for the  
rear microphone.  
When “OFF” is selected, no phantom  
power is supplied even if the LINE/MIC/  
+48V selector switch is set to [+48V].  
– C U F –  
UB MODE  
USER  
TIME  
DATE  
EXT  
TCG  
Select the user bits mode.  
USER: Select UB value set in the LCD  
section.  
TIME: Select local time (hours,  
minutes, seconds).  
DATE: Select local date and time (2 last  
connector are recorded.  
If reading fails, USER value is  
retained.  
– C U F –  
MONITOR  
SELECT  
STEREO  
MIX  
When the MONITOR select switch is set  
to [ST] (stereo), select the signal format  
for the monitor output.  
FRM RATE  
REGEN  
– C U F –  
FRONT MIC  
LEVEL  
–40dB  
–50dB  
Select the front microphone input level.  
Select the rear microphone input level.  
Select the rear microphone input level.  
Select the rear line input level.  
– C U F –  
REAR MIC CH1 –50dB  
LVL  
–60dB  
– C U F –  
TCG: TCG value enters UB.  
FRM RATE:  
REAR MIC CH2 –50dB  
LVL  
Select the shooting information  
(e.g. frame rate) for the camera.  
For more information, see  
[Frame rate information  
–60dB  
– C U F –  
REAR LINE IN  
LVL  
–3dB  
0dB  
recorded in user bits] (page 63).  
When clips recorded in native  
mode are played back, the frame  
rate information recorded in  
users bits in the VAUX area is  
output.  
+4dB  
– C U F –  
AUDIO OUT LVL –3dB  
Select the audio output level.  
0dB  
+4dB  
– C U F –  
REGEN: Read out value stored in the  
card and record value  
HEADROOM  
18dB  
20dB  
Set the headroom (standard level).  
continuously.  
– C U F –  
Note  
WIRELESS  
WARN  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to enable the  
alarm to trigger for poor wireless receiver  
reception.  
When the unit is in 720P mode, “FRM  
RATE” is always selected.  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
WIRELESS  
TYPE  
SINGLE  
DUAL  
Select the type of wireless receiver.  
SINGLE:  
Select a single channel wireless  
receiver.  
DUAL: Select a 2-channel wireless  
receiver.  
– C U F –  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
193  
   
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
VITC UB MODE USER/EXT  
TC DISP SEL  
24F  
30F  
Select the user bits mode for VAUX TC  
(VITC).  
USER/EXT:  
Select the display format for the time  
code frame digits. (For 1080-59.94i or  
720-59.94P only)  
For details, refer to [Recording time code  
and user bits] (page 61).  
TIME  
DATE  
TCG  
FRM RATE  
REGEN  
If UB MODE is set to “EXT”, the  
EXT value is recorded. If not,  
USER value set by UB is  
recorded.  
24F:  
Convert time code frame digits  
into 24 frames for display.  
Display time code frame digits in  
30 frames.  
TIME: Select local time (hours,  
minutes, seconds).  
30F:  
DATE: Select local date and time (2 last  
digits of year, month, date, time).  
TCG: TCG value enters UB.  
FRM RATE:  
Select camera shooting  
information (frame rate, etc.).  
For more information, see  
[Frame rate information  
recorded in user bits] (page 63).  
REGEN: Read out value stored in card  
and record value continuously.  
Note  
– C U F –  
TC VIDEO  
SYNCHRO  
0
1
2
3
For setting to correct the time code  
according to the delay of video signals.  
0:  
1:  
Do not correct.  
To delay the time code to be  
input according to the timing of  
the video images.  
2:  
3:  
To forward the time code to be  
output according to the timing of  
the video images.  
To delay the time code to be  
input and forward the time code  
to be output, respectively,  
according to the timing of the  
video images.  
When the unit operates in 24P, 24PA,  
720P, and Native mode, the “FRM  
RATE” is fixed.  
– C U F –  
For details, refer to [Externally Locking  
the Time Code] (page 67).  
TCG SET HOLD ON  
OFF  
On/off switching for the feature that  
always starts recording (when the power  
is turned on again) the TCG value that  
was set before the power is turned off.  
– C U F –  
REC REVIEW  
REGEN  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting whether the time code is  
regenerated to the value on the P2 card  
or not, when subsequent recording starts  
after setting the RET SW item on the  
<SW MODE> screen to “R.REVIEW”  
and pressing the RET button on the lens  
or the user button on the unit on which  
the RET SW function is assigned.  
– C U F –  
FIRST REC TC PRESET  
REGEN  
For selecting whether the time code is  
regenerated to the value on the P2 card  
when first recording after switching on  
the power, inserting the P2 card or  
changing the P2 card that is the  
recording target.  
ON:  
The time code is regenerated.  
PRESET:  
OFF: The time code is not  
Use the unit’s internal time code.  
REGEN: For clips recorded on the  
recording-target P2 card,  
regenerated.  
– C U F –  
regenerate the time code as the  
time code of the clip that has the  
most recent date and time.  
Notes  
UMID SET/INFO  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Set the date and time accurately. For  
guidance on setting, see [Setting the  
Internal Clock’s Date and Time]  
(page 65).  
Remarks  
COUNTRY  
NO-INFO  
Input the user’s country. “NO-INFO” is  
displayed until the input completes.  
During operation in either 24P or 24PA  
mode, regeneration of the value of the  
card recorded in drop-frame is not  
permitted.  
– C U F –  
ORGANIZATION NO-INFO  
Input the user’s organization or company  
name. “NO-INFO” is displayed until the  
input completes.  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
P.OFF LCD  
DISPLAY  
ON  
OFF  
For selecting whether to allow the time  
code of the LCD monitor to be set and  
the counter to be displayed when the  
power is off.  
USER  
NO-INFO  
Input the user name. “NO-INFO” is  
displayed until the input completes.  
– C U F –  
DEVICE NODE  
– – – – –  
ON:  
It is possible to set the time code  
and display the counter when  
the power is off.  
Indicate the product ID number.  
OFF: Power-down LCD monitor while  
camera power is turned off.  
Note  
Setting and indication disabled.  
Please refer to [Setting UMID Information] (page 72) for the  
UMID information setting.  
– C U F –  
TC OUT  
TCG  
TCG/TCR  
Select the time code to be output to the  
time code output connector.  
TCG: Always output time code  
generator value.  
TCG/TCR:  
Output time code generator  
value in recording mode, and  
time code reader value in  
playback mode.  
– C U F –  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
194  
FILE  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.  
SD CARD READ/WRITE  
SD CARD R/W SELECT  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
R.SELECT  
1
:
8
SYSTEM MODE ON  
Select the file number to read out.  
Select whether or not to include the  
settings for the options on the <SYSTEM  
MODE> screen when reading out or  
writing to the SD memory card.  
R/W  
OFF  
– – – F –  
READ  
Read out the data from the SD memory  
card.  
– – – F –  
ID READ/WRITE ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to include the  
CAMERA ID when reading out or writing  
to the SD memory card.  
– – – – –  
W.SELECT  
1
:
8
Select the file number to write in.  
– – – F –  
USER MENU  
SELECT R/W  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to include the  
settings on the USER MENU SELECT  
page when reading out or writing to the  
SD memory card.  
– – – F –  
WRITE  
Write the unit’s menu data to the SD  
memory card.  
– – – – –  
CARD CONFIG  
– – – – –  
TITLE READ  
– – – F –  
Format the SD memory card.  
SYSTEM MENU ON  
R/W  
Select whether or not to include the set  
values on all screens except the  
<SYSTEM MODE> screen on the  
SYSTEM SETTING page and the set  
values on the OPTION MENU page  
when reading out or writing to the SD  
memory card.  
OFF  
Read out the title of the data recorded on  
the SD memory card.  
– – – – –  
TITLE1 - 8  
ꢅꢅꢅꢅꢅꢅ  
ꢅꢅ  
Up to 8 letters can be set for the title  
name.  
– – – F –  
– – – – –  
PAINT MENU  
LEVEL R/W  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to include the  
adjusted values on the PAINT page  
when reading out or writing to the SD  
memory card.  
Note  
For a USB DEVICE mode, errors occur even if the  
respective items for SD CARD READ/WRITE are executed,  
since it does not access an SD memory card. Set PC MODE  
to “OFF” and then execute the operation again.  
– – – F –  
PAINT MENU  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to include the set  
values on the PAINT MENU page when  
reading out or writing to the SD memory  
card.  
SW(  
) R/W  
– – – F –  
VF MENU R/W  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to include the set  
values on the VF page when reading out  
or writing to the SD memory card.  
– – – F –  
CAM OPE MENU ON  
Select whether or not to include the set  
values on the CAM OPERATION page  
when reading out or writing to the SD  
memory card.  
R/W  
OFF  
– – – F –  
MAIN OPE  
MENU R/W  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to include the set  
values on the MAIN OPERATION page  
when reading out or writing to the SD  
memory card.  
– – – F –  
MAINTE MENU ON  
Select whether or not to include the set  
values on the MAINTENANCE page  
when reading out or writing to the SD  
memory card.  
R/W  
OFF  
– – – F –  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
195  
 
CAC FILE CARD READ  
FILE READ screen  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
CARD FILE  
SELECT  
01  
:
32  
For selecting the number of the  
chromatic aberration correction file on  
the SD memory card that will be read or  
deleted.  
TITLE  
For displaying the name of a CAC file set  
using READ from the <CAC FILE CARD  
READ> screen.  
– – – F –  
YES  
For storing a CAC file read from the SD  
memory card to the internal memory of  
the unit.  
READ  
For reading CAC file from the SD  
memory card. When selected, the  
following FILE READ screen appears.  
NO (CANCEL)  
For canceling storage of a CAC file read  
from the SD memory card to the internal  
memory of the unit.  
– – – – –  
DELETE  
For deleting a CAC file from the SD  
memory card.  
MEM STORE  
NO.  
EMPTY  
01  
:
EMPTY:  
– – – – –  
For searching through the  
internal memory of the unit in  
numerical order when storing  
data and only stores data in free  
locations.  
TITLE READ  
For reading the name of a CAC file on  
the SD memory card.  
32  
– – – – –  
TITLE SCROLL 01  
For scrolling through the CAC files on  
the SD memory card. Select this option  
using the cursor. Press the jog dial  
button, and then turn the jog dial button  
to scroll through the CAC files.  
01 - 32:  
:
25  
For storing data at selected  
number. When a CAC file  
already exists at the selected  
number, it is overwritten.  
– – – – –  
TITLE SCROLL 01  
For scrolling through the CAC files in the  
internal memory of the unit. Select this  
option using the cursor. Press the jog  
dial button, and then turn the jog dial  
button to scroll through the CAC files.  
01: - 32:  
For displaying up to 32 file names, each  
up to 27 characters in length.  
:
25  
– – – – –  
01 - 32  
For displaying up to 32 file names, each  
up to 27 characters in length.  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
196  
LENS FILE  
SCENE  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
FILE NO.  
01  
:
64  
READ USER  
DATA  
Select the lens file number.  
Read out the data from the user area in  
the memory.  
– – – – –  
– – – F –  
READ  
SCENE SEL  
01  
:
Select the scene file.  
Read the lens file data.  
16  
– – – – –  
WRITE  
– – – F –  
READ  
Write the lens file data.  
Read the scene file.  
Write the scene file.  
– – – – –  
RESET ALL  
– – – – –  
– – – – –  
WRITE  
For resetting the all data of the lens file.  
Scrolls through the lens files.  
– – – – –  
RESET  
TITLE SCROLL 01  
:
59  
Reset the scene file values to the initial  
values.  
– – – – –  
– – – – –  
TITLE  
ꢅꢅꢅꢅꢅꢅ  
ꢅꢅꢅꢅꢅꢅ  
Up to 12 letters can be set for the title  
name.  
TITLE SCROLL 01  
Scrolls through the scene files.  
:
12  
– – – – –  
01 - 64  
– – – – –  
TITLE 1-5  
For displaying up to 64 file names.  
Create the scene file title.  
– – – – –  
– – – – –  
01: - 16:  
For displaying up to 16 file names.  
LENS FILE CARD R/W  
– – – – –  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Note  
For a USB DEVICE mode, errors occur even if the READ  
USER DATA item is executed, since it does not access an  
SD memory card. Set PC MODE to “OFF” and then execute  
the operation again.  
CARD FILE  
SELECT  
1(01-08)  
2(09-16)  
3(17-24)  
4(25-32)  
5(33-40)  
6(41-48)  
7(49-56)  
8(57-64)  
For selecting the number of the lens file  
in the SD memory card.  
INITIALIZE  
– – – F –  
READ  
For reading the lens file data from the SD  
memory card.  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
– – – – –  
READ FACTORY  
DATA  
The menu (MAIN MENU, OPTION  
MENU) values are all reset to factory  
settings.  
WRITE  
For writing the lens file data into the SD  
memory card.  
Note  
– – – – –  
The settings for the following are not  
reset to the factory-set values.  
Scene file  
TITLE READ  
For reading the title of the lens file in the  
SD memory card.  
– – – – –  
User data  
TITLE1 - 8  
ꢅꢅꢅꢅꢅꢅ  
ꢅꢅꢅꢅꢅꢅ  
For setting a title consisting of not more  
than 12 characters.  
Lens file  
Black shading data  
– – – – –  
– – – – –  
WRITE USER  
DATA  
Save the user preference menu data in  
the camera’s internal memory.  
Note  
– – – – –  
For a USB DEVICE mode, errors occur even if the  
respective items of LENS FILE CARD R/W are executed,  
since it does not access an SD memory card. Set PC MODE  
to “OFF” and then execute the operation again.  
Note  
For a USB DEVICE mode, errors occur even if the READ  
FACTORY DATA item is executed, since it does not access  
an SD memory card. Set PC MODE to “OFF” and then  
execute the operation again.  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
197  
   
MAINTENANCE  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.  
LENS ADJ  
LENS FILE ADJ  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
F2.8 ADJ  
ON  
OFF  
RB GAIN CTRL ON  
The iris is only set to F2.8 when this item  
set to “ON”. (Adjustment to F2.8 will be  
executed on the lens)  
ON:  
The gains of Rch and Bch  
adjusted in <RB GAIN  
RESET  
OFF  
CONTROL> screen are reset.  
Furthermore, the flare levels of  
Rch, Gch and Bch that are  
adjusted on <RGB BLACK  
CONTROL> screen are reset.  
– – – – –  
F16 ADJ  
ON  
OFF  
The iris is only set to F16 when this item  
set to “ON”. (Adjustment to F16 will be  
executed on the lens)  
OFF: The gains of Rch and Bch  
adjusted in <RB GAIN  
– – – – –  
CONTROL> screen are enabled.  
Furthermore, the flare levels of  
Rch, Gch and Bch that are  
BLACK SHADING  
adjusted on <RGB BLACK  
CONTROL> screen are enabled.  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
– – – F –  
LENS R GAIN  
OFFSET  
–200  
:
+000  
:
For compensating Rch sensitivity of the  
lens used.  
CORRECT  
ON  
OFF  
On/off switching for digital black shading  
compensation.  
– C U F R  
+200  
DETECTION  
(DIG)  
Execute digital black shading  
compensation.  
– – – F –  
LENS B GAIN  
OFFSET  
–200  
:
+000  
:
+200  
For compensating Bch sensitivity of the  
lens used.  
– – – – –  
WHITE SHADING  
– – – F –  
LENS R FLARE 000  
For adjusting the flare level of Rch.  
For adjusting the flare level of Gch.  
For adjusting the flare level of Bch.  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
:
100  
CORRECT  
ON  
OFF  
On/off switching for white shading  
compensation.  
– – – F –  
LENS G FLARE 000  
– C U F R  
:
100  
R H SAW  
R H PARA  
R V SAW  
R V PARA  
G H SAW  
G H PARA  
G V SAW  
G V PARA  
B H SAW  
B H PARA  
B V SAW  
B V PARA  
–255  
:
+000  
:
+255  
For executing the white shading  
compensation manually.  
– – – F –  
The sawteeth-shaped waveform and the  
parabola waveform of the respective  
RGB channels are adjusted in the  
horizontal direction and the vertical  
direction.  
LENS B FLARE 000  
:
100  
– – – F –  
Data adjusted on the <LENS FILE ADJ> screen can be  
stored on an SD memory card as a lens file.  
– – – F –  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
198  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
CAC ADJ  
CHAR FPGA  
Displays the version of the program for  
the HD signal I/O control FPGA.  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
– – – – –  
CAC CONTROL ON  
OFF  
ON:  
Enable chromatic aberration  
correction  
DC FPGA  
Displays the version of the program for  
the SD signal I/O control FPGA.  
OFF: Disable chromatic aberration  
– – – – –  
correction  
– – U F R  
CAC FILE  
DELETE  
Deletes the CAC file stored in the  
internal memory of the unit, and selected  
using CAC FILE NO.  
DIAGNOSTIC2  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
– – – – –  
Remarks  
CAC FILE NO.  
01  
:
32  
Selects a CAC file when manual  
correction is in use. Also, selects CAC  
file for deletion when deleting CAC files  
using CAC FILE DELETE.  
SYSCON SOFT  
Display the software version for the  
system control microprocessor.  
– – – – –  
LCD SOFT  
Display the software version for the LCD  
microprocessor.  
– – – F –  
TITLE SCROLL 01  
Scrolls through CAC files. Select this  
option using the cursor. Press the jog  
dial button, and then turn the jog dial  
button to scroll through the CAC files.  
– – – – –  
:
25  
P2CS OS  
Display the OS version for the streaming  
controller.  
– – – – –  
– – – F –  
P2CS AP  
01:  
Display the application version for the  
streaming controller.  
For displaying up to 32 file names, each  
up to 27 characters in length.  
– – – – –  
– – – – –  
SH4CTRL FPGA  
02:  
Display the program version for the  
streaming control FPGA.  
For displaying up to 32 file names, each  
up to 27 characters in length.  
– – – – –  
– – – – –  
PRCCTRL FPGA  
03:  
Displays the version of the program for  
the PRE RECORDING control FPGA.  
For displaying up to 32 file names, each  
up to 27 characters in length.  
– – – – –  
– – – – –  
SYSIF FPGA  
04:  
Display the program version for the  
serial interface FPGA.  
For displaying up to 32 file names, each  
up to 27 characters in length.  
– – – – –  
– – – – –  
AVC-I SOFT  
05:  
Display the control software version of  
the AVC-I board.  
For displaying up to 32 file names, each  
up to 27 characters in length.  
– – – – –  
– – – – –  
AVC-I FPGA  
06:  
Display the FPGA program version of  
the AVC-I board.  
For displaying up to 32 file names, each  
up to 27 characters in length.  
– – – – –  
– – – – –  
07:  
For displaying up to 32 file names, each  
up to 27 characters in length.  
HOURS METER  
– – – – –  
08:  
For displaying up to 32 file names, each  
up to 27 characters in length.  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
– – – – –  
OPERATION  
Display total hours the camera power  
has been turned on.  
DIAGNOSTIC1  
– – – – –  
P.ON TIMES  
Display total number of times the  
POWER switch has been turned on.  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
– – – – –  
CAMSOFT MAIN  
Displays the version of the main software  
for the camera microprocessor.  
– – – – –  
CAM TABLE  
Displays the version of the camera block  
settings table.  
– – – – –  
PULSE FPGA  
Displays the version of the program for  
driving the CCD.  
– – – – –  
UCIF FPGA  
Displays the version of the program for  
the microprocessor interface FPGA.  
– – – – –  
FM FPGA  
Displays the version of the program for  
the frame memory control FPGA.  
– – – – –  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
199  
OPTION MENU  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.  
OPTION  
AREA SETTING  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
ENG SECURITY ON  
OFF  
AREA SELECT NTSC  
NTSC (J)  
PAL  
Select whether or not to prohibit opening  
the menu screen.  
NTSC: Selects an NTSC area outside  
Japan.  
NTSC (J):  
Selects Japan.  
PAL: Selects a PAL area.  
ON:  
Please consult your distributor to  
release the setting.  
OFF: Menu screen can be opened.  
– – – – –  
– – – – –  
AREA SET  
For changing the area setting selected  
using AREA SELECT. For more details  
about settings used in different areas,  
refer to [Color TV Standard Settings  
(Settings for frame frequency)]  
(page 13).  
FRAME RATE  
UB  
FRM RATE  
MENU  
For setting the user bits to record when  
the video system is set to 24P or 24PA,  
or when the recording format is set to  
720P. For details, refer to [Recording  
time code and user bits] (page 61).  
FRM RATE:  
– – – – –  
For recording the shooting  
information (frame rate etc.) of  
the camera.  
MENU: This follows the settings in the  
UB MODE item and the VITC UB  
MODE item of <TC/UB> screen.  
However, the camera shooting  
information is always recorded  
when recording in native mode.  
– C – – –  
1394 CONFIG  
DFLT(000)  
001  
:
This is the menu for expanding the  
DVCPRO connector.  
Use with “DFLT” in normal operation.  
255  
– C – – –  
1394 GAP  
COUNT  
0
:
For setting the interval between packets.  
40  
:
63  
– C – – –  
AUDIO OUT  
DELAY  
DELAYED  
THROUGH  
Select whether or not to delay audio,  
headphone and speaker outputs.  
DELAYED:  
Delay audio output in  
synchronization with video  
output.  
THROUGH:  
Output audio input without delay.  
This setting prevents echo effect  
between the sound source and  
audio output when the sound  
source is near the unit.  
– C – – –  
FAN MODE  
OFF  
AUTO  
For setting the operation mode of the fan  
OFF: The fan always stops.  
AUTO: The fan will run automatically  
when the temperature in the unit  
increases.  
Note  
Once the power is turned off, this will  
always be set to “AUTO” whenever the  
power is turned on. If the unit is operated  
as the fan stops, the temperature in the  
unit will increase, and data may not  
record or play back properly. Use the unit  
after setting this item to “AUTO” for  
normal operation.  
– – – – –  
Menu: Menu Description Tables  
200  
Updating the firmware  
incorporated into the unit  
The firmware can be updated using either of the following two methods.  
1. Checking the current version of firmware and performing the update using the dedicated tool  
(P2_Status_Logger)  
PASS (P2 Asset Support System) is only available to customers who have completed customer registration with  
Panasonic.  
Log in to PASS and use the dedicated tool (P2_Status_Logger) to check the version information of the firmware on the  
unit and download links to pages containing the necessary firmware.  
For further information about downloading and using P2_Status_Logger, log in to PASS and refer to the relevant pages.  
Besides access to PASS, completing customer registration has a number of other benefits. For further details, refer to the  
PASS (P2 Asset Support System) website (http://panasonic.biz/sav/pass_e/).  
2. Checking the current version of the firmware using the unit and performing the update  
From the MAINTENANCE menu page, check the current version of firmware on the unit using the <DIAGNOSTIC1> and  
<DIAGNOSTIC2> screens. Then, access the website listed below for the latest firmware-related information and  
download firmware as required.  
Notes  
The update is completed by loading the downloaded file onto the unit via an SD memory card. For further details about the  
updating methods, refer to the following website.  
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/  
Be sure to use a compatible SD memory card. The unit is compatible with SD memory cards based on the SD and SDHC  
standards. Also, be sure to format the memory card using the unit before use.  
Updating the firmware incorporated into the unit  
201  
 
Specifications  
Operating temperature:  
General  
0 °C to +40 °C (32 °F to +104 °F)  
Storage temperature:  
–20 °C to +60 °C (–4 °F to +140 °F)  
Operating humidity:  
10% to maximum 85% (relative humidity)  
Power supply:  
DC 12 V (11.0 V to 17.0 V)  
Power consumption:  
38 W (Main unit only, LCD monitor: ON)  
Maximum continuous operation:  
Approximately 120 minutes (using an Anton/Bauer  
DIONIC90 battery)  
indicates safety information.  
Dimensions (WHD):  
137 mm209 mm318 mm  
(5-3/16 inches8-1/2 inches12-1/2 inches)  
(excluding handle and wireless option cover)  
Weight:  
Approx. 4.9 kg (10.8 lb)  
(main unit only, excluding VF mount)  
Camera Unit  
Pickup devices:  
Shutter speeds:  
2/3-inch, 1,000,000 pixels, IT-type CCD3  
Image pickup scheme:  
RGB 3CCD  
180.0 deg, 172.8 deg, 144.0 deg,  
120.0 deg, 90.0 deg, 45.0 deg,  
1/50 s (50 Hz), 1/60 s, 1/100 s (59.94 Hz), 1/120 s,  
1/250 s, 1/500 s, 1/1000 s, 1/2000 s, HALF  
Synchro-scan shutter:  
Total pixels:  
1370 (H)744 (V)  
Valid pixels:  
1/61.7 s to 1/7200 s  
1280 (H)720 (V)  
CC Filter:  
(1080-59.94i/720-59.94P)  
1/30.9 s to 1/3600 s  
A: 3200 K  
B: 4300 K  
(1080-29.97P/720-29.97P)  
1/24.7 s to 1/2880 s  
C: 5600 K  
D: 1/2 ND  
(1080-23.98P(A)/1080-24P/720-23.98P)  
1/51.4 s to 1/6000 s  
ND Filter:  
(1080-50i/720-50P)  
1: CLEAR  
1/25.7 s to 1/3000 s  
2: 1/4 ND  
(1080-25P/720-25P)  
3: 1/16 ND  
Lens mount:  
4: 1/64 ND  
2/3-inch bayonet type  
Quantizing:  
Color separation optical system:  
Optical prism (F1.4)  
14-bit  
Horizontal drive frequency:  
74.1758 MHz  
Sensitivity:  
F10 (2000 lx, 3200 K, 89.9% reflection, 1080-59.94i)  
Minimum object illuminance:  
0.021 lx (F1.4 at +30 dB and VFR=1P)  
1.24 lx (F1.4 at +30 dB)  
(1080-59.94i/1080-23.98PsF/720-59.94P)  
74.25 MHz  
(1080-50i/1080-24PsF/720-60P/720-50P)  
Sampling frequencies:  
74.1758 MHz  
Video S/N:  
54 dB (standard)  
(1080-59.94i/1080-23.98PsF/720-59.94P)  
74.25 MHz  
Registration error:  
0.03% or less (all areas, excluding lens distortion)  
(1080-50i/1080-24PsF/720-60P/720-50P)  
Digital signal processing:  
74.1758 MHz  
(1080-59.94i/1080-23.98PsF/720-59.94P)  
74.25 MHz  
(1080-50i/1080-24PsF/720-60P/720-50P)  
Programmable gain:  
–3 dB, 0 dB, +3 dB, +6 dB, +9 dB,  
+12 dB, +15 dB, +18 dB, +21 dB,  
+24 dB, +27 dB or +30 dB  
VFR function:  
1P to 60P (720-59.94P/720-60P)  
1P to 50P (720-50P)  
Specifications  
202  
 
General Recording  
Record media:  
Digital Video System  
Sampling frequency:  
P2 card  
Recording formats:  
Y:  
74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz)  
Selectable from DVCPRO HD, AVC-Intra100, AVC-  
Intra50  
Recording video signals:  
74.2500 MHz (50 Hz)  
37.0879 MHz (59.94 Hz)  
37.1250 MHz (50 Hz)  
PB/PR:  
1080-59.94i, 1080-50i, 1080-29.97P, 1080-23.98P,  
Quantizing:  
1080-24P, 1080-25P, 720-59.94P, 720-50P,  
720-29.97P, 720-23.98P, 720-24P, 720-25P  
AVC-Intra100/AVC-Intra50: 10 bits  
DVCPRO HD: 8 bits  
Recording audio signals:  
Video compression schemes:  
AVC-Intra100/AVC-Intra50:  
48 kHz, 16-bit, 4ch (DVCPRO HD/AVC-Intra)  
48.048 kHz, 16-bit, 4ch (720-60P only)  
MPEG4 AVC/H.264 Intra Profile  
Recording/playback time:  
AVC-Intra100/DVCPRO HD:  
8 GB1: approx. 8 min  
DVCPRO HD: DV-Based Compression  
(SMPTE370M)  
16 GB1: approx. 16 min  
32 GB1: approx. 32 min  
AVC-Intra50: 8 GB1: approx. 16 min  
16 GB1: approx. 32 min  
Audio Characteristics  
Frequency response:  
20 Hz to 20 kHz ±1.0 dB (at standard level)  
Dynamic range:  
Minimum 85 dB (1 kHz, AWTD)  
Distortion factor:  
0.1% or less (1 kHz, standard level)  
Headroom:  
20 dB  
32 GB1: approx. 64 min  
Note  
This recording time represents one shot continuously  
recorded on a P2 card. The recording time may be shorter,  
depending on the number of shots recorded.  
For the latest information on P2 cards not available in  
the operating Instructions, visit the P2 Support Desk  
at the following Web sites.  
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/  
Specifications  
203  
Input/output Unit  
GENLOCK IN:  
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2:  
BNC1, 1.0 VP-P, 75 Ω  
(This is available as the return video input connector.)  
XLR2, 3 pins  
LINE, MIC, and +48 V switch-selectable  
MON OUT:  
LINE:  
+4 dBu  
BNC1  
(–3 dBu/0 dBu/+4 dBu selectable  
with menu)  
(It can be switched among HD SDI/VBS.)  
HD SDI:  
0.8 VP-P, 75 Ω  
(Compliant with the SMPTE292M/  
296M standards)  
1.0 VP-P, 75 Ω  
MIC:  
–60 dBu (–60 dBu/–50 dBu  
selectable with menu)  
Compatible with +48 V phantom  
power supply  
MIC +48 V:  
VBS:  
HD SDI A:  
–60 dBu (–60 dBu/–50 dBu  
selectable with menu)  
BNC1, 0.8 VP-P, 75 Ω  
(Compliant with the SMPTE292M/296M standards)  
HD SDI B:  
MIC IN:  
XLR1, 5 pins  
BNC1, 0.8 VP-P, 75 Ω  
+48 V phantom (on/off selectable with menu)  
(Compliant with the SMPTE292M/296M standards)  
–40 dBu (–50 dBu/–40 dBu selectable with menu)  
TC IN:  
WIRELESS IN:  
BNC1, 0.5 VP-P to 8 VP-P, 10 kΩ  
25 pin, D-SUB, –40 dBu  
Dual Channel supported  
AUDIO OUT CH1/CH2:  
TC OUT:  
BNC1, low impedance, 2.0±0.5 VP-P  
DVCPRO:  
6 pins (output)  
Transmission rate:  
400 Mbps, 200 Mbps, or 100 Mbps  
(selectable)  
Transmission data:  
XLR1, 5 pins, +4 dBu  
(–3 dBu/0 dBu/+4 dBu selectable with menu)  
Balanced low-impedance output  
Headphones:  
Stereo mini jack2  
DC IN:  
Compliant with IEEE1394-1995/  
1394a-2000, IEC61883-1 and 2, and  
SMPTE 396M  
XLR1, 4 pins, DC 12 V (DC 11 V to 17 V)  
DC OUT:  
4 pins, DC 12 V (DC 11 V to 17 V)  
Control commands:  
Maximum rated current: 1.5 A  
Compliant with the AV/C Command  
Set standards.  
LENS:  
EVF:  
12 pins  
20 pins  
REMOTE:  
10 pins (connector for AJ-RC10G)  
GPS:  
6 pins (connector for AJ-GPS910G)  
USB 2.0 (HOST):  
Type-A connector, 4-pin, in accordance with USB  
Ver. 2.0  
USB 2.0 (DEVICE):  
Type-B connector, 4-pin, in accordance with USB  
Ver. 2.0  
Accessories  
Shoulder Strap  
Front Audio Level control knob  
Control knob mounting screw1  
CD-ROM  
Weight and dimensions when shown are approximately.  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
Specifications  
204  
Software information for this product  
1 Customer advisory: This product includes software licensed under the GNU General Public License (GPL) and GNU  
this software.  
Descriptions of the GPL and LGPL are stored on the installation CD included with this camera-recorder. See the folder  
named \LDOC. (The description is the original (written in English)). To download the relevant source code, visit  
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/.  
Please note that we cannot answer any questions you may have about the content, etc. of any source code you may  
obtain from the above Web site.  
2 This product includes software licensed under the MIT License. A description of the MIT is stored on the installation CD  
included with this camera-recorder. See the folder named \LDOC. (The description is the original (written in English)).  
This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license for the personal and non-commercial use of a consumer to  
(i) encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that was encoded by a  
consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to  
provide AVC Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained  
from MPEG LA, LLC.  
See http://www.mpegla.com.  
Unislot is a trademark of Ikegami Tsushinki Co., Ltd.  
Other names of companies and products are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies.  
205  
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment  
and used Batteries  
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic  
products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.  
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection  
points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.  
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential  
negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.  
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality,  
your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.  
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.  
For business users in the European Union  
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.  
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union  
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local  
authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.  
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):  
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the  
Directive for the chemical involved.  
Cd  

Pyramid Car Audio PB800SX User Manual
PYLE Audio View Series PLVSR7IR User Manual
Philips AQ 6487 User Manual
Perlick DS32 User Manual
Orion Car Audio CO500 User Manual
Numark Industries Car Stereo System NDX800 User Manual
Metra Electronics 99 7013 User Manual
Kicker Comp S Series Car Subwoofer 40CWS104 User Manual
JVC Model KD ABT22J User Manual
JVC KD R514 User Manual